XAPI6

Contents
Index
Exit
Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control

System Extended Advantage (MAPICS XA)
Planning and Installing MAPICS XA
Document Number: SB35-4263-9
Published by MAPICS, Inc. in Alpharetta, Georgia USA
Contents
Index
Exit
Notices
Changes are made periodically to the information herein; any such changes will be reported in subsequent revisions.
This document contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the
examples contain the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious, and any similarity to the
names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
Trademarks and service marks

MAPICS, XA, Point.Man, Thru-Put, and Maincor are trademarks of MAPICS, Inc.
The following are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and/or other countries:
AS/400
IBM
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Tenth Edition (June 2000)

This edition applies to the Cross Application Support application, program number 5733-M7X, for the AS/400 Manufacturing Accounting
and Production Information Control System Extended Advantage (MAPICS XA), Version 2 Release 6 and to all subsequent versions and
releases until otherwise indicated in new editions. Make sure you are using the correct edition for the level of the product.
Order publications through your MAPICS representative. Publications are not stocked at the address given below.
A form for your comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address your comments to:
MAPICS, Inc.
1000 Windward Concourse Parkway
Suite 100
Alpharetta, Georgia 30005
USA
Attn: Information Development
When you send information to MAPICS, you grant MAPICS a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
1990, 2000 MAPICS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page iii
To the reader
To the reader
This book contains the information about planning and installing the MAPICS XA applications. The
information in this book applies only to MAPICS XA.
Chapter 1. Before you begin introduces the information you need to know as you begin the process of
planning and installing MAPICS XA.
Chapter 2. Planning for installation describes the activities you do to plan the installation, including how
to organize your business data and plan the installation tasks effectively.
Chapter 3. Installing MAPICS XA describes the installation activities, including a general description of
each task and where you can find more information.
Chapter 4. After installing MAPICS XA describes the activities you can do after installation, depending
on the needs of your business.
Chapter 5. Managing your business information describes the activities you do to manage the
processing of your business information.
Use the appendixes to find checklists for planning and installing, the installation questionnaire for each
application that uses one, special forms information, and sample charts of accounts.
Before you use this book, complete the AS/400 education for the basic operating concepts of the AS/400
system if you do not have equivalent knowledge.
If you have any trouble following the instructions in this book, note your problems on the Evaluation Form in
the back of the book and mail the form. If the form has been removed, mail your comments to the address on
the back of the title page of this publication.
For a complete list of the books in the MAPICS XA library, see the bibliography included on the MAPICS
documentation CD.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page iv
Summary of changes
Summary of changes
Release 6 offers the following enhancements/changes:
Enhanced calendar support provides the ability to define and identify multiple calendars and then associate
a particular calendar to a warehouse or production line. Questions in FCST, MPSP, and REP have been
affected by this change.
EPDM activation causes a need to answer the EPDM questionnaire, instead of the PDM questionnaire. When
EPDM is activated, PDM is no longer available and applications that need Bill of Material, Routing, and
Facilities information use EPDM files.
CRP has had some load analysis questions removed. They are now maintainable on Display AMTB11 under
option 6 on menu AMTM10.
Accounting Management Plus (AMplus), enhancements to AP, AR, and GL, does not have its own install/
tailor questions. Instead, you must answer a specific question in those applications. See the questionnaires
for AP, AR, and GL for that question.
Materials Management (MM) and Order-Based Production Management (OBPM) are new applications in
this release. Neither of them have questionnaires.
Clarification and more explanation of license management is now included in Chapter 1.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page v
Contents
Contents
To the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Chapter 1. Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
License management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview of installation activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Using the installation checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Ordering supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Tapes or CDs you receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Install tapes or CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Source tapes or CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Overview of euro currency support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Application functional enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Toggle among currencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Chapter 2. Planning for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Tailoring your applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Basic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Application options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Application prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Understanding the application interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Accounts Payable interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Accounts Receivable interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Capacity Requirements Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Contract Accounting interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Customer Order Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
COM_Net Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Electronic Commerce interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Enterprise Product Data Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Estimating Quote Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Financial Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Forecasting interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
General Ledger interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
International Financial Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL) interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Inventory Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Knowledge Based Configurator interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Maintenance Management System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Manufacturing Performance Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Master Production Schedule Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Material Requirements Planning interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Materials Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Order-Based Production Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Payroll interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Procurement Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Product Data Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Production Control and Costing interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Production Monitoring and Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Purchasing interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Contents
Index
Exit
Page vi
Contents
Repetitive Production Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Sales Analysis interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Using the application master files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Chapter 3. Installing MAPICS XA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installing the AS/400 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Creating user profiles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Setting the date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Initial application installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Install/tailor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Entering data into the master files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Chapter 4. After installing MAPICS XA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Testing your applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Activating interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Establishing MAPICS XA security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Adding environments using extended environment support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Creating tailored sign-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Setting up Group Job support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Setting up Note Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Activating note tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Deactivating note tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Reorganizing notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Chapter 5. Managing your business information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Auditing and controlling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Creating an audit trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Backing up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Controlling access to data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Checking for data accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Ensuring the correct sequence of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Scheduling data processing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Daily scheduling considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Multiple batch job queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Storage capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
MAPICS XA print spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Appendix A. Planning information checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Installation Planning Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Appendix B. Installation questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Using the application tailoring questionnaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Cross Application Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Define basic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-17
B-17
B-20
B-26
Contents
Index
Exit
Page vii
Contents
Capacity Requirements Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29

Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define company options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-31
B-31
B-35
B-37
COM_Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
Enterprise Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-41
B-41
B-44
B-48
Financial Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49

Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
General Ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-63
B-63
B-64
B-69
International Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71

Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-75
B-75
B-86
B-88
Manufacturing Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95

MPA application dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95
Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Production Monitoring & Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
Define constant options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100
Master Production Schedule Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
Material Requirements Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105
Payroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define functional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-107
B-107
B-113
B-119
Contents
Index
Exit
Page viii
Contents
Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-123
B-123
B-126
B-130
Production Control and Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-131
B-131
B-138
B-139
Production Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-159
B-159
B-161
B-162
Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171
Define constants options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-176
Repetitive Production Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-187
Define report options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-190
Sales Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-193
B-193
B-195
B-197
Appendix C. Special forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Customer Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Manufacturing Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Payroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Production Control and Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
Production Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
Purchasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
Repetitive Production Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61
Appendix D. Sample charts of accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chart of accountsmanufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Income Taxes 9000-9999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current assets 10001499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed assets 15001599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Investments 16001699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other assets 17001799 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current liabilities 20002499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long-term liabilities 25002999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stockholders equity 30003999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Income (revenue) 40004099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cost of salesmaterial 41004199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cost of salesdirect labor 42004299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cost of salesmanufacturing overhead 50006999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administrative expenses 70007999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other income and expense 80008999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Income taxes 90009999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chart of accountsdistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-5
D-5
D-5
D-6
Contents
Index
Exit
Page ix
Contents
Current assets 10001499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Fixed assets 15001599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Investments 16001699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Other assets 17001799 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Current liabilities 20002499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Long-term liabilities 25002999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Stockholders equity 30003999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Income (revenue) 40004099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Cost of goods sold 41004999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Selling expenses 50005999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
General and administrative 6000-6999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Outside services 70007099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Materials and supplies 71007199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Depreciation and amortization 72007299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Rents 73007399 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Utilities 74007499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Interest and taxes 75007599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Other operating expenses 76007699 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Non-operating income and expense 80008999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Income taxes 90009999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
General Ledger Master Offline File LoadChart of Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Appendix E. Fax Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Ordering and installing the Fax Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
Faxing documents to your customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
Faxing documents to your vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-3
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN-1
Contents
Index
Exit
Page x
Contents
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-1
Before you begin
Chapter 1. Before you begin

Read this chapter to find out what you should know before you plan your MAPICS XA
installation. It contains information about the day to day process you will be following
and what books to refer to as you follow the steps. The rest of this book helps you
understand the sequence of planning and installing the MAPICS XA applications.
License management............................................................................................... 1-2
Overview of installation activities.............................................................................. 1-3
Using the installation checklists ............................................................................... 1-3
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................... 1-4
Tapes or CDs you receive ........................................................................................ 1-4
Install tapes or CDs .................................................................................................. 1-5
Source tapes or CDs ................................................................................................ 1-5
Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM) ................................................................. 1-6
Overview of euro currency support.......................................................................... 1-7
Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation.............................................. 1-13
The acronym CAS that you see frequently in this book refers to Cross Application
Support, the application that you use to install and manage your other MAPICS XA
applications.
Contents
Index
Page 1-2
Before you begin
Exit
License management
MAPICS, Inc. gives you a choice of licenses you can purchase for your company:
Tier user
This license allows unlimited users (processor based). Some

individual applications may have a specific limitation on the
number of users or workstations.
Registered user
This license allows one named user per device (PC, 5250
terminal, or other workstation) up to the usage limit set by
MAPICS. When the user exits MAPICS, the user registration
remains.
Concurrent sessions This license allows multiple user sessions up to a usage limit
set by MAPICS.
Note: MAPICS license management allows a 30-day grace period, which allows
you to exceed your usage limit by 50% for a 30-day period. The grace period begins
the first time a user who causes the preset limit to be exceeded signs on to MAPICS.
During the grace period, all users exceeding the usage limit will receive warning
messages, but will be allowed to run MAPICS. After the grace period has ended, any
attempt to access MAPICS will be denied if it will cause the usage limit to be
exceeded.
MAPICS requires a license key for each application. You must obtain a license key
from MAPICS each year. Sixty days prior to the expiration date of each application
license, the first user who signs on to MAPICS each day receives a warning
message. Thirty days prior to the expiration date of each license, all users who sign
on to MAPICS each day receive a warning message. After the expiration date, all
users are denied access to MAPICS.
To obtain a license key, contact MAPICS, Inc. through the normal telephone support
number. The following information must be provided to verify your license:
Customer number.
System model number.
System serial number.
CPU processor number.
A list of MAPICS applications you have licensed.
MAPICS, Inc. will provide an 18-character encrypted code, which you must enter into
your AS/400 in order to activate the license key.
See your MAPICS representative for more information on licenses.
Contents
Index
Page 1-3
Before you begin
Exit
Overview of installation activities

Installing MAPICS XA applications involves a number of activities, from
understanding the overall structure of the applications, gathering and organizing
your business data, and getting the people at your company ready for the
application tasks, to physically installing the AS/400 system and running the
installation tasks.
Planning is the most important step in the installation process. The following figure
shows you the sequence of installation activities and the books you should use.
Activity
Plan your installation:
- Assign jobs
- Train people
- Order supplies
- Organize your business information
Install your AS/400 system
Install MAPICS XA:
- Initial application installation
- Install/tailor applications
- Convert files (if applicable)
Prepare MAPICS XA files:
- Enter data into files
- Load data from offline files
Manage your business information:
- Audit and control data
- Schedule the work
Books to use
Users Guides/Concept Guides
AS/400 manuals
CAS Users Guide
CAS Conversion Guide
Using the installation checklists

This book includes two checklists to help you manage the installation (see
Appendix A):
Assignment Checklist. Use this form to record the names of persons or
departments responsible for each installation step, the date you want the step
completed, and the date it is actually completed.
Installation Planning Schedule. Fill out this schedule, working back from the date
your system is scheduled to be installed.
Assigning jobs
The assignment checklist identifies the jobs involved in installing and running the
AS/400 hardware and operating system and the MAPICS XA applications. The three
major areas of responsibilities are installation, system operations, and workstation
operations:
Installation manager. This person is responsible for planning the activities
necessary to install MAPICS XA. The installation manager should know all
aspects of the business and work with the system users.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-4
Before you begin
System operator. This person is responsible for the overall monitoring and
controlling of the system. The system operator handles all CDs, tapes, and
diskettes, loads special forms on the system printer and assists workstation
operators when necessary. The system operator must also be familiar with the
AS/400 operating system commands.
Workstation operators. These people use MAPICS XA for daily business
activities.
Training the personnel

The assignment checklist also lists the areas in which your personnel need to be
trained so they can install and run the AS/400 system and the MAPICS XA
applications.
Ordering supplies
You may need to order the following supplies to use MAPICS XA:
__ Standard computer paper (14-7/8 by 11 inches) for reports
__ Binders to hold application books, reports, and registers
__ Diskettes to enter transactions or to load your files
__ Tapes for daily backups and permanent offline storage
__ Printer ribbons
__ Special forms. Some application functions require preprinted or blank forms that
are a different size than the standard computer paper. For detailed information
on these special forms, see Appendix A.
Tapes or CDs you receive

The programs, files, and other information you need to install and update your
MAPICS XA applications are delivered to you on tapes or CD. You may receive some
or all of the following, depending on the kind of order your company places.
Install
Source
Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM)
File conversion
Miscellaneous
This section describes the tape or CD contents, and the naming conventions for the
libraries. This information helps you understand the tape or CD contents that you see
when you use the Display Tape (DSPTAP) or Display Optical (DSPOPT) command on
the AS/400 system.
The library names in this section may contain the following characters:
a
Application ID (for a list of IDs, see Getting Started with MAPICS XA)
nnnnn Last digit of the release level

_
Last character of the application product current PTF number for the
application number (found on the back cover of an application book)
Contents
Index
Page 1-5
Before you begin
Exit
Install tapes or CDs

The install tapes or CDs contain the initial installation code and contain one or more
applications.
The following tables show the libraries used to install CAS and the naming
convention for the libraries used to install other applications.
CAS installation libraries
Description
INSTALL
Programs used to install applications
APPHDR
CAS data area
AMZE01
First part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)
AMZE02
Second part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)
AMZE03
Third part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB
AMZE21
First part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB
AMZE22
Second part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB
AMZE11
First part of the program library (AMALIB)
AMZE12
Second part of the program library (AMALIB)
AMZE13
Third part of the program library (AMALIB)
AMZE14
Fourth part of the program library (AMALIB)
Application
installation libraries
Description
APPHDR
Information about an application
AMaE0
Install/tailor programs and files for an application
AMaE1
AMALIB daily operational programs, display files, and help

text display files for an application
AMaE2 (optional)
AMFLIB data structures
Note: If you receive more than one application on a tape, these libraries are grouped together
for each application.
For example, using this table, if the libraries on the install tape are INSTALL,
APPHDR, AMZE01, AMZE02, AMZE03, AMZE21, AMZE22, AMZE11, AMZE12,
AMZE13, AMZE14, APPHDR, AMAE0, AMAE1, APPHDR, AMRE0, and AMRE1, the
tape contains install code and programs for CAS, AP, and AR.
Source tapes or CDs

The tapes that you receive when you order source code contain:
Source library
Description
AMMLIB
Each AMMLIB on the tape contains the source code for one
application. For information on how to restore the source code to
the AS/400 system, see the CAS Technical Reference Guide.
Contents
Index
Page 1-6
Before you begin
Exit
Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM)

Updates to the install tapes or CDs are packaged on a PCM tape or CD. The install
tape or CD, along with the latest PCM tape or CD, give you the latest MAPICS XA
package. You receive a PCM tape or CD along with the install tapes or CDs if a PCM
tape or CD has been released.
PCM libraries
Description
ACSAPPLY
Programs used to apply application correction sets. If there are

multiple tapes or CDs, this library is only on the first tape or CD.
ACSHDR
Information about application correction sets for a specific

application
M7_HDR CD
M7_nnnnnO
Object code for an application that is placed in your installed

application libraries
M7_nnnnnS
Source code for fixes to an application
The following applications are the exceptions to the naming convention for libraries
on PCM tapes or CDs:
Application
Object Library
Tape or CD
Source library
Contract Accounting (CA)
CAMnnnnn0
CAMnnnnnS
Enterprise Product Data Management
MBEnnnnn0
MBEnnnnnS
Estimating and Quote Management (EQM)
EQMnnnnn0
EQMnnnnnS
Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS)
FCPnnnnn0
FCPnnnnnS
InterSite Logistic (ISL)
MBLnnnnn0
MBLnnnnnS
Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC)
KBCnnnnnO
KBCnnnnS
Manufacturing Performance Analysis (MPA)
MPAnnnnO
MPAnnnnS
Multi-Environment InterSite Logistics (MISL)
M8MnnnnnO
M8MnnnnnS
Procurement Management (PM)
M8UnnnnnO
M8UnnnnnO
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-7
Before you begin
Overview of euro currency support

European Monetary Union (EMU) regulations state that you can use dual currencies
at any time beginning January 1, 1999, through January 1, 2002, if you are working
with a euro-participating currency. If you plan to consolidate European operations,
consider an early migration to euro. If consolidation is not a factor, you may safely
wait until the last half of 2001 because:
EMU regulations state that you can comply with governmental reporting
requirements in either your national currency or euros. Remember, though, that
national governments may not be able to handle euro-denominated reporting in
the early stages of the transition.
Your companys employees will have more time to absorb the euro into their
business thinking.
Your companys employees have the right to be paid in your national currency
until euro notes and coins become available on January 1, 2002.
Government payroll reports must be in national currency until January 1, 2002.
Warning: Convert all your systems, offline files, and spreadsheets at the same time.
You risk contamination of your data if your conversion is incomplete.
Warning: MAPICS XA Accounting Management Accounts Payable, Accounting
Management Accounts Receivable, Accounting Management General Ledger,
Financial Analysis, and Payroll do not support the conversion of local currency
amounts to euro.
Ensure that your business is completely ready to convert to euros before you attempt
this effort. Be aware, though, that the actual conversion process is lengthy, so do not
wait to begin the planning process.
MAPICS XA provides two types of assistance to help you deal with euro currency:
Application functional enhancements: MAPICS XA provides enhancements to
help you manage trading currency amounts when your trading partners start
doing business in euros in:
-
Customer Order Management (COM)

Purchasing/Procurement Management (PUR/PM)
International Financial Management (IFM)
Accounting Management Accounts Payable (AP)
Accounting Management Accounts Receivable (AR).
Local currency conversion tool: For companies within euro-participating

countries, MAPICS XA provides a tool to convert your local currency when your
organization converts your books to euros. Use this tool only once.
The tool, the Euro Currency Conversion Aid (ECCA), is available to all
MAPICS XA Release 5 and later customers. Use the Euro Currency Conversion
Aid Guide to help plan and implement your conversion efforts. ECCA converts
the local currency values from a euro-participating currency to the euro in one or
more of the following:
- Local currency values in a MAPICS environment
- IFM financial divisions in a MAPICS or non-MAPICS administrative division
- IFM cash books in a MAPICS or non-MAPICS administrative division.
Contents
Index
Page 1-8
Before you begin
Exit
MAPICS provides these functions in support of euro conversion:

The ability to:
- Convert current currency through triangulation
- Print alternate currencies on trading partner documents and reports
- Toggle between currencies: local, trading, or an alternate
Additional customer and vendor capabilities for multiple currencies
Additional COM price book capabilities through offline load and euro price book
generation
Additional IFM capabilities for multiple currencies.
See the MAPICS XA users guides for information about euro support for the following
specific applications:
Cross Application Support

Customer Order Management
International Financial Management
Procurement Management
Purchasing
Accounting Management Accounts Payable
Accounting Management Accounts Receivable.
This table shows how MAPICS XA applications are affected by conversion to euro:
Table 1-1. MAPICS applications affected by euro
Application
Functional
changes
Local
conversion
Accounting Management Accounts Payable
Yes
No
Accounting Management Accounts Receivable
Yes
No
Accounting Management General Ledger
No
No
Capacity Requirements Planning
No
No
Contract Accounting
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
EDI support (pre-EC)
Yes
No
Electronic Commerce
No
Yes
No
Yes
Estimate and Quote Management
No
Yes
Executive Information System
Yes
Yes
Financial Analysis
No
No
Finite Capacity Planning/Scheduling
No
No
Forecasting
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
InterSite Logistics
No
Yes
Inventory Management
No
Yes
Knowledge-Based Configurator
Yes
Yes
Maintenance Management System
No
No
Manufacturing Performance Analysis
No
Yes
MAPICS Browser
No
No
Marketing Monitoring and Analysis
Yes
No
Contents
Index
Page 1-9
Before you begin
Exit
Table 1-1. (Continued)MAPICS applications affected by euro

Application
Functional
changes
Local
conversion
Master Production Schedule Planning
No
Yes
Material Requirements Planning
No
No
Materials Management
No
No
Multiple Environment InterSite Logistics
No
Yes
Order-Based Production Management
No
No
Payroll
No
No
PowerVision
No
No
Procurement Management
Yes
No
Production Control and Costing
No
Yes
Product Data Management
No
Yes
PDMPlus
No
No
Production Monitoring and Control
No
Yes
Purchasing
Yes
Yes
Repetitive Manufacturing
Yes
No
Sales Analysis
No
Yes
Application functional enhancements

These functional enhancements are used by many MAPICS XA applications:
Alternate currency printing
Toggle between currencies
Support for financials, depending on which of the following is installed:
- MAPICS XA Accounting Management financials
- MAPICS XA IFM
- Third-party financials
Currency conversion routines
Currency exchange rate overrides
Trading partner reports.
Alternate currency printing

Documents you send to your trading partners can be printed with the details in europarticipating currency or in euro. Where applicable, you can print the totals in both
euro-participating currencies and euros. These include:
Customer quotes
Invoices
Purchase orders
Debit memos
Shipping schedules
Order acknowledgements
Customer statements
Delinquency notices
Collection letters
Audit confirmation letters.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-10
Before you begin
Toggle among currencies

With the introduction of the euro, your customers and vendors may convert to the
euro at any point of time during the transition period. They may have orders, quotes,
invoices, and so forth, denominated in both euro-participating currencies and the
euro. The toggling enhancement modifies the current toggling function available in
MAPICS. This function allows a users to view a euro-participating order, quote,
invoice, and so forth, in euro and is intended to help you handle inquiries about the
status of a trading partners account.
IFM installations. You can toggle between euro-participating amounts and the euro.
Depending on the inquiry you use, if the ledger, entity, or transaction is denominated
in a currency that is euro participating, the toggle to euro is available. The following
inquiries are included:
Online Business inquiry
Personal Ledger inquiry
Cashbook inquiry.
Non-IFM installations. You can see the amounts of a transaction in up to three

currencies: local, trading, and alternate. The alternate currency is available as an
alternative to the trading currency when the trading currency is either euro or europarticipating. Toggling capabilities allow you to see amounts in all three currencies
when they are different. This provides the ability to work with transactions in
currencies other than the currency in which they were entered. This is especially
useful during the euro transition period when transactions are sometimes viewed in
the national currency and sometimes need to be looked at in the euro currency.
As an example, a payment is made in euros but the quote, contract, order, or invoice
is denominated in a euro-participating currency. You can view the original transaction
in euro even though it was entered in the national currency. You define the
transactions alternate currency as the euro in order to toggle.
Another example is one in which a euro-denominated order or invoice will be paid in
a euro-participating currency. In this case, you define the alternate currency as the
national currency and toggle from euro to the national currency.
The following MAPICS XA applications use this feature:
COM
Purchasing/Procurement Management
AP
AR.
Euro support with Accounting Management financials installed

A customer or vendor can only have one primary currency. You cannot change the
currency ID for these customers and vendors. If a customer or vendor uses a europarticipating currency, you must create a new customer or vendor for the trading
partner when the trading partner converts to euro. You can copy an existing
customer or vendor record and change the currency to euro.
COM Customer Copy: This function copies all default customer information such
as ship-to and tax registration to the new customer number. It defines a reference
between the newly created customer number and the old customer number. Use
credit checking to account for the new customer number you created.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-11
Before you begin
Purchasing Vendor Copy: This function copies all default vendor information
and, optionally, all vendor/items records. It also optionally updates the Item
Master and Item Balance files with the new vendor number.
Warning: Accounting Management Accounts Payable and Accounting
Management Accounts Receivable do not support the conversion of local currency
amounts to euro.
Euro support with IFM installed

Multiple currency vendors. If you use IFM financial applications, you may change
the currency ID in the vendor master file when the trading partner converts to euro.
This currency ID will be the default when you enter quotes or orders. You may
override the currency to any valid currency ID. Vendor totals in the vendor master file
are converted from the old trading currency to the new trading currency as defined in
the file. Throughout MAPICS XA, the currency is no longer dictated by the currency
ID of the customer or vendor; it is defined by either the transaction or the order
record.
Multiple currency customers. When IFM and COM are both installed, the IFM
financial division is the same as a COM company. The customer number created in
COM is a combination of an IFM entity and a two-digit suffix derived from the
personal ledger defined for the customer.
You can define a personal ledger on the customer master file. This is the default on
order entry. You can override the personal ledger on the customer master on order
entry to any valid personal ledger. A personal account data record must exist for the
personal ledger override.
Personal accounts. Once you create personal ledgers for IFM accounts receivable
and accounts payable for the euro in each financial division, you can mass create
personal account records for each entity identified. The defaults from the personal
ledger are used to create the personal accounts.
Credit check. You can credit check IFM entities within a financial division. In COM,
any customers within a COM company for the associated entity can be credit
checked in the entity currency.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-12
Before you begin
IFM accounts receivable cash receipt

You may receive a cash payment that is different than the invoice amount because of
rounding differences. Because these differences can have a major impact on IFM
cash receipt processing, IFM supports both positive or negative adjustments to
invoices to allow for efficient processing of cash receipts.
IFM alternate currency automated payments. IFM can automatically generate

payments using Payment List and Notes Collection Lists in a currency different from
the invoices transaction or cash book currency. You can:
Enter an exchange rate override if either the payment currency or the financial
division currency are non-euro participating.
Use a payment currency different than the cash book or invoice currency.
Payment lists are generated based on the selection criteria and the personal
ledgers you select.
Check to ensure valid exchange rates exist for a split payment list. In they exist,
the payment currency is the same as the original payment list.
Payment list reports and lists identify the payment currency. Any gain or loss is
based on the payment currency. The generic payment file records show the payment
currency amounts.
Euro support with third-party financials installed

If you use third-party financial applications, you may change the currency ID in the
customer or vendor master file when the trading partner converts to euro. This
currency ID will be the default when you enter quotes or orders. You may override the
currency to any valid currency ID. Vendor totals in the vendor master file are
converted from the old trading currency to the new trading currency as defined in the
file. Throughout MAPICS XA, the currency is no longer dictated by the currency ID of
the customer or vendor; it is defined by either the transaction or the order record.
Currency conversion routine

The MAPICS currency conversion routine supports the euro. After you establish any
currency as euro participating, no direct exchange rate is recognized between a
euro-participating currency and any currency other than euro. All currency
conversions between euro-participating currencies and all other non-euro currencies
are done via the euro in a process known as triangulation.
Currency exchange rate override

Exchange rates between the euro and euro-participating currencies will be
established. These exchange rates will be fixed and will not change throughout the
transition period. When you set an exchange rate between the currency of the europarticipating countries and the euro, you cannot change this rate, nor can you create
a new effective exchange rate. All MAPICS orders or transactions ensure the
exchange rate cannot be overridden between the euro and the euro-participating
currency, and between two euro-participating currencies during:
COM order entry
Purchasing order entry
IFM transaction processing.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-13
Before you begin
Trading partner reports

During the transition period, various reports can be printed in euro or the trading
partners currency. After the transition period, when all transactions are in euro, all
reports and documents will only be available in euro. These reports are intended for
analyzing trading partner performance and account status, and are not intended to
be sent to your trading partners.
Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation

eWorkPlace (eWP) is the Microsoft Windows-based graphical user interface for
MAPICS XA. The eWP windows co-exist with the MAPICS XA character-based
displays, called Host screens. If you are using eWP, you can view the corresponding
Host screen for any eWP window, if necessary.
Note: If you have modified a Host screen, the GUI default is used. The default GUI
feature can be enabled or disabled.
The users guides and help text contain instructions that reference the host
MAPICS XA screens (called panels and displays) rather than the eWP windows.
To understand how a Host screen instruction relates to an action on a eWP window, it
is helpful to look for text on a window control that corresponds to the instruction. For
example, Cancel on a button and on a File pull-down corresponds to the user guide
instruction use F12=Cancel to return to the previous display.
Note: For the instruction press Enter, the corresponding control on an eWP
window is an OK button.
The following table shows other examples of instructions from the documentation
and the corresponding actions you take on the eWorkPlace window.
Documentation instructions
eWorkPlace actions
To change the details of a vendor, type 2 next Select a vendor, then select Change or type C
to the vendor and press Enter.
from the List menu or select Change using the
right mouse. Click the OK button.
To create a vendor, use F6.
Select Create on the Functions menu or click
the Create button.
Position to command. If you want to skip to a Type the full or partial command in the
particular command, type the full or partial
position to entry field and click the Position
command.
button.
Type the information requested and press
Type values in or select values for the entry
Enter.
fields and click the OK button.
Type values in or select values for the entry
Type the information requested and use a
function key.
fields and click a button or select an action on
the Functions pull-down.
Use the Item Master maintenance display
Use the Item Master maintenance window
to......
to.....
For more information about eWP, see Getting Started with eWorkPlace.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 1-14
Before you begin
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-1
Planning for installation
Chapter 2. Planning for installation

Before you install MAPICS XA, you need to organize your business data based on
the application functions you want to use. You begin by completing a questionnaire
for each application you are installing. Your answers determine the functions you
select. After installation, you load and update the information in the master files to
process the data you use to run your company.
To complete the questionnaires, you should understand how the applications work
with each other. To prepare data for the master files, you should learn how the files
are used by each application. Read this chapter for an overview of these topics. See
the application users guides for detailed explanations of how your business data
relates to specific application functions, interfaces, and master files.
Tailoring your applications

Each application that you install has a unique set of questions called a questionnaire.
Your responses to the questions tailor the application to your companys needs. For
example, you can choose which features of an application you want to use and
various methods of processing your business data. The questionnaires for all the
applications that use install/tailor questions are in Appendix B, Installation
questionnaires, except the Contract Accounting (CA) questionnaire is in the
Contract Accounting Users Guide and the Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC)
questionnaire is in the Knowledge Based Configurator documentation.
You enter your questionnaire responses into the system during the install/tailor
process described in Chapter 3, Installing MAPICS XA. You must complete a
questionnaire the first time you install an application; you can tailor it again anytime
your business needs change.
The questions are divided into two main categories: basic and application options.
An Install license is required before questions can be answered.
Basic options
The CAS questionnaire contains the basic option questions, such as which
accounting method your company uses. These questions apply to multiple
applications and all of the companies you support.
Application options
After you answer the basic option questions, you answer the questionnaires for the
applications you are installing or tailoring. The questionnaires are divided into
functional, constants, and report options. Functional options contain questions about
how you want to use the application functions, such as whether you want certain
applications to interface. Constants options require information that will not change,
such as your company name. Report options allow you to determine formats for the
information that prints on an applications reports.
Contents
Index
Page 2-2
Exit
Application prerequisites
Some MAPICS XA applications require other applications or prerequisites.
Additionally, optional applications are ones that share data with the primary
MAPICS XA applications. The shared data is not critical to the primary application.
Following are the MAPICS XA prerequisite and optional applications:
Primary application
Prerequisites
AMplus (Accounting
Management Plus)
CAS, AP, AR, and GL
Optional application
AP (Accounts Payable)
CAS
EC, EIS, GL, IM, PC&C, PUR
AR (Acccounts Receivable)
CAS
COM, EC, EIS, GL
CA (Contract Accounting)
CAS, IM and PDM or EPDM
COM, IM, PC&C
CAS (Cross Application

Support)
All MXA applications require

CAS
All MXA applications
COM (Customer Order

Management)
CAS
Acctg. Mgmt. AR or IFM, CA,

CRP, EC, PDM or EPDM, EIS,
EQM, FCST, Acctg. Mgmt. GL
or IFM, IM, ISL, KBC, MISL,
MMA, MPA, MPSP, MRP, PCM,
PV, REP, SA
COM_Net
CAS, COM, IM
CRP (Capacity Requirements CAS, IM, PC&C or CAS, IM,

Planning)
PDM or EPDM
COM, MRP
EC (Electronic Commerce)
CAS
AP, AR, COM, IFM, IM, MRP,

PUR
EIS (Executive Information

System)
CAS
AP, AR, COM, GL, IFM, IM

PC&C, PUR, PDM or EPDM
EPDM (Enterprise PDM )
CAS
EQM, IM, MPSP, MRP, PC&C,

PR, CRP
EQM (Estimating and Quote

Management)
CAS
COM, PDM or EPDM, IM, KBC
eWP (eWorkPlace)
N/A
N/A
FA (Financial Analysis)
CAS and GL or IFM
N/A
FCPS (Finite Capacity)

Planning and Scheduling)
CAS, IM, PC&C, and PDM or

EPDM
MRP, PDM+
FCST (Forecasting)
CAS and IM
AR, COM, IM, MPSP, MRP,

PC&C,PM&C, REP, SA
GL (General Ledger)
CAS
AP, AR, COM, EIS, FA, IM,

PC&C, PR, PUR, REP
IFM (International Financial

Management)
CAS
COM, EC, FA, IM, PC&C, PR,

PUR, REP
IM (Inventory Management)
CAS
AP, CA, COM, CRP, EC, EIS,

PDM or EPDM, EQM, FCPS,
FCST, GL or IFM, ISL, KBC,
MISL, PM, MMS, MPA, MPSP,
MRP, PC&C, PDM+, PM&C,
PUR, PV, REP, SA
ISL (InterSite Logistics)
CAS, COM, IM, MRP and

PDM or EPDM
MPSP
Contents
Index
Page 2-3
Exit
Primary application
Prerequisites
Optional application
KBC (Knowledge Based

Configurator)
CAS and COM
EQM, IM, PC&C, PDM or

EPDM, and MRP
MISL (Multi-environment
InterSite Logistics)
CAS, COM, IM, ISL, MRP, and MPSP

PDM or EPDM
MM (Materials Management)
CAS, IM, PUR
PM
MMS (Maintenance
Management System)
CAS, IM and PUR
N/A
MMA (Market Monitoring and CAS and COM

Analysis)
IM, MPSP, MRP, PC&C, PDM

or EPDM, and REP
MPA (Manufacturing
Performance Analysis)
CAS and IM
COM, MRP, PC&C, PDM or

EPDM
MPSP (Master production

Scheduling Planning)
CAS, IM, MRP and PDM or

EPDM
COM, FCST, ISL, PUR
MRP (Material Requirements

Planning)
CAS, IM and PDM or EPDM
AR, CA, COM, CRP, EC, FCST,

IM, ISL, MPA, MPSP, PUR,
REP
OBPM (Order-Based
Production Management)
CAS, IM, PC&C
COM, ISL, KBC, MISL, MRP,

PDM or EPDM, PUR, PM,
PM&C
PC&C (Production Control

and Costing)
CAS and IM
AP, GL or IFM, MPA, PM&C,

PR, PUR
PDM (Product Data

Management)
CAS
COM, EQM, IM, PC&C, MPA,

MRP, MPSP
PDM+ (Product Data

Managment Plus)
CAS, PDM
IM
PM (Procurement
Management)
CAS, IM and PUR
AP, IFM, IM, GL, PDM or

EPDM, PDM+
PM&C (Product Monitoring

and Control)
CAS
CA, GL or IFM, IM, PC&C, PR

and REP
PR (Payroll)
CAS
CA, GL or IFM, PC&C and

PM&C
PUR (Purchasing)
CAS and IM
AP, EC, EIS, GL, IFM, IM,

MMS, MRP, PC&C, PDM,
PDM+, PV
PV (Power Visiion)
CAS
AP, AR, CA, COM, EQM, IM,

MRP, PC&C, PDM or EPDM,
PUR, REP and SA
REP (Repetitive Production

Management)
CAS, IM, and PDM or EPDM
MRP, FCST
SA (Sales Analysis)
CAS and AR or IFM or IM or

COM
1. If COM, then AR or IFM and

IM or
2. If AR, then COM and IM
and FCST
eWP (Visual Work Place)
CAS
All AS/400 based MXA

application(s)
Note: Throughout this book, we use Accounts Payable (AP), Accounts Receivable
(AR), and General Ledger (GL) to mean the Accounting Management Accounts
Payable, Accounting Management Accounts Receivable, and Accounting
Management General Ledger applications.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-4
Understanding the application interfaces

Many MAPICS XA applications share or pass information (interface). Some
interfaces are automatic; that is, if the applications are installed, they share or pass
information. You implement other interfaces by answering an install/tailor question
and then activating the interfaces using option 4, Activate/Deactivate Interfaces on
the CAS Maintenance/Change menu (AMZM30). For example:
If Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Forecasting, or Purchasing is
installed with General Ledger, the application uses information from the General
Ledger Master file. This interface is automatic.
Master Production Schedule Planning uses Forecasting information from the
Demand Interface file if you answer Yes to the Forecasting question:
DO YOU WANT TO PASS FORECASTED REQUIREMENTS TO THE DEMAND
INTERFACE FILE?
This interface is also automatic.
Accounts Receivable sends customer and sales representative information to
Sales Analysis during transaction processing if you answer Yes to the Sales
Analysis question:
SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
APPLICATION?
You activate this interface using option 4 on menu AMZM30.
For a summary of interface questions associated with the CAS Activate/Deactivate
Interfaces menu option, see the Maintenance/Change chapter in the CAS Users
Guide.
The following table shows the MAPICS XA application interfaces. The table is in two
parts. Look for an X where the applications interface. The footnote tells you which
interfaces you need to activate through the CAS application. The specific information
that is passed from one application to another follows the table.
Contents
Index
Page 2-5
Exit
AP
Xa
ISL
IM
IFM
GL
FCST
FCPS
F/A
EQM
EPDM
EIS
EC
CRP
COM_NET
COM
CA
AR
AP
APPR
Table 2-1. Interfacing applications, AP through ISL
APPR
AR
Xa
CA
X
Xa
COM
COM_NET
CRP
EC
X
Xa
Xb
X
X
X
X
EIS
EPDM
EQM
F/A
FCST
X
X
FCPS
GL
IFM
IM
X
X
Xa
ISL
KBC
MM
X
X
X
Xa
Xb
X
X
MMA
MMS
X
X
MPA
MPSP
MRP
X
X
X
X
X
OBPM
PM
X
X
PR
PDM
X
X
Xa
PDM+
PCC
PMC
PUR
X
X
REP
SA
Xa
X
X
a. Activated or deactivated in Cross Application Support using option 4 on the

Maintenance/Change menu (AMZM30).
b. See the IFM questionnaire for information on activating the interface.
Xb
X
X
Xa
Index
Page 2-6
Exit
AP
APPR
Xa
SA
REP
PUR
PM&C
PC&C
PDM+
PDM
PR
PM
OBPM
MRP
MPSP
MPA
MMS
MMA
MM
Table 2-2. Interfacing Applications, KBC through SA

KBC
Contents
X
X
AR
Xa
CA
COM
COM_NET
CRP
EC
X
X
EIS
EPDM
EQM
F/A
Xa X
FCST
FCPS
GL
IFM
IM
Xa Xa X
ISL
X
X
Xa X
Xa X
Xa X
MM
MMA
MMS
MPA
X
Xa
MPSP
MRP
OBPM
X
X
X
X
Xa
X
X
PCC
X
Xa
PMC
SA
Xa
X
X
PDM
X
X
PDM+
REP
PR
PUR
KBC
PM
X
Xa
X
Xa X
Xa
X
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-7
Accounts Payable interfaces

AP sends information to
CA
For purchased material charged to a contract (through PCC)
EC
Payments/remittance advice.
GL
Purchase journal distribution and cash disbursements.
IM
Cost adjustment transactions.
MMS
Invoice transactions to update MRO requisitions, work orders, and inventory

information.
PC&C Miscellaneous charge transactions.

PUR
P.O. status for invoiced amounts (quantities and prices)
AP receives information from

AR
Deposits added directly to the bank account file.
EC
Invoices, invoice credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and

freight invoices to customers.
PUR
P.O. information required to verify that invoiced items were actually ordered,
received as ordered, priced as expected, and invoiced as expected.
Accounts Receivable interfaces

AR sends information to
AP
COM
Updates customer balance information in the Customer Master file when

cash receipts are posted at month end.
GL
Cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/loss information when using

multiple currencies.
SA
Updates the Customer Interface or Salesrep Interface file during transaction

processing.
AR receives information from

COM
Invoice and credit memo summary records; customer information.
EC
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-8
Capacity Requirements Planning interfaces

CRP does not send information to the other MAPICS XA applications.
CRP receives information from
COM
Customer orders as work load during the planning run.
IM
Calendar, open order, and order detail information.
MRP
Planned and firm planned orders for work center loading.
PC&C Open order information.

PDM or EPDM Routing information.
Contract Accounting interfaces

CA sends information to
AP
COM
Updates customer balance information in the Customer Master file when

cash receipts are posted at month end.
GL
Cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/loss information when using

multiple currencies.
SA

processing.
CA receives information from

COM
Invoice and credit memo summary records; customer information.
EC
PDM or EPDM Production facility and product structures.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-9
Customer Order Management Interfaces

COM sends information to
AR
Invoice and credit memo summary records.
CA
Provides customer order for releases.
CRP
Customer orders as work load during the planning run.
EC
Responses to requests for quotes, P.O. acknowledgements, P.O. change

acknowledgements, advance shipping notices, invoices, and credit
adjustments/memos.
FAX
Fax interface, to Telex/Fax/400: the documents that are sent using EC can
also be faxed.
FCST Saves customer order demand information for each period which allows
forecast recomputation.
GL
Invoice information to account for information in the general ledger; sales

information to print GL worksheet during month end close.
IFM
Invoice, credit memo and, optionally, cost of sales information.
IM
Post items into inventory balance records when orders are entered or
maintained; updates allocation quantities in ITEMBL; can create
manufacturing order per customer order release; intrawarehouse
transactions for end item kit components from pick confirmations; sales
shipment transactions from shipment confirmations; updates on-hand
quantities in ITEMBL when orders are released; location quantities and
allocations to location detail and allocation files.
MMA
Sales and booking information.
MPA
Booking information during batch update.
MPSP Customer order/intersite order backlog and option backlog for Master
Schedule Planning and Available to Promise inquiry; accumulates sales
transactions and supplies customer orders to production planning and
master schedule planning.
MRP
Customer and intersite orders to show demand during a planning run;

customer order and option backlog for Available to Promise inquiry; Signals
MRP for update each time a change is made to ITEMBL.
OBPM Customer order line item release information.

REP
Manufacture due dates and order quantities for developing production

schedules.
SA
Customer, salesrep, and end item information to report amounts, quantities,

and shipments.
COM receives information from

AR
Updates the Customer Master file balance information when cash receipts
are posted and account balances aged at month-end.
EC
Requests for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, receiving advice, and
shipping schedules.
IFM
Credit limits, amounts owed, and due dates.
Contents
Index
Page 2-10
Exit
IM
Manufacturing order data availability and sales, quantity, costing, and tax
code information; updates customer order release records with number of
manufacturing order released for the line item.
ISL
New, changed, deleted, and shipped intersite transfer orders for shipment to
another warehouse.
MPSP Available to Promise results can be accessed in customer order entry and
inquiry.
MRP
Customer data in the form of customer order manual and informational

requirements.
OBPM Updated customer order release records with the number of the
manufacturing order created to build the item.
PDM/EPDM Standard features/options information used to price and cost end items
with features.
REP
Updated manufacturing due dates for ordered line items.
SA
Edits salesrep number.
COM_Net Interfaces
COM_Net sends information to:
COM
Sends customer orders and quotes to the offline files.
COM_Net receives information from:

COM
Customer and product information required for customer order entry.
IM
Item status information for availability inquiry.
Electronic Commerce interfaces
Receive
Trading
partners
Inbound
Electronic
Send
Commerce
MAPICS
Outbound
applications
EC receives inbound EDI transactions from trading partners and sends the
information to
AP
Invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and freight

invoices to customers.
AR
COM
Requests for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, receiving advice, and
shipping schedules.
IFM
Invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and freight

invoices from customers.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-11
IM
Ship notices (advance shipping notices).
MRP
Planning schedules
PUR
Responses to requests for quotes, P.O. acknowledgements, and P.O.

change acknowledgements.
Note: Trading partners can be other MAPICS XA environments.

Before you can load business transactions into MAPICS XA business applications,
the receiving business entities must first exist. If not, you must create them in the
appropriate application.
EC receives the following outbound information and sends the EDI transactions to
trading partners:
AP
COM
Invoices, credit adjustments, responses to requests for quotes, P.O.

acknowledgements, P.O. change acknowledgements, and ship notices
(advance shipping notices).
IM
Receiving advice.
MRP
Planning schedules.
PUR
Request for quotes, purchase orders, P.O. changes, and shipping

schedules.
Note: The business documents you send should be according to the standard
methodologies of the interfacing MAPICS business application. The only requirement
is that you must set media flags in the applications for each business document you
want to send by means of EC.
Refer to the EC User's Guide for additional information.
Enterprise Product Data Management interfaces

EPDM sends information to
CA
Production facilities product structure information.
COM
Product structure records
EIS
Production facility information.
FCPS Item process and item characteristics.

IM
Product structure and costing information; item master information.
MPSP Item process and item characteristics.

MRP
Item process and item characteristics.
OBPM Item process and item characteristics.

PC&C Production facility costs, capabilities and routing information.
PUR
Routing information.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-12
EPDM receives information from

EQM
Engineering records, i.e., items, bills, and routings.
PC&C Work center statistics and average operation hours.

REP
Work center statistics and average operation hours.
Estimating Quote Management interfaces

EQM sends information to
CA
Cost information from quotes.
COM
Accepted quotes are converted to customer orders. database for expected

repeat orders.
PDM or EPDM Bills of materials and routings can be added to the manufacturing
database for expected repeat orders.
KBC
Bill creation and routing information for quotes.
IM
New item information for inventory files; MRP lead time.
EQM receives information from

KBC
Bill creation and routing information for quotes.
PDM or EPDM Existing items can be copied and modified.
Financial Analysis interfaces

F/A receives information from
GL
Ledger balances and chart of accounts.
IFM
Chart of accounts.
F/A sends information to

GL
Automatic journal entries, budgets, and depreciation journal entries.
IFM
Depreciation journal entries. Be aware that IFM interfaces only with the Fixed
Asset portion of Financial Analysis.
Forecasting interfaces
FCST sends information to
IM
Order point and safety stock quantities.
MPSP Forecast requirements to the DMDIFF.

MRP
Forecast requirements for master level items to the Requirements file.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-13
FCST receives information from

COM
Saves customer order demand information for each period that allows
recomputation of forecast.
IM
Warehouse information.
MPSP Forecast data and, if COM not installed, receives backlog information from
DMDIFF.
MRP
Forecast data in the form of manual and information requirements.
SA
Item summary information for Forecasting implementation.
General Ledger interfaces

GL does not send information to the other MAPICS XA applications.
GL receives information from
AP
Purchase journal distribution and cash disbursements.
AR
Information about cash receipt and adjustment transactions; gain/loss

information when using multiple currencies.
COM
Invoice information; sales information to print GL worksheet during month

end close.
F/A
Depreciation transactions, automatic journal entries, and new budget

amounts when a proposed budget is posted.
IM
Transaction history.
PC&C Labor, overhead, machine, and miscellaneous cost information.

PM&C Transaction history.
PR
Summary of all gross pay, tax, deduction, and net pay entry requests.
PUR
Purchase journal distribution.
REP
Transaction cost information.
International Financial Management interfaces

IFM sends information to
COM
Credit limits, amounts owed, and due dates.
IM
Cost adjustments.
PC&C Miscellaneous charges and outside operations.

PUR
Updated invoice information.
IFM receives information from

COM
Invoice, credit memo and, optionally cost of sales information.
EC
Regular invoices, credit adjustments, motor carrier freight invoices, and

freight invoices from customers.
F/A fixed assets Journal transactions.

IM
General ledger transactions.
PC&C General ledger transactions.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-14
PR
PUR
Purchase order and receiving data from which IFM can generate suggested
invoices.
REP
InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL) interfaces

ISL/MISL sends information to
COM
Offline load information for released intersite orders.
IM
Intersite shipping and receiving (TW) and adjustment (IA) transactions (if
enabled) and order balances.
MPSP Planned future order demands from requesting warehouses for master
scheduled items.
MRP
Planned future order demands from requesting warehouses for MRP

planned items.
ISL/MISL receives information from

COM
Validated customer numbers and container types.
IM
Calendar, item, item balance, warehouse information, inventory locations

lead times, and planning process codes.
MRP
Released or changed intersite orders.
OBPM Released or changed intersite orders.
Inventory Management interfaces

IM sends information to...
CA
Charges stock items to manufacturing at the tailored inventory costing

method.
COM
Manufacturing order date availability and sales, quantity, costing, and tax
code information; updates customer order release records with number of
manufacturing order released for the line item.
CRP
Calendar, open order, and order detail information.
EC
Receiving advice.
FCST Warehouse and calendar information.

GL
Journal entries from transaction processing.
IFM
ISL/MISL On-hand, location, lead-times, and allocation data.

KBC
The manufacturing order number for the configured item and the locations
where the configured item is stocked.
MM
Warehouse information, item warehouse information, location information,

location quantity information, and manufacturing information.
MMS
Purchase receipt information for MRO items.
MPSP Calendar, item balance, and order status, period sales, and production
receipts for planning runs; lead times and planning process codes.
Contents
Index
MRP
Exit
Page 2-15
On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, planning process codes,
and calendar information.
OBPM On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, and calendar
information.
PC&C Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous cost
records when orders are released; releases orders and processes receipts
into inventory from WIP and component issues; calendar information.
PM
Default buyer, account number, stocking and purchase units of measure and
conversion factor, and unit price for use on requisitions, quotes, and
purchase orders.
PM&C Summary order information and detailed component allocations.

PUR
Purchase order status via purchase order receipt transactions. Requisitions

and purchase orders for order point items.
REP
Calendar information; schedule control information; defines line supply

locations and onhand allocations.
SA
Sales and quantity information by updating or adding items in the Item

Interface file during sales transaction processing.
IM receives information from...

AP
COM
Posts items into inventory balance records when orders are entered or
maintained; updates allocation quantities in ITEMBL; ability to perform
manufacturing per customer order release; intrawarehouse transactions for
end item kit components from pick confirmations; sales shipment
transactions from shipment confirmations; updates on-hand quantities in
ITEMBL when orders are released; location quantities and allocations to
location detail and location allocation files.
EC
Advance shipping notices (despatch advices).
EPDM Item process, bill of material, and routing information and item
characteristics for manufacturing orders.
FCST Order point and safety stock quantities.
IFM
ISL/MISL Intransit inventory and adjustments and intersite order status.

KBC
Configuration information, including the configured item cost, when a

manufacturing order is released for a customer order.
MMS
Work order, task, and cost code information to store with the receipt
transaction; general ledger transactions which pass through IM's General
Ledger Interface file.
MPA
Cycle count updates.
MRP
Selects manufacturing and purchase orders for release; updates orders that
were rescheduled or canceled.
OBPM Added, changed, complete, or closed manufacturing orders.

PC&C Component scrap information.
PDM
Bill of material and costing information; Item master information.
PM
Vendor accept (VA), Reopen and Complete (RP/PQ) transactions.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-16
PM&C Updates component issues and receipts.

PUR
Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order; cost

adjustments from invoice entry.
REP
Inventory management history and schedule data base; schedule close and
purge information; updates the component issues and receipts.
Knowledge Based Configurator interfaces

KBC sends information to
COM
Order entry information.
EQM
Bill creation and routing information.
IM
Configuration, including the configured item cost, when a manufacturing

order is released for a customer order.
KBC receives information from

COM
Order entry information.
EQM
Bill creation and routing information.
IM
The manufacturing order number for the configured item.
PDM or EPDM Single level product structures for phantom items.
Maintenance Management System interfaces

MMS sends information to
IM
Work order, task, and cost code information to store with the receipt
transaction; general ledger transactons which pass through IM's General
Ledger Interface file.
PUR
Purchase orders for MRO items.
MMS receives information from

AP
Actual invoice amounts and quantities to update MRO requisitions, work

orders, and inventory information.
IM
Purchase receipt information for MRO items.
PUR
Maintenance, Repair, and Overhead (MRO) information on various reports

and inquiries; vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data;
contract prices for MRO requisitons.
Manufacturing Performance Analysis interfaces

MPA sends information to
IM
Cycle count updates.
MPA receives information from

COM
Booking information during batch update
IM
Manufacturing order and IM transaction information
MRP
Planned order information.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-17
Master Production Schedule Planning interfaces

MPSP sends information to
MRP
Extracts master production schedules for MRP planning activities; updates

maintenance changes to firm planned orders.
MPSP receives information from

COM
Customer order backlog and option backlog for master schedule planning
and available-to-promise; accumulates sales transactions and supplies
customer orders to production planning and master schedule planning.
EC
Expected customer orders received via EDI from trading partners are
supplied to production planning and master schedule planning.
EPDM or PDM Item process and bill of material information and item characteristics.
FCST Forecast requirements to the Demand Interface file.
IM
Calendar, item balance, and order status and period sales and production
receipts for planning runs; lead times and planning process codes.
ISL/MISL Demand from both released and planned intersite orders against a
warehouse are supplied to production planning and master schedule
planning. ISL/MISL creates customer orders in COM for released/open
intersite orders against a warehouse. ISL/MISL passes the demand from
planned intersite orders directly from MRP in the requesting warehouse to
MPSP in the supplying warehouse, where it is added to both forecasts and
customer orders.
MRP
Updates to planned orders for master scheduled items.
PUR
Open purchase orders and requisitions.
Material Requirements Planning interfaces

MRP sends information to
APPR (MMS) Purchase orders and purchase requisitions for approval.
CRP
Planned and firm planned orders for work center loading.
EC
Purchase planning schedules can be sent to vendors you have set up as

trading partners in the EC application.
IM
Planned orders tagged for release; updates orders that should be

rescheduled or cancelled.
ISL/MISL Planned demands against supplying warehouses, and released orders,

resulting in actual demand against supplying warehouses.
MMS
Purchase orders requiring approval.
MPSP Planned orders that are tagged for release in MRP's order review to update
master schedules.
OBPM Planned orders tagged for release; updates orders that should be
rescheduled or cancelled.
PUR
Purchase requisitions and purchase orders for release via purchasing auto
release or order release. Purchase planning schedules requiring buyer
review.
Contents
Index
REP
Exit
Page 2-18
Planned and firm planned order which REP uses as net demand to plan its
schedules.
MRP receives information from

COM
Customer orders in the form of KBC planned orders that are manual and
informational requirements, and for released intersite orders against the
supplying warehouse.
EC
Expected customer orders can be received from customers you have set up
as trading partners in the EC application.
EPDM or PDM Item process and bill of material information and item characteristics.
FCST Forecast and requirements for master level items.
IM
On-hand, on-order, and allocation data; lead times, planning process codes,
and calendar information. Signals MRP to replan when certain changes are
made to ITEMBL.
ISL/MISL Planned demand from requesting warehouses, and intersite order

balances and status for open orders that are scheduled receipts.
MPSP Master production schedules for MRP scheduling activities.
PUR
Scheduled receipts for purchased parts.
REP
Planned and released schedules for schedule controlled items that are used
in the planning run. Updates to MRP planned orders and scheduled receipts
based on scheduled maintenance activity in REP.
Materials Management interfaces

MM sends information to
IM
Updates the on-hand quantities through PH transactions and updates the

receipt information through RD, RI, RP, and VR transactions.
PUR
Updates purchase order receipt information.
MM receives information from

IM
Warehouse information, item warehouse information, location information,

location quantity information, manufacturing order information.
PUR
Purchase order information.
COM
Customer order information.
Order-Based Production Management interfaces

OBPM sends information to
COM
Updates customer order line item releases with the number of the
manufacturing order created to build the item.
IM
Order information for created, changed, and closed manufacturing orders.
ISL/MISL Order information for created, changed, and cancelled intersite orders.
EPDM/PDM Facility output averages.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-19
PM/PUR Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, and
cancelled purchase requisitions and orders.
OBPM receives information from
COM
Customer order line item release information.
EPDM/PDM Item characteristics, and item process, bill of material and routing
information for manufacturing items.
IM
Item on hand, on order, allocation and lead time information, and calendar
information.
MRP
Recommendations to create, defer, expedite, or cancel manufacturing,

intersite, and purchase orders.
Payroll interfaces
PR sends information to
CA
Actual labor costing for a contract (through PC&C)
GL
Summary of all gross pay, tax, deduction, and net pay entry requests.
IFM
PC&C Job-related information to keep track of job order cost that did not come from
PM&C.
PR receives information from
PDM or EPDM Production facilities by site.
PM&C Time, attendance, and shop order records.
Procurement Management interfaces

PM sends information to
AP
Purchase order information required to verify that invoiced items were

actually ordered, received as ordered, priced as expected, and shipped as
expected.
APPR Approval requests for requisitions and purchase orders; invoice quantity and
amount information that updates the purchase order.
IFM
invoices.
IM
Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order.
MMS
Vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data and contract
prices for MRO requisitions.
MRP
PM receives information from

AP
Invoicing status to determine when purchase orders are ready to close.
APPR Information on approval status used to update requisitions and purchase

orders.
GL
Verification of account numbers and unit/natures.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-20
IFM
Updated invoice data.
IM
Purchase order receipt tracking via purchasing transactions.
MMS
Purchase orders for MRO items and related ledger transactions from
purchased MRO item receipts.
MRP
Automatically generates planned requisitions and purchase orders for

release via purchasing auto release.
OBPM Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, and
PDM/EPDM Routing information.
Product Data Management interfaces

PDM sends information to
COM
Usage of standard features/options, tax codes, and item master information.
CRP
Standard routing and production facility and variable capacity calendar.
IM
Product structure and costing information; item master information.
MPSP Product structure, production facility, and item characteristics.

MRP
Product structure and item characteristics.
PC&C Production facility costing and routing information.

PUR
Routing information.
REP
Production facility information; routing information; bill of material

information; variable capacity calendar.
SA
Item master information.
PDM receives information from

PC&C Work center statistics and average operation hours in routing
REP
Average yield routing information.
PDMPlus Offline file load transactions for item, routing, and product structure master
files.
Production Control and Costing interfaces

PC&C sends information to
CA
Labor and job related activity and status of completed operations. Source
transactions for labor and miscellaneous charges are extracted from shop
activity update transactions.
CRP
Open order information.
FCPS Open manufacturing orders for finite scheduling.

GL
Labor, overhead, machine, and miscellaneous cost information.
IFM
IM
Component scrap information.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-21
PDM or EPDM Work center averages and average/actual routing information.

PM&C Open order information.
PC&C receives information from
AP
Cost of outside operations; miscellaneous charges.
PDM or EPDM Product structure lead time adjustmens. Production facility costs,
capacities, and routing information.
IM
Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous cost

records when orders are released; releases orders and processes
component issues and receipts into inventory from WIP; calendar
information.
OBPM Operation and material detail, description records, and miscellaneous cost
records when orders are released; releases orders and processes
component issues and receipts into inventory from WIP; calendar
information.
PM&C Updates shop activity transactions and operation status.
PR
Transfers job-related information to keep track of job order cost that did not
come from PM&C.
PUR
Cost of outside operations; miscellaneous charges.
Production Monitoring and Control interfaces

PM&C sends information to
GL
Transaction history.
IM
Updates component issues and receipts.
PC&C Updates shop activity transactions and operation status.

PR
Time and attendance and shop order information.
REP
Updates the component issues and receipts and the replenishment

requests.
PM&C receives information from

IM
Summary order information and detailed component allocations.
PC&C Open order information.

PR
Employee data.
REP
Schedule information.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-22
Purchasing interfaces
PUR sends information to
AP
Purchase order information required to verify that invoiced items were

actually ordered, received as ordered, priced as expected, and shipped as
expected.
APPR Approval requests for requisitions and purchase orders.

EC
Information about vendors, quotes, purchase orders and changes,

remittances, and shipping schedules so the appropriate EDI transactions
can be sent.
GL
Purchase journal distribution.
IFM
invoices, defaults for generating estimated IFM taxes, installment payments,
and notes.
IM
Purchase order information; updates the quantities on order; cost

adjustments from invoice entry.
MM
Purchase order information.
MMS
Maintenance, Repair, and Overhaul (MRO) information on various reports

and inquiries; vendor and vendor/item maintenance for MMS specific data;
contract prices for MRO requisitions; actual invoice amounts and quantities.
MRP
PC&C Cost of outside operations and miscellaneous charges.

PUR receives information from
AP
Invoicing status to determine when purchase orders are ready to close.
APPR Information on approval routes, approver IDs and limits, and approval status
used to update requisitions and purchase orders.
EC
Information about quote responses, purchase order acknowledgements,

invoices and credit memos so that the appropriate EDI transactions can be
received.
IFM
Updated invoice data, estimated IFM taxes, and estimated installment

payment schedules. Purchase orders generated as part of an interdivision
transfer.
IM
Purchase order receipt tracking via purchasing transactions, purchase

orders, releases, or requisitions generated for order point items from the
Reorder report.
MM
Updates purchase order receipt information.
MMS
Purchase orders for MRO items and related ledger transactions from
purchased MRO item receipts.
MRP
Automatically generates planned requisitions and purchase orders for

release via purchasing auto release.
OBPM Purchase requisition and order information for created, changed, and
PDM/EPDM Routing information.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-23
Repetitive Production Management interfaces

REP sends information to
COM
Updates manufacturing due dates.
GL
Transaction cost information and general ledger transactions.
IFM
IM
Inventory management history and schedule data base; schedule close and
purge information; updates the component issues and receipts.
MRP
Schedule information to cause adjustments to planned orders and

schedules.
PM&C Schedule information for transaction processing.

REP receives information from
COM
Manufacturing due dates and order quantities into schedule extract function
for developing production schedules.
IM
Inventory status information,and calendar by line.
MRP
Planned and firm planned orders which REP can use as net demand to plan
its schedules.
EPDM/PDM Production facility information; routing information; bill of material

information, variable capacity calendar, and default line and finished good
location.
PM&C Component issues and receipts and replenishment requests.
Sales Analysis interfaces

SA sends information to
COM
Edits salesrep number.
FCST Item summary information for Forecasting implementation.

SA receives information from
AR

processing.
COM
Customer, salesrep, and end item quantities and amounts.
IM
Sales and quantity information by updating or adding items in the Item

Interface file during sales transaction processing.
Using the application master files

When you install an application, the install/tailor process loads all the files for that
application. After installation, you need to add your business data to the application
master files. It is very helpful to gather the master file information while you are
planning for installation. The application users guides describe the files and file
maintenance procedures in detail and whether an application shares file information
with another application.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 2-24
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 3-1
Installing MAPICS XA
Chapter 3. Installing MAPICS XA

This chapter contains information about the following topics:
Installing the AS/400 system .................................................................................... 3-2
Creating user profiles ............................................................................................... 3-2
Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level .......................................... 3-3
Setting the date format ............................................................................................. 3-3
Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications................................................ 3-3
Initial application installation .................................................................................... 3-4
Install/tailor ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Entering data into the master files............................................................................ 3-5
Contents
Index
Page 3-2
Exit
Installing the AS/400 system

Although information about installing the hardware and operating system is
summarized here, the actual instructions are in the AS/400 system books.
Installing the AS/400 system involves installing the hardware and installing the
operating system. Physical installation of your system hardware involves unpacking,
setting up, and testing the components (workstations, printers, keyboards, and so
on) that make up your system. Installation of the AS/400 operating system involves
loading the support programs supplied by IBM into the system after the physical
installation is complete.
If you plan to use your own programs in a MAPICS XA environment, see the
Extended Environment Support chapter in the CAS Users Guide. It gives
information on maintaining the MAPICS XA library list when you have user
modifications.
Creating user profiles

Use the following command to create an AS/400 user profile for each authorized
user. The profile contains the:
User profile name, the name by which you want the system to know the user.
AS/400 password value, the value requested when the AS/400 Sign On display
appears.
CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(AMAPICS)
PASSWORD(AS/400 password value)
SPCAUT(*NONE)
MAXSTG(*NOMAX)
PTYLMT(4)
TEXT(MAPICS XA USER PROFILE user profile name)
Note: The install process normally creates the MAPICS XA user profile AMAPICS.
If this profile ever needs to be recreated, use the following command:
CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(AMAPICS)
PASSWORD(AS/400 password value)
SPCAUT(*JOBCTL)
(*SAVSYS)
MAXSTG(*NOMAX)
PTYLMT(4)
TEXT(MAPICS WS OPERATOR USER PROFILE user profile name)
When you are running MAPICS XA, you can use any user profile that you create or
any user profiles provided with the system. If you use system-provided profiles such
as QSYSOPR for MAPICS XA, change the MAXSTG parameter to *NOMAX to avoid
storage-exceeded errors. Use the CHGUSRPRF command to make the change.
For more detailed information on this command and the parameter values, see the
manual for the AS/400 operating system.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 3-3
Selecting a subsystem configuration and security level

IBM supplies two subsystem configurations for the AS/400. MAPICS XA must use the
more complex configuration, where QCTL is the controlling subsystem, QINTER is
the interactive subsystem, and QBATCH is the batch job subsystem. To change your
subsystem configuration from QBASE to QCTL, use the CHGSYSVAL command to
change the system value QCTLSBSD to QCTL and IPL your system. For more
information, see Characteristics of the Shipped System in the AS/400 Work
Management Guide. MAPICS XA is designed to run in the complex configuration to
use system resources efficiently.
MAPICS XA is designed to operate with a security level of 40. For more information,
see the AS/400 Security Concepts and Planning Manual. The AS/400 system has five
security levels that are set by putting a 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 in the system value
QSECURITY.
Setting the date format

The date format on MAPICS XA displays and reports is the same format as the one
you specify for the AS/400 system.
The date formats supported by MAPICS XA are:
MM/DD/YY (month/day/year)
DD/MM/YY (day/month/year)
YY/MM/DD (year/month/day)
To change the date format, see the AS/400 Work Management Guide.
Installing and tailoring the MAPICS XA applications

Although the information about installing the MAPICS XA applications is summarized
here, the actual step-by-step process is in the Install/Tailor Applications chapter in
the CAS Users Guide.
The installation process consists of three parts:
Add license keys
Initial application installation
Install/tailor
Note: Before you install MAPICS XA, rename or delete any non-MAPICS library on
your system with the same name as a MAPICS XA library, except for libraries that are
valid in MAPICS XA environments other than the one you are using for installation.
For a list of the MAPICS XA libraries, see the Getting Started with MAPICS XA book.
Add license keys. Follow instructions received from MAPICS.
Contents
Index
Page 3-4
Exit
Initial application installation

You run initial application installation when you are installing your first MAPICS XA
application. You run it again only if you want to grant authority to additional tape or
CD devices or if you want to create a MAPICS XA environment without copying files
from another environment.
During initial application installation, the system loads the MAPICS XA install library
and the CAS programs and files.
Install/tailor
You run install/tailor:
The first time you install MAPICS XA.
Anytime you want to change an answer for a question in a MAPICS XA
application that is already installed. This procedure is called application tailoring.
Anytime you want to add other MAPICS XA applications.
During the install/tailor process the system loads the programs and files for the
applications you are installing and you answer the questions for all the applications
you are installing or tailoring. Whenever you answer the questions, the System
Control (SYSCTL) file is updated.
You do not need to run install/tailor separately for each application.
Each time you run install/tailor, all of the CAS basic option questions (questions X01
through X06) appear at the beginning of the questionnaire. When you install more
than one application at a time, you see the basic option questions only once.
The following table summarizes the general update and review tasks associated with
the install/tailor process.
Task
Menu
Option
Enter your answers the first time you

install an application
CAS Master Menu (AMZM00)
Option 6, Install/Tailor Applications
Change your answers for an

application
CAS Main Menu (AMZM00)
Option 6, Install/Tailor Applications
Review your answers by application or CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10)

by question
Option 4, Questionnaire Responses

by Application Option 5, Questionnaire
Responsesby Question
Activate or deactivate the interfaces

you selected on the questionnaire
CAS Maintenance/Change menu

(AMZM30)
Option 4, Activate/Deactivate
Interfaces
Review the interfaces you activated

using the CAS Maintenance/Change
menu (AMZM30)
CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10)

by Application; use F09 on display
AMZS81
Print report AMZS8 showing the

questionnaire answers and the
activated interfaces for your installed
applications
CAS Reports menu (AMZM20)
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 3-5
Entering data into the master files

After you run install/tailor and the application programs and files are on the system,
you enter your business information into the application master files. For an overview
of this process, see the Using your business information chapter in the Getting
Started with MAPICS XA book. For a detailed description of the files and the file
maintenance procedures for each application, see the application users guides.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 3-6
Contents
Index
Chapter 4.
Exit
Page 4-1
After installing MAPICS XA

After your MAPICS XA applications are installed and your master file information is
entered, you can do one or more of the following activities. The kinds of activities you
do and the order in which you do them depend on the needs of your business.
Testing your applications.......................................................................................... 4-2
Activating interfaces................................................................................................. 4-2
Establishing MAPICS XA security ............................................................................ 4-3
Adding environments using extended environment support ................................... 4-3
Creating tailored sign-ons ........................................................................................ 4-3
Setting up Group Job support.................................................................................. 4-4
Setting up Note Tasks............................................................................................... 4-5
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-2
Testing your applications

As you prepare to test your new system, consider the following:
What kind of test do I need to run?

What differences are there between the old and new systems?
What current transactions must be processed to get ready for the test?
Do I need more than one test?
You might test the applications in one of the following ways:

Take a recent accounting period, such as a month, for which transactions have
already been processed. Enter them into the system and compare the totals
generated by MAPICS XA with your previous totals.
Run both your old system and MAPICS XA in parallel for some period. When you
are satisfied that MAPICS XA is running the way you want, discontinue the old
system.
Take a small number of transactions and process them through the entire
MAPICS XA application.
Test MAPICS XA completely at a time when your business is shut down, such as
a weekend. Verify data and review reports so that MAPICS XA is up to date,
accurate, and operating smoothly by Mondays start of business. This method of
testing requires careful planning and some concentrated work time.
Use the extended environment support function in Cross Application Support to
create a duplicate of the environment you have just loaded. Do your testing in
this duplicate environment. When you are satisfied you can start processing in
your initial environment, you can then delete your duplicate environment or keep
it on the system for future testing or training.
After deciding how you are going to test but before daily operations begin, be sure
that all test data is cleared from the system. One way you can clear test data is to
save your master files after loading them, but before entering any test data into the
system. Then, after you complete testing, restore the clean copy of your master files
that you saved prior to testing. Whatever method you choose, it is important that test
data is cleared and your master file balances are correct before you begin daily
operations.
Activating interfaces
Before information can be passed between certain applications, you need to activate
the interface in Cross Application Support (CAS). The interfaces that you activate in
CAS are shown in Chapter 2, Planning for installation and described in the
individual questionnaires. For a summary of those questions and the step-by-step
process, see the Maintenance/Change chapter in the CAS Users Guide.
Be sure that the applications have been tested and are operating to your satisfaction,
and that the information to be passed is valid. If you plan to activate some interfaces
at a later date, be sure your data is valid at that time.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-3
Establishing MAPICS XA security

If you want to protect MAPICS XA application data, you need to specify who is
authorized to use the system and for what functions. You can establish MAPICS XA
security anytime after the initial installation. For the step-by-step process, see the
Security Maintenance chapter in the CAS Users Guide.
Adding environments using extended environment support

An environment is the set of libraries required to run your MAPICS XA applications.
You install your first MAPICS XA applications in a single environment. After you
complete the installation process, you can create additional environments to run
multiple company divisions or plants, test your applications, or meet other business
requirements. For information about creating and maintaining environments, see the
Extended Environment Support chapter in the CAS Users Guide.
Creating tailored sign-ons

A tailored program lets users go directly to a MAPICS XA application in a specific
environment without first using the Command Entry display.
If the users need to use different applications or environments, you need to create
separate programs for every application or environment required.
Create the required CL program or programs:

PGM
MAPICS a xy 00
SIGNOFF
ENDPGM
3
4
Substitute a MAPICS XA application identifier for a or a $ to go to the Application

Selection menu. See the Getting Started with MAPICS XA book for a list of
identifiers. If you have more than one MAPICS XA environment and you want to
go directly to a specific environment, substitute the environment designator for
xy. Include the two zeros (00) to bypass the environment confirmation display
(AMZAA4).
You must create the CL program in a library, usually QGPL, using the
CRTCLPGM command.
Change the user profiles for all users who need a tailored sign-on program:
1. Sign on to the system as the AS/400 security officer (QSECOFR).
2. Type the following command, repeating it for each user:
CHGUSRPRF USRPRF(user profile name)
INLPGM(QGPL/program name)
3. Type the users sign-on ID in user profile name. Type name of the tailored
program you created in step 1 in program name. If the tailored sign-on
program you created is not in the QGPL library, identify its library in place of
QGPL.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-4
Setting up Group Job support

Group Job support allows you to suspend a MAPICS XA task and start one from the
Group Job Menu (AMZGJ1). The menu lists the MAPICS XA and OfficeVision*/400
activities that you can perform. For information on using the Group Job Menu, see
Getting Started with MAPICS XA.
Group Job has a maximum of 16 active jobs per workstation15 jobs plus the initial
job, Startup. However, your company may want to limit the number of active group
jobs to conserve system resources. The data area, ZGRPJB, controls whether Group
Job is active and the number of group jobs for each workstation.
To limit the number of group jobs active per workstation, type the following on the
Command Entry display and press Enter:
CHGDTAARA DTAARA(AMFLIBy/ZGRPJB) VALUE( n)
where y is the second character of an environment designator and n is the number of
active group jobs. When you count how many jobs to activate, remember to count
the initial job. For example, for each user to start three group jobs, set the value of n
to 4. Use 00 to deactivate Group Job.
A value of zero will not allow group job usage by any user of that environment. A
value from 2 to 16 will allow the users initial session plus from 1 to 15 additional
group jobs. The number of group jobs can be set by individual user. For example, if
ZGRPJB has a value of 10 and the user profile has a value of 5, only 5 group jobs
would be available; the lesser of the two values.
As an example:
ZGRPJB = 16
User profile = 5
Then user profile gets 5.
Or:
ZGRPJB = 5
User profile = 16
Then user profile gets 5.
Or:
ZGRPJB = 0
User profile = 5
Then user profile gets 0 (no) group jobs.
Or:
ZGRPJB = 10
User profile = 0
Then user profile gets 10 because a value of 0 in the user profile says in effect "use
the value of ZGRPJB."
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-5
Or:
ZGRPJB = 10
User profile = 1
Then user profile gets no group jobs because 1 in the user profile only allows the
initial job and no additional group jobs.
Also, if a user signs on to an environment and no profile exists for that user in that
environment, then the value of ZGRPJB determines the number of group jobs they
are allowed.
Setting up Note Tasks

The Note Tasks function, one of the OfficeVision/400 activities, is built into
MAPICS XA but is not available on the Group Job Menu (AMZGJ1). Displays in
several applications show a function key, F15, which you can use to create and
maintain notes. Notes are comments in your files about your customers, invoices,
customer orders, items, or vendors. For example, you can add a note about a
particular back order.
Before you can use Note Tasks, you must:
Install OfficeVision/400.
Follow the installation instructions that come with the OfficeVision/400. After you
install OfficeVision/400, you need to do several office procedures before you can
activate the Note Tasks function. Follow the instructions in the manuals that come
with the OfficeVision/400.
Enroll all users in OfficeVision/400.

The system security officer enrolls the office administrator in OfficeVision/400.
The office administrator then enrolls all other users and adds them to the system
distribution directory. Anyone who wants to use Note Tasks must have a valid
system profile, be enrolled in OfficeVision/400, and be in the system distribution
directory.
The AMAPICS user profile must be enrolled in OfficeVision/400. All notes are
owned by the AMAPICS user profile and are secured by an authorization list that
is created when you activate Note Tasks. The AMAPICS user profile also owns
the authorization list. Any user having AMAPICS authority is able to process
notes outside of MAPICS XA using OfficeVision/400 functions. Therefore, to limit
access to Notes Tasks, do not include a group profile of AMAPICS for any
MAPICS XA users and do not run MAPICS XA while signed on as AMAPICS.
Activate Note Tasks in MAPICS XA.
The Note Tasks function is not automatically activated in MAPICS XA. When you
activate Note Tasks, system and office objects are created. If you anticipate a
large volume of notes, be sure you have adequate system space. The note
function does not currently allow you to back up or recover any office objects.
Note: Creating or copying an environment installs or copies the note function
but does not activate Note Tasks or copy the associated office objects.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-6
Activating note tasks

To activate Note Tasks, do the following:
1
2
Use F15 on an application display. The Notes Options window appears.

Select option 1, Activate Note Tasks, and press Enter. Note Tasks is activated.
If this is the first time you are activating Note Tasks in MAPICS XA, you may see the
AS/400 Create Document display. Use F10=Bypass text entry and the Note Options
window appears for you to activate Note Tasks.
If Note Tasks is already active, the Notes Tasks window appears for you to create
notes or work with existing notes. If a note exists for the entry on an application
display, an icon, @, appears in the upper right part of the display.
Deactivating note tasks

To deactivate Note Tasks, do the following:
1
2
3
Use F15 on the application display. The Note Tasks window appears.
Select option 9, Note Options, and press Enter. The Note Options window
appears.
Select option 2, Deactivate Note Tasks, and press Enter. Note Tasks is
deactivated.
Deactivating Note Tasks does not delete any of the notes. If you activate Note Tasks
again, you can see and update any existing notes.
Reorganizing notes
The Note Tasks reorganize function lets you delete notes for customers, customer
orders, invoices, items, or vendors that are no longer active. Before you delete any
notes, you can save them to magnetic media or to save files. If you have installed
multiple company support, you can reorganize notes for one company or for all
companies. You can only reorganize one type of note at a time, such as customer
notes or vendor notes.
When you reorganize Note Tasks, the system checks each note against the following:
Customer notes against customer number in the Customer Master Address file
(MBBFREP)
Customer order notes against customer order number in the Customer Order
Summary file (MBC6REP)
Invoice notes against invoice number in the Invoice Adjustments and Cash
Receipts file (OPENAR)
Item notes against item number in the Item Master Inventory Information file
(ITEMAS)
Vendor notes against vendor number in the Vendor Master file (VENNAM).
If the system cannot find a record for the note in the corresponding master file, it
marks the note assignment record in the control file as deleted and deletes the note
itself.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-7
To reorganize notes, do the following:
1
2
3
4
Use F15 on an application display. The Note Tasks window appears.

Select option 9, Note Options, and press Enter. The Note Options window
appears.
Select option 3, Reorganize Notes, and press Enter. The Reorganize Notes
window appears.
Follow the directions you see on the windows. Use F1=Help for more information
on a window.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 4-8
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-1
Managing your business information
Chapter 5. Managing your business information

To be able to use your business information (data) to make informed business
decisions, you need to know some basic procedures for managing the data in
MAPICS XA. The frequency, order, and content of the activities involved in managing
your data varies depending on the applications you have installed and how your
company works.
This chapter gives general information on how to keep the business data current,
track changes, safeguard the data, have data available when and where needed,
and schedule the processing operations to make the best use of your company
resources. For information on the Cross Application Support (CAS) menu options that
help you manage the MAPICS XA applications, see the CAS Users Guide.
Auditing and controlling data ................................................................................... 5-2
Creating an audit trail ............................................................................................... 5-2
Backing up data ....................................................................................................... 5-3
Controlling access to data ....................................................................................... 5-3
Checking for data accuracy..................................................................................... 5-3
Ensuring the correct sequence of operations .......................................................... 5-4
Scheduling data processing operations .................................................................. 5-4
Daily scheduling considerations .............................................................................. 5-4
Multiple batch job queues........................................................................................ 5-5
Storage capacity ...................................................................................................... 5-6
MAPICS XA print spooling........................................................................................ 5-7
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-2
Auditing and controlling data

The MAPICS XA applications have a number of ways for you to audit and control your
business data; that is, check for accuracy, analyze data as it affects your business,
provide backup in case of data loss, and if a question arises, trace the data back to
its origin. The following topics describe both the system and the business resources
that help you to accomplish this:
Creating an audit trail

Backing up data
Controlling access to data
Checking for data accuracy
Ensuring the correct sequence of operations
Be sure to read the specific chapter about audits and controls in the application
users guide.
Creating an audit trail

Your business documents and the information on MAPICS XA reports and displays
help you keep track of your company data before, during, and after processing.
Data output
As MAPICS XA processes your business information, you can see the results in
several useful formats:
Many application functions have inquiry displays that allow you to review file
data and other job or application status information. You can print these displays
on a workstation or a system printer.
Reports show the results of system calculations, transaction totals, and so forth.
Some processes, such as data entry and file maintenance, automatically
generate reports; with other processes, you need to request a report. During
installation or while performing certain activities, you can tailor some of these
reports to limit the type and order of data that prints. The system date and the
time print on all reports.
Some applications print system calculations on payroll checks, purchase orders,
invoices, statements, and other special forms.
Assigning numbers to transactions

For some types of transaction entries, the user or the system assigns a number that
lets you follow the transaction through the system. Example of these numbers that
appear on displays and reports are:
Batch numbers for a group of source documents entered together
Sequence numbers for individual entries in a group in a sequence
Line numbers to identify a line within a logically related set such as orders or
invoices
Transaction set numbers for a group of related entries
Journal reference numbers, a composite field to identify the journal type (for
example PJ, CD, GJ), the journal sequence number, and a line number within the
journal
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-3
Backing up data
A paper audit trail consisting of control logs, data entry forms, and reports helps you
recover data if it is lost. Another very important protection for your data is to make
copies of your application master files and application libraries.
When you select option 4 on the CAS Master Menu (AMZM00), the Back Up/
Recover,/Reorganize menu (AMZM40) appears. Use this menu to perform the
backup functions that safeguard your data.
Controlling access to data

To protect the accuracy and confidentiality of data, only authorized persons should
have access to the computer and its programs and files. You can use the AS/400
and MAPICS XA security features to give selected people access to specific
computer and application functions. For information on AS/400 security, see Chapter
3, Installing MAPICS XA. For information on MAPICS XA security, see the CAS
Users Guide.
Checking for data accuracy

Several system and manual controls help to ensure the accuracy of data when you
enter it and when the system processes it. If the system finds an error, you see a
message describing the situation.
Data editing by the system

During both immediate and batch update, the system checks the accuracy of each
record against files, other display fields, lists of valid entries, or values and ranges
that the user defines. Cross-field (on the same display or on related displays) as well
as individual field edits occur. For example, if a vendor number is zero (a one time
vendor), you must enter the vendor name and address; or, in Fixed Asset
Accounting, the accumulated depreciation in the schedule record cannot exceed the
capitalized value in the header record.
Control totals
The system keeps running totals for groups of related records and checks to be sure
the totals are in balance. For example, an Accounts Payable invoice total must agree
with the total of all the detail lines. If there is incorrect or missing information, you can
accept the error temporarily and continue, but you must correct the error for the
information to be processed.
You can also use a Batch Status display to compare manual totals with system totals
for a group of records, batches, or file maintenance sessions. Totals can be dollar
amounts such as total open payables, or can be such things as total invoices,
orders, or numbers of additions, changes, and deletions in the master files. If the
totals do not agree and the error occurred during data entry, you can enter the
record again before you close the batch or you can suspend the batch, continue
entering the next batch of records, and then request the batch later to correct the
record and close the batch.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-4
Ensuring the correct sequence of operations

You must perform some MAPICS XA menu options in a certain order so that the data
is processed accurately. The system contains controls both within and between
menu options to ensure the correct sequence of operations.
If you need to perform several jobs in a specific sequence within a menu option, a
program controls the order of the jobs by calling each job in the sequence. If you do
not perform a particular step, you cannot complete the procedure.
If you need to perform related menu options in specific sequence, the system sets a
flag each time a menu option is completed successfully. If you select a menu option
out of sequence, a message appears and the procedure is not completed. For
example, in Payroll, you must take options to select records and calculate gross pay
before taking the option to calculate net pay. Sometimes a menu option is available
only at certain times of the year. In Forecasting, you can only run the options on the
Seasonal Update menu once at the end of the year.
Scheduling data processing operations

The needs of your business and the applications you have installed determine what
information you process and when. The sequence and length of operations may
change depending on the time of the week, the month, or the accounting period. To
process your business data efficiently, you must consider both system and business
resources. MAPICS XA has a number of ways to do this:
Daily scheduling
Multiple batch job queues
Unattached jobs
Storage capacity
Print spooling
Daily scheduling considerations

MAPICS XA has a feature called multiprogramming, which allows the computer to do
more than one task at a time. For example, one workstation can be used to select
invoices for payment, while another is used to enter journal entries, at the same time
the payroll is being processed in the batch job queue.
Even though all the applications are designed to support multiprogramming,
sometimes you do not want two operations to affect the same information. For
example, if you are in the middle of a payroll run, you do not want someone to
change a persons pay rate. To schedule MAPICS XA jobs so that they do not
interfere with each other or with your daily business operations, consider the
following:
At the start of each work day:
- Review the spool file to see if any reports need to be printed and the batch
job queue to see if any jobs are to be run.
- Select option 1, Application Status, from the CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10), to
make sure all applications successfully completed the previous days work.
- Check for any special situations when workstations are not available, such
as a scheduled backup.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-5
More than one person cannot access a master file record while the record is
being maintained.
Certain jobs, such as payroll processing, are so important to the overall
functioning of your company that they should be considered first when
scheduling jobs.
Because period-end closing for the general ledger cannot begin until all other
applications have completed their processing for the period, you have to
establish a schedule of each of the applications to meet the final closing dates.
Because of the volume of transactions, some jobs, such as the Material
Requirements Planning cycle and the printing of some reports require long run
times and increased system resources and you may need to schedule them at
non-peak times.
Some of the CAS Master Menu options require dedicated mode, which means
that no other MAPICS XA jobs can be running in the environment at the same
time. For more information, see the CAS Users Guide.
You cannot run some jobs at the same time as other jobs if the jobs contain
conflicting procedures or conflicting data. When this occurs, the system sends
messages concerning the status of processing and the actions that the system
takes or what you must do to reschedule the job.
For a list of conflicts by application, see the CAS Users Guide. For more
information on how conflict support works, see the CAS Technical Reference
Manual.
The system operator can send messages to or receive messages from a workstation
operator. For example, a workstation operator preparing to submit a job that requires
the action of the system operator (such as loading a tape) needs to inform the
operator that the job is starting. The SNDMSG or SNDBRKMSG command allows an
operator to send up to 512 characters of information. The system operator can use
this command to notify a workstation operator in a remote location that a requested
report has printed or to notify workstations when the system is needed for dedicated
mode or when it will be down at the end of the day.
Multiple batch job queues

As mentioned earlier, a batch job is one that is run with little or no user action, such
as printing reports. (The other type of MAPICS XA job is an interactive job where
processing is done in response to input by a workstation user and a dialog is
maintained between the user and the system. You can review the status of both types
of jobs using option 2 on the CAS Maintenance/Change menu, AMZM30.) All
MAPICS XA batch jobs run in a batch job queue in the QBATCH subsystem. The AS/
400 can run multiple batch job queues simultaneously so you can process several
batch jobs at the same time.
When MAPICS XA is initially installed, it creates six batch job queues (QBATCH1-6)
and one job queue (AMUJOBQ) for unattached jobs. By default, the system submits
all batch jobs to QBATCH1. If you want to use multiple job queues, you can review or
change the application job queue assignments using the Maintain Job Queue option
on the CAS Job Queue Maintenance menu (AMZM36). For more information, see the
CAS Users Guide.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-6
Notes:
1. Do not change the assignment of the job queue for unattached jobs
(AMUJOBQ).
2. The multiple job queue feature decreases processing time for batch jobs but
may increase processing time for interactive jobs.
Unattached jobs
An unattached job is a type of MAPICS XA job that allows a workstation operator to
enter data and then continue with other activities without waiting for the data to be
processed. You identify unattached jobs on the AS/400 Work with Active Jobs
display by the job name that begins with UMy as opposed to AMy for batch jobs,
where y is the file library designator for that environment.
Unattached jobs are not attached to any specific workstation. An unattached job
processes data more quickly than a batch job can process it. Unattached jobs
conserve system resources by processing one transaction at a time and by posting
transactions from multiple feeder jobs. Transactions are processed on a first-in firstout priority. In addition, unattached jobs use minimum system resources when there
are no transactions to be processed.
A feeder job can be data entered by a workstation operator, a communications job,
or another unattached job. If an unattached job is not active when a feeder job
begins, the feeder job starts it automatically. Once started, an unattached job
continues to run until it is held or ended by the system operator.
Both unattached and batch jobs run in the QBATCH subsystem. However, an
unattached job does not wait for other jobs to complete before it begins to run.
Unattached jobs are submitted to a special job queue created by MAPICS XA,
AMUJOBQ, that runs an unlimited number of jobs simultaneously.
You can review the status of unattached jobs by using the Unattached Job Status
option on the CAS Inquiry menu (AMZM10). You can start, restart, release, hold, or
end unattached jobs manually using the Unattached Job Status option on the CAS
Maintenance/Change menu (AMZM30).
Note: Unattached jobs must be held before running options in dedicated mode.
Either you can hold the jobs manually or the system holds them automatically. New
jobs are automatically held during backup and released after backup is finished.
Storage capacity
Obtaining additional capacity, such as main storage, may increase your throughput
because the system does not have to transfer the programs in and out of main
storage as often.
Adding workstations to a department allows more operators to enter information.
Throughput in one department may be improved, but because of the additional
demand this extra workstation has on the system capacities, throughput in other
departments may be reduced.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-7
MAPICS XA print spooling

To make it easier to schedule print functions, MAPICS XA uses the AS/400 print
spooling function for all printed output. Print spooling temporarily stores data on disk
in a spool file in an output queue and prints the data when you need it on the printer
that you designate.
To activate print spooling, start the subsystem QSPL during Initial Program Load
(IPL). To begin printing, enter the Start Print Writer (STRPRTWTR) command on the
AS/400 Command Entry display. This command identifies the output queue that
contains the spool file and the printer device that prints the file. The default output
queue is PRT01. To change output queues and other printer values, use the CAS
Printer Override Maintenance menu (AMZM33). To learn about the various
commands for managing print spooling, see the System Operators Guide for the
AS/400.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page 5-8
Contents
Index
Exit
Page A-1
Planning information checklists
Appendix A. Planning information checklists

This appendix contains forms for you to copy and use during your installation
planning. The first form is a checklist of suggested activities for you to complete
during the installation process. The second form contains a graph for you to fill in
with your installation planning schedule.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page A-2
(Page 1 of 2) Assignment checklist

Plan for installation
Plan the location of your new
system
Assign job responsibilities:
Select the installation
manager
Select the system operator
Identify the department
supervisors
Select the work station
operators
Select the backup
operators
Train the people:
Installation manager
System operator
Work station operator
Order supplies:
Special forms
Stock computer paper
Binders
Tapes
Printer ribbons
Diskettes
Organize your business
information:
Prepare answers to
questionnaires
Prepare data for
application data files
Determine which
application master files
you intend to user right
away
Complete the appropriate
forms for each file
Discuss with your MAPICS
representative how you
want to convert your
original data
Responsible person/dept Sched completion date
Actual completion date
Contents
Index
Exit
Page A-3
(Page 2 of 2) Assignment checklist

Plan for installation
Install the system:
Have your AS/400
components delivered to
the appropriate place
Check for all tapes or CDs
and manuals shown on the
packing list
Check for the instructions
that accompany the AS/
400 operating system
tapes or CDs.
Install the AS/400 operating
system
Install the applications:
Check that you have the
application users guides
you need and the CAS
Users Guide
Add license key
Run initial application
installation
Run install/tailor
Enter data into the files:
Convert from your existing
applications, or...
Use application file
maintenance or offline file
load
Verify data
After you install:
Test the applications
Activate interfaces
Establish security
Set up other functions
Responsible person/dept Sched completion date
Actual completion date
Contents
Index
Exit
Installation Planning Schedule

Date created:
Date last modified:
Activity
Page A-4
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-1
Installation questionnaires
Appendix B. Installation questionnaires

This chapter contains the questionnaires for all the MAPICS XA applications that use
questionnaires except Contract Accounting (CA) and Knowledge Based
Configurator (KBC). See the appropriate Users Guide or documentation for those
applications to get more information.
The Cross Application Support (CAS) questions appear first, followed by each of the
applications in alphabetical order. The CAS questionnaire contains the basic option
questions, such as which accounting method your company uses. These questions
apply to multiple applications and all of the companies you support.
After you answer the basic option questions, you answer the questionnaires for the
applications you are installing or tailoring. The questionnaires are divided into
functional, constants, and report options.
Functional options contain questions about how you want to use the application
functions, such as whether you want certain applications to interface.
Constants options require information that will not change, such as your
company name.
Report options allow you to determine formats for the information that prints on
an applications reports.
The following applications do not include any questions for Install/Tailor:
Electronic Commerce (EC)

Estimating and Quote Management (EQM)
Executive Information System (EIS)
Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS)
InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL)
Market Monitoring and Analysis (MMA)
Materials Management (MM)
Order-Based Production Management (OBPM)
Procurement Management (PM)
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-2
Installation questionnaires
Using the application tailoring questionnaires

To use a questionnaire, remove it from this book and make a blank copy. Then
discuss the questions and possible answers with those in your company who can
supply the necessary information.
Each question is followed by an explanation and by spaces showing the maximum
size of the answer. Questions with limits between which your response must fall show
those limits. LOW indicates the lower limit, and HILIM the higher limit. As you go
through the questionnaire, write the answers in the space provided.
When you complete the questionnaire, you must update the System Control
(SYSCTL) file with your answers. To do this, run the Install/Tailor Applications option
on the CAS Master Menu (AMZM00). Remember the following when you run Install/
Tailor Applications:
Notice that sometimes a question already has an answer inserted in the
response field for you. This is the default value that the application assumes. A
default is an answer already set up in the system. It is indicated in the
questionnaires by the word DFLT, along with the value. To accept the default,
press Enter and continue with the next question. To provide a different answer to
the question, type in your new answer and press Enter. Any new answers you
provide become the new default values.
Do not type leading zeros or blanks in the answer.
Always supply an answer when you see ANSWER REQ on the display.
Answer questions requiring a yes or no with Y or N.
Use F01 to start a section of the questionnaire again if you answer a question
incorrectly.
Use F16 to start the entire questionnaire again.
Note: Some questions may be skipped based upon the response to a previous
question or if the interface between two applications has been activated. For
example, account numbers cannot be changed if the interface between General
Ledger and the application has been activated.
Contents
Index
Page B-3
Exit

The CAS questions appear at the beginning of the questionnaires each time you run
Install/Tailor Applications.
Define basic options

X01
DO YOU WANT TO USE A 13-PERIOD ACCOUNTING SYSTEM?

DFLT-N
This question gives you an option for General Ledger processing. If you answer Y
(Yes), your accounting information is stored and processed on the basis of 13 fourweek periods to make your accounting year. If you answer N (No), the accounting
year is set up with 12 monthly (calendar) periods.
This question also determines whether the inventory usage for each accounting
period should be annualized by multiplying by 12 or 13 to calculate estimated annual
usage.
If your accounting system uses a 4-4-5 week schedule, select the 13-period
accounting option.
Notes:
1. Transactions posted under the 12-month accounting system contain a full date
(MM/DD/YY), while transactions posted under the 13-period system contain a
two-position period number (PP). If you are going to change from one
accounting system to the other, you should process all posted transactions for
the following applications, if installed, before changing your response to this
question:
Accounts Payable (AP)
Accounts Receivable (AR)
Customer Order Management (COM)
Financial Analysis (F/A)
General Ledger (GL)
Payroll (PR)
Inventory Management (IM)
Production Monitoring and Control (PM&C)
Repetitive Production Management (REP)
Sales Analysis (SA)
2. When you change your answer to this question and you have Forecasting (FCST)
installed, you must run Install/Tailor Applications for the Forecasting application
again.
Contents
Index
Exit
X02
Page B-4
DO YOU WANT ENTRY TRANSACTIONS TO BE DELETED FROM THE

SYSTEM BEFORE BACKING UP YOUR FILES?
DFLT-N
When you use the Back Up Files option, the system backs up (saves) the master files
and the transaction (data entry) files. If you need to recover your data entry files
between backups (option 2, Recover Files), your answer to this question determines
whether or not you have to reenter the data entry transactions (batches) during
recovery.
If you answer N (no), posted batches (FINISHED status) are retained on disk
until you back up the files, at which time they are backed up and deleted. During
recovery, the batches with a FINISHED status are changed to a SUSPENDED
status. You can then close and post these batches again.
If you answer Y (yes), batches are deleted after they are posted. (You do not
have batches with a status of FINISHED.) During recovery, all the batches you
entered since the last backup have to be entered again.
Notes:
1. All batches with a status other than FINISHED are saved during Back Up
Files, regardless of how you answer this question.
2. It is recommended that you back up your files at least once a day regardless
of how you answer this question.
3. In discussions throughout MAPICS XA, answering N is referred to as
REUSE=NO and answering Y is referred to as REUSE=YES.
4. If you are changing the answer to this question from N (No) to Y (Yes) for an
application that is already installed, it is recommended that you back up your
files and remove any FINISHED or DELETED batches before changing your
answer.
X03
DO YOU HAVE MORE THAN ONE COMPANY?

DFLT-N
You can have from 1 to 89 companies for which you process information. When you
answer N (No), the application assumes that there is only one company whose
number is assigned to be 01, and you cannot enter constant information for more
than one company.
If you have multiple companies for any of the applications you have installed or
intend to install, you must answer Y (Yes) to this question.
Because company number 01 is the default for all single company applications,
assign company 01 to the company name you want to print on the reports for the
Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP), Inventory Management (IM), Material
Requirements Planning (MRP), Production Control and Costing (PC&C), Product
Data Management (PDM), Purchasing (PUR), and Repetitive Production
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-5
Management (REP) applications. Failure to do so initially results in difficulty later if

the company number is changed, requiring master files to be renumbered.
If this application is already installed and you are changing your answer from Y (Yes)
to N (No), stay in the multiple company environment until you process all of the
transactions through the fiscal year. Then remove all references to multiple
companies from your master files to ensure correct results in a single company
environment.
X04
WHAT IS YOUR DEFAULT PLANNING WAREHOUSE?
Your answer to this question defines the default planning warehouse used by
Forecasting (FCST), Master Production Schedule Planning (MPSP), Purchasing
(PUR), and Repetitive Production Management (REP).
In FCST, PUR, and REP, the warehouse you enter here appears in the WAREHOUSE
field on the application displays. If you do not enter a warehouse, the WAREHOUSE
field is blank.
In MPSP, the warehouse you enter here is the planning warehouse used by the
application.
Your answer to this question must be left-justified and not contain any embedded
blanks, asterisks, or question marks. For example, the following entries are valid:
A A (blank)
A (blank) (blank)
AAA
The following entries are not valid:
A (blank) A
(blank) (blank) A
A*?
Answers are edited when you complete the questionnaire during the install/tailor
process. A report prints containing messages about answers that are not valid. You
can return to the beginning of the questionnaire and correct the responses. See the
Install/Tailor Applications chapter of the CAS Users Guide for more information.
X05
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF MULTIPLE

CURRENCY AND VALUE ADDED TAX TABLE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
Your answer to this question determines whether or not an audit list showing the
contents of a record both before and after it was maintained is printed.
It is useful to answer Y (Yes) to this question so you have a record of all changes
made to a file. If you decide later that you no longer need this report, you can change
your response to this question to N (No).
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-6
Use this option to maintain both the multiple currency files and the value added tax
files.
X06
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR PREVIOUS RESPONSES?

DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define basic options section of the questionnaire.
If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses to the previous
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question X01. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-7
Accounts Payable
Accounts Payable
If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, refer to the
Assigning General Ledger account numbers appendix in the Accounts Payable
Users Guide.
Define functional options

A01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?
DFLT-Y
If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the
options and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, answer
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question A13.
A02
WILL YOU BE USING A CASH ACCOUNTING METHOD?

DFLT-N
When you answer N (No), the application assumes an accrual method and
establishes the liability for the invoice at the time you enter it. It credits the Accounts
Payable account and debits the expense accounts entered with each invoice.
When you answer Y (Yes), the application assumes a cash method and debits the
expense for the invoice at the time you pay it.
A03
DO YOU WANT TO ENTER VOUCHER NUMBERS AS A SYSTEM CONTROL

MEDIUM?
DFLT-N
When you answer N (No), the Accounts Payable application assigns voucher
numbers as you enter invoices. The sequence begins with the first open payables
data you enter when your Accounts Payable application becomes operational.
If your company uses vouchers or wants to introduce them for payables control and
reference, this question lets you use your own numbering method. When you answer
Y (Yes), you must use your own voucher number system as part of invoice entry. You
must respond with Y (Yes) if you want your payment selection numbers to be
identical to the voucher numbers you enter. The maximum number is 99999 (five
digits) and each invoice must be assigned a unique voucher number per vendor.
Contents
Index
A04
Exit
Page B-8
Accounts Payable
DO YOU WANT TO EDIT VENDOR INVOICE NUMBERS?

DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes), the application edits the Open Payables file for duplicate
vendor invoice numbers during Purchase Journal processing. An N (No) response
eliminates this editing feature.
A05
DO YOU WANT IMMEDIATE CASH DISBURSEMENTS OF PREPAID

INVOICES?
DFLT-N
The Accounts Payable application is designed so that you can enter an invoice that
is already paid into the application. If you answer Y (Yes), the invoice is included on
the Purchase Invoice Journal and the application automatically initiates cash
disbursements processing.
If you answer N (No), cash disbursements are handled through manual payments.
A06
DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT INVOICE PAYMENT HISTORY?

DFLT-N
When you answer Y (Yes), Accounts Payable captures data for printed checks,
payments, and credit memos. This information is stored in the History or Archive
History files or both.
Y (Yes) is required if you are using AMplus.
Additional functions are provided that allow you to archive, restore, or delete invoice
payment history information.
A07
DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

AND PURCHASING?
DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes), amounts are entered in trading currency and converted to
local currency. Reports and displays show both trading and local amounts where
applicable. Posting to General Ledger is done only in local currency.
If you accept the default, trading and local currency amounts are the same and local
currency is assumed.
Contents
Index
A08
Exit
Page B-9
Accounts Payable
DO YOU WANT TO HAVE GENERAL LEDGER DISTRIBUTION?

DFLT-N
Accounts Payable can provide Purchase Journal and Cash Disbursements

transactions to General Ledger to track your purchases and payments. Answer Y
(Yes) if you want the application to create these journal transactions and save them
for month-end or period-end processing. You must answer Y (Yes) if you want to
activate an interface between Accounts Payable and the General Ledger application
and to automatically transfer these transactions to General Ledger.
Even if you have not installed the General Ledger application and do not plan to
install it, you can still answer Y (Yes) to take advantage of this feature. Enter your
Chart of Accounts into the General Ledger Master file so that the account numbers
can be edited. All transactions are generated for your General Ledger and written to
the Temporary General Ledger file. This makes it easier to capture the transaction
amount for transfer to your ledger.
When you answer N (No), no journal transactions are created, and you must
manually enter these transactions into your General Ledger using data entry. No
journal distribution reports are created. If you answer N (No), skip to question A10.
This question does not appear if you have activated the Accounts Payable interface
with General Ledger. If the interface is already active, Accounts Payable assumes
General Ledger distribution.
Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing the interface between
Accounts Payable and General Ledger. After you answer Y (Yes), you must activate
the interface through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate
Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide for more information.
If this application is already installed and you plan to change your response from Y
(Yes) to N (No), you must first clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledger
file. After you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually remove
the members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger files
by using the RMVM command if AR, PR, F/A, and GL are not installed.
A09
DO YOU WANT THE ITEM NUMBER PASSED TO GENERAL LEDGER AS

DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item number will be passed to General
Ledger from those invoice detail lines that contain an item number. If the item number
is not present, the invoice detail line is passed to General Ledger. If neither the item
number nor the invoice detail description is present, the invoice header description
is passed to General Ledger.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-10
Accounts Payable
If you answer N (No), the item number will never be passed to General Ledger. If the
item description is present, it is passed to General Ledger; otherwise, the invoice
description is passed.
This question is also asked in Purchasing.
A10
DO YOU WANT INVOICING MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES PASSED TO

PC&C?
DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, you have completed the first step in choosing
the interface between Accounts Payable and Production Control and Costing.
Answering Y (Yes) allows entry of invoicing miscellaneous charge and outside
operation transactions and editing of those transactions against the open order
database.
After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface to PC&C.
See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Note: This question applies to the payables processing functions shared by
Accounts Payable and Purchasing. If you are also installing Purchasing, the answer
to the Accounts Payable question also applies to Purchasing.
A11
DO YOU WANT INVOICING COST ADJUSTMENTS PASSED TO IM?

DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, you have completed the first step in choosing
the interface between Accounts Payable and Inventory Management. Answering Y
(Yes) allows entry of invoicing cost adjustment transactions and editing of those
transactions against the open order database.
After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through
Cross Application Support to actually pass the transactions to IM. See the Activate/
Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Note: This question applies to the payables processing functions shared by
Accounts Payable and Purchasing. If you are also installing Purchasing, the answer
to the Accounts Payable question also applies to Purchasing.
Contents
Index
A12
Exit
Page B-11
Accounts Payable
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OF YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNING

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define functional options section of the questionnaire.
If you made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return to
question A02. Answer N (No) to begin defining the constants options.
Define constants options

A13
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FOR

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?
DFLT-Y
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N
(No), the questionnaire skips to question A26.
A14
WHAT IS THE PAYMENT AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THE

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE SYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT? (ZERO ASSUMES NO
HIGHLIGHTING.)
DFLT-0
Enter the monetary value with no decimal positions. For example, type in 250 dollars
as 250. If you enter a value, the application highlights, as a warning, any payment
that is written for an amount over this value. If you do not enter a value, the
application does not verify the total payment amounts. If multiple currency support is
installed, the answer to this question is compared to local currency amounts.
The highlighting appears on the Cash Requirements Report, the Cash
Disbursements Journal, the Manual Payments Cash Disbursements Journal, and the
Manual Payments Cash Disbursements Register. When the value is highlighted on
the Cash Requirements Report, you can proceed to printing of checks. Or you can
enter payment selections again so that no payment is written above the maximum
amount. When the value is highlighted on the Cash Disbursements Journal, it is too
late to prevent printing of a check. If you do not want to send the printed check to the
vendor, you can manually void the payment just printed and enter a payment
reversal. A payment reversal reestablishes the invoice for which the check was
written and voids the check record that was added to the Bank Reconciliation file.
Contents
Index
A15
Exit
Page B-12
Accounts Payable
DO YOU WANT BANK ACCOUNT BALANCES TO APPEAR ON PAYMENT

SELECTION AND PRINT CHECK DISPLAYS?
DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes), the current bank account and the projected bank account
balances appear on the Payment Selection (Status) display. The BALANCE AFTER
PAYMENT field appears on the Print Checks (Enter) display.
If you answer N (No), no bank account balance, projected bank account balance, or
balance after payment information is shown.
The following questions refer to constant information that the Accounts Payable
application needs but which may vary with each company you have installed.
A16
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY COMPANY CONSTANTS

RELATED TO ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?
DFLT-Y
If your answers are Y (Yes) to questions X03 and A16, continue with question A17.
If your answers are N (No) to question X03 and Y to question A16, skip to question
A19.
A17
TYPE IN THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWING

RESPONSES WILL APPLY
LOW-1 HILIM-89 ANSWER REQ
You must enter a company number for each company you plan to install. Enter a
number between 1 and 89. The first time you answer this question, the company
number defaults to 1. Remember, if you install other applications that allow for
multiple companies, the company numbers and names should be consistent across
all the applications.
This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,
the company number is always 1.
Contents
Index
Exit
A18
Page B-13
Accounts Payable
TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)
You must enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15character company name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports.
This name is associated with the company number entered in question A17 or
company 1 if you answered N (No) to question X03.
The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the company
name that you entered appears on the last line as the default company name.
If you answered Y (Yes) to question A08, continue with question A19.
If you answered N (No) to question A08, skip to question A24 if you have multiple
companies or skip to question A25 if you have one company.
A19
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCOUNTS

PAYABLE?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger number you want to credit when you enter invoices
payable to vendors. You can enter your own 15-digit account number.
You can have several accounts to which you credit invoices, such as Notes payable
(2030), Interest payable (2050), Accounts Payablevendors (2000). (The account
numbers shown in parentheses refer to numbers from the sample Chart of Accounts.
Your account numbers may be different.) The number requested by this question is
for invoices payable to vendors.
If you do not enter a number, or enter 0, the display shows a zero, but the application
automatically uses 9999998 as the default for Accounts Payable on all applicable
reports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either the number you
chose or the default9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.
The following applications reserve default General Ledger account numbers to
prevent out-of-balance conditions:
Financial Analysis9999995
Accounts Receivable9999996
Payroll9999997
Accounts Payable9999998
To prevent the posting of an out-of-balance entry, an application uses its number if a

valid account number is not available when a posting is made. If one of these
numbers is used, you must manually transfer the entry to the proper account prior to
closing the period.
Contents
Index
A20
Exit
Page B-14
Accounts Payable
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR CASH-INBANK?

DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when the Accounts
Payable checks are written.
A21
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR DISCOUNTS

EARNED?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when the Accounts
Payable checks are written and any discount amounts are taken. If you must
distribute the discounts earned account to multiple accounts, you can do so by
making manual journal entries.
A22
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FREIGHT?

DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number (up to 15 digits long) you want to assign
as the default to the freight account during invoice entry. If you have the General
Ledger application installed, you must also add the General Ledger account number
to the General Ledger Master file. Otherwise, when this account number is used as a
default, edit errors occur.
A23
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SALES TAX?

DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number (up to 15 digits long) you want to assign
as the default to the sales tax account during invoice entry. If you have the General
Ledger application installed, you must also add the General Ledger account number
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-15
Accounts Payable
to the General Ledger Master file. Otherwise, when this account number is used as a
default, edit errors occur.
A24
DO YOU HAVE ANY MORE COMPANIES?

DFLT-N
This question tells the computer if you have entered all your companies. When you
answer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question A17 to enter the next company
number, name, and the information that applies to that company. After you enter all
your companies, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of the
questionnaire.
This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03.
If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question A17.
If your answer is N (No), continue with question A25.
A25

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define constants options section of the questionnaire.
question A14. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.
Define report options

A26
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTION FOR

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
A27
Exit
Page B-16
Accounts Payable
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALL

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master file record, such as a vendor name and address,
from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by other areas of your
application. If you want the application to print a report showing how the information
appeared before and after you changed it, answer Y (Yes). This report is the printed
audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. To provide an audit trail,
answer Y to this question when you first install the application. If you decide later that
the printed report of changes is N (No), no longer necessary in your company, rerun
the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
Note: When you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor after lines
print on the File Maintenance Report.
A28
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE RESPONSE CONCERNING THE REPORT

OPTION?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define report options section of the questionnaire.
question A27. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-17
Accounts Receivable
Accounts Receivable
R01

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?
DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question R10.
R02
WHICH METHOD DO YOU WANT USED TO CALCULATE YOUR GROSS

PROFIT?
1=PERCENT OF SALES
2=PERCENT OF COST
LOW-1 HILIM-2 DFLT-1
Choose the method that best suits your needs. Enter 1 to calculate gross profit as a
percentage of net sales; enter 2 to calculate gross profit as a percentage of cost.
R03

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to have transactions edited against the General Ledger
Master File and posted to the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer N (No) if you
do not want to have transactions edited against the General Ledger Master File and
posted to the Temporary General Ledger file. This question does not appear if you
have activated the Accounts Receivable interface with General Ledger.
file. When you run Install/Tailor Applications again, you should then manually remove
the members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger files
by using the RMVM command if AP, PR, F/A, and GL are not installed.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-18
Accounts Receivable
AR and GL. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface
through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter
of the CAS Users Guide for more information.
Question R04 appears only if AP and AR are installed.
R04
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE TO AP?

DFLT-N
If Accounts Payable (AP) is installed and interfacing with Accounts Receivable, AR

passes deposits to AP and automatically updates the bank account file maintained
by AP whenever a cash receipt is entered in AR.
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to interface with AP and have AR deposit amounts added
to AP bank balances. Answer N (No) if you do not want to interface with AP.
R05
DO YOU WANT TO AGE UNAPPLIED CASH AND ADJUSTMENTS FOR

OPEN ITEM CUSTOMERS?
DFLT-N
When you enter N (No), unapplied cash or adjustments for open items remain in the
current period at month-end closing. When you enter Y (Yes), unapplied cash or
adjustments for open items age to the next age period.
Balance forward unapplied cash or adjustments always age.
R06
DO YOU WANT FUTURE AGING OF INVOICES?

DFLT-N
Answer N (No) if you do not age invoices to become due at a future date. Answer Y
(Yes) if you age invoices for a date in the future.
Contents
Index
R07
Exit
Page B-19
Accounts Receivable
DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you do business with customers who use a different currency from
the one you use. Answer N (No) if you only do business with customers who use the
same currency as you use. Do not answer this question again with N if you answered
previously with Y and now have foreign currency AR balances.
This answer will change your answer to the same question in the COM questionnaire.
Whichever question you answered last will be the answer used by the system.
R08
DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT PAID ITEM HISTORY?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want paid invoice details captured and stored during the Paid
Item Purge function.
Answer N (No) if you do not want paid invoice details stored.
R09

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes) to
return to question R02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
constants options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-20
Accounts Receivable

R10
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANT INFORMATION FOR

DFLT-Y
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. When you
answer N (No), the questionnaire skips to question R33.
R11
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY CONSTANTS

RELATED TO ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to change or add company-related data. Answer N (No) if
you do not have any changes to enter.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question R25.
R12
WHAT IS THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWING

RESPONSES APPLY?
This question does not appear if you have only one company. In this case, the
company number is always 1.
R13
WHAT IS THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY?

UP TO 15 CHARACTERS
This name is associated with the company number entered in question R12 or
company 1 if you answered N (No) to question X03.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-21
Accounts Receivable
name that you have previously typed in for the particular company appears on the
last line as the default company name.
Questions R14 through R24 do not appear if question R03 was answered N (No) or if
the Accounts Receivable/General Ledger interface is activated. Skip to question
R25.
R14

RECEIVABLE?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits and credits
to your accounts receivable account.
automatically uses the number 9999996 as the default for AR on all applicable
chose or the default 9999996) to the General Ledger Master file.
The following applications reserve default General Ledger account numbers to
Payroll9999997
Accounts Payable9999998
To prevent the posting of an out-of-balance entry, an application uses its number if a

valid account number is not available when a posting is made. If one of these
numbers is used, you must manually transfer the entry to the proper account prior to
closing the period.
R15

DFLT-0
to your cash-in-bank account.
Contents
Index
R16
Exit
Page B-22
Accounts Receivable
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR

DISCOUNTS?
DFLT-0
to your discount account.
R17

ADJUSTMENTS?
DFLT-0
to your adjustment account.
R18
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SERVICE

CHARGES?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post credits to your
service charge account.
R19

ALLOWANCE ADJUSTMENT?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post debits to your
allowance or cash-posting adjustment (write-off) account.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-23
Accounts Receivable
R20

MISCELLANEOUS CASH RECEIPTS?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post credits to
miscellaneous cash receipts.
If you do not enter a number or enter 0, the display shows a zero, but the application
automatically uses the number 9999996 as the default for Accounts Receivable on
all applicable reports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either the
number you chose or the default 9999996) to the General Ledger Master file.
R21
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR BANK

CHARGES?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to use to post bank charges.
You must also add the General Ledger account number to the General Ledger
Master file.
R22
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR MCS WRITEOFFS?

DFLT-0
If you are using multiple currency support (MCS), enter the General Ledger account
number you want to use to post write-offs associated with currency conversions.
You must also add this General Ledger account number to the General Ledger
Master file.
R23
WHAT DATE WAS USED ON YOUR STATEMENTS LAST MONTH? YYMMDD

You must answer question R23 in YY/MM/DD format (year first, month second, day
third). Any other format causes errors in aging transactions. For example, if you are
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-24
Accounts Receivable
bringing up AR in July of 1993, and the last statement date used was July 01, 1993,
then enter 930701.
R24

DFLT-N
Your answer to this question tells the computer if you have entered all your
companies. When you answer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question R12 to
enter the next company number and name (questions R12 and R13) and the
information that applies to that company. When you enter all of your companies,
answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of the questionnaire. This
question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03.
If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question R12.
If your answer is N (No), continue with question R25.
R25
WHAT AGE PERIOD DO YOU CONSIDER AS DELINQUENT FOR PRINTING

DELINQUENCY NOTICES?
Enter a value from 1 to 4 to indicate the aging period when delinquency begins.
When requested, the application prints delinquency notices for all customers with
amounts in any aging period equal to or older than the aging period you enter here.
R26
DO YOU WANT TO CUSTOMIZE DELINQUENCY NOTICE CAPTIONS?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the captions you have defined in the Delinquency
Caption file.
Enter N (No) if you want to use the captions defined by the system.
R27
DURING WHICH AGE PERIOD DO YOU WANT SERVICE CHARGES TO BE

CALCULATED?
Enter a value from 1 to 4 to indicate the aging period when service charges begin.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-25
Accounts Receivable
The application calculates service charges using all customers with amounts in any
aging period equal to or older than the aging period you enter here.
R28
WHAT IS THE MINIMUM SERVICE CHARGE AMOUNT?

DFLT-0.00
The amount you enter here is used if the calculated service charge is less than this
amount. For example, if the minimum service charge is $0.50, enter .50.
R29
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN STATEMENTS?

Enter the maximum number of days you allow in your accounting period. If you are
installing this application for the first time, the number supplied is 35; you may adjust
this downward to 31, 32, 33, or 34. This number, along with your response to the next
question, regulates your month-end closing.
R30
WHAT IS THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF DAYS BETWEEN STATEMENTS?

Enter the minimum number of accounting days in your accounting period. The
default is 25. You may want to adjust this higher or lower if you can close your
accounting period earlier or later during the month. The answer to this question,
along with your response to the previous question, specifies the range of days within
which you must close an accounting period.
R31

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
If you have made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes)
to return to question R11. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
report options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-26
Accounts Receivable

R32
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR

DFLT-Y
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. When you
answer N, the questionnaire is completed.
R33

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change some master record (such as a customer name and
address) from the workstation, the information is immediately available for use by
other areas of your application. If you want the application to print a report reflecting
how the information appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y
(Yes). This report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master
files.
When COM is installed, refer to Chapter 9. Master File Processing in the
Accounting Management Accounts Receivable Users Guide for information on
printing Customer Master maintenance reports.
To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the
application. If you decide later that the printed report of changes is no longer
necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this
question.
print on the File Maintenance report.
R34
WHAT IS THE STATEMENT TYPE YOU WANT TO USE?

Enter 1 for standard window statement.

Enter 2 for standard spread window statement.
The following four questions pertain to statement preparation. The responses you
enter should be the options you most often use. Except for question R39, you can
override any of the options you select here when you request statements to be run.
Contents
Index
R35
Exit
Page B-27
Accounts Receivable
WHICH REPORT CONTENT OPTION DO YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS?

For customers designated to get statements:

Enter 1 if you want all customers who have not had current statements printed.
Enter 2 if you want only those customers who have not had current statements
printed and have past due amounts.
Enter 3 if you want only those customers who have not had current statements
printed and have delinquent amounts.
R36
WHICH REPORT RANGE DO YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS?

Enter 1 if you want all customers to be considered.

Enter 2 if you want a range of customers to be considered; for example, customers of
a selected company or a range of companies.
Contents
Index
R37
Page B-28
Accounts Receivable
Exit
TYPE IN THE RANGE OF CUSTOMERS YOU WANT FOR STATEMENTS.

DFLT-01000000008999999999
Enter the low and high limit in sequence as one number. You may want to enter a
range here for a frequently used set of customers so that you can override question
R36 at run time without having to enter a range override.
The range default consists of:
Low company number
01 (2 DIGITS)
High company number
00000000 (8 DIGITS)
Low customer number
89 (2 DIGITS)
High customer number
99999999 (8 DIGITS)
R38
WHICH ZERO BALANCE PRINT OPTION DO YOU WANT FOR

STATEMENTS?
Enter 1 if you want statements with current activity but zero balance to print.
Enter 2 if you do not want any statements with zero balances to print.
R39

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
return to question R34. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-29

T01

CRP?
DFLT-Y
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question T04.
T02
TYPE IN THE NAME OF YOUR COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)
The 15-character company name entered at this time appears in your report
headings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The first
time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the company name you
type in for the company appears.
T03
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNING SYSTEM

CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
If you have made a mistake or want to change your company name, answer Y (Yes)
to return to question T02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-30

T04
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR CRP?

DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question T06.
T05
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF CRP MASTER

FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master record (such as variable capacity or work center
information) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by other
areas of your application. If you want the system to print a report showing how the
information appeared before and after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). This
report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. You
should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application. If you
later decide that the printed report of changes is no longer necessary in your
company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after lines
are printed.
T06

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
question T05. Answer N (No) to end this section of the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Page B-31
Exit

B01

CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?
DFLT- Y
options and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you
can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question B12.
B02
DO YOU WANT ORDERS PRICED AT ENTRY TIME?

DFLT- Y
This question allows you to select order pricing during order entry or during
invoicing.
Answer Y (Yes) to fix prices at the time the order is entered. This means the prices
remain the same when the order is shipped, regardless of any price increase or
decrease.
Answer N (No) to have the order priced when it is shipped. This means the prices are
subject to any price increase or decrease until the goods are shipped.
B03
HOW DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE GROSS PROFIT?

1=PERCENT OF SALES
2=PERCENT OF COST
LOW- 1 HILIM- 2 DFLT- 1
Choose the method that best suits your needs. If you accept the default, gross profit
is calculated as a percent of net sales.
Contents
Index
B04
Exit
Page B-32
DO YOU WANT TO CROSSFOOT QUANTITY ORDERED, SHIPPED, AND

BACKORDERED?
DFLT- Y
This question allows you to specify automatic crossfooting of order and ship
quantities on standard orders. If the default Y (Yes) is specified, a warning message
appears unless quantity ordered is greater than or equal to quantity backordered
plus quantity shipped at release time.
B05
SHOULD SPECIAL CHARGE CODE 3 AMOUNTS BE PASSED TO SALES

ANALYSIS?
DFLT- N
This question allows you to have special charges associated with an order but not
passed to Sales Analysis (SA) for consideration as part of sales. The default N (No)
prevents any special charge code 3 charges or costs from being passed on to SA at
invoicing. If Customer Order Management is interfacing with SA, special charge
codes 1 and 2 are never passed on.
The operator supplies the following special charge codes during order entry:
0
COMMENT ON THE ORDER; NO COST OR AMOUNT IS

ASSOCIATED.
FREIGHT; NO COST IS ASSOCIATED.
CHARGE ONLY; NO COST IS ASSOCIATED.
CHARGE WITH COST; OPERATOR IS REQUIRED TO ENTER A
COST WITH THE SPECIAL CHARGE RECORD DURING ORDER
ENTRY.
1
2
3
B06
DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT SHIPPED ORDER HISTORY?

DFLT- Y
This question allows you to archive order shipments after orders are fully shipped
and invoices are printed.
Answer Y (Yes) to retain order shipment data after invoicing. Keeping this data on the
system allows you to review order shipments and reprint invoices. Order shipment
data can be archived to tape and then restored to the system.
Contents
Index
Page B-33
Exit
When you answer N (No), you cannot use the following functions:
Function
Menu/option
Commissions Worksheet
AMBM40/1
Daily Recap - Logistics measurements
AMBM20/4
Daily Recap - Service level
AMBM20/4
General Ledger Worksheet
AMBM40/2
Order copy from history
AMBM10/1, F10 on the Enter Order

panel, then action 001
Period to Date Backlog Shipments
AMBM30/3
Post-Invoicing Serial Number Assignment
AMBM1B/10
Review/Select Invoices to Reprint
AMBM17/13
Shipped order history inquiry
AMBM20/2, then F22 on the List of

Orders - Open Panel
B07
DO YOU WANT BOOKING RECORDS PLACED IN THE MONTHLY ACTIVITY

FILE?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) to save all the booking records monthly for use by user-written
programs.
Booking records are used by the Forecasting application as its source of customer
order demand and reflect quantity adjustments only. Amounts available are
approximations and do not necessarily reflect the true changes involved. You must
answer Y (Yes) to this question if you are using the Forecasting application.
B08
DO YOU WANT TO INCLUDE GENERATED DEMAND FROM MRP WITH

MFG ALLOCATIONS AND CUSTOMER ORDERS IN THE AVAILABLE TO
PROMISE (ATP) CALCULATIONS?
DFLT- Y
If you answer Y (Yes), you are choosing to include generated demand from MRP and
MPSP with manufacturing allocations and customer orders in the available to
promise calculations.
B09
DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) for Multiple Currency Support.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-34
Foreign subsidiaries can keep reports in their own currency but send results to their
parent company in the parent companys currency. The parent company can
produce consolidated reports showing the foreign subsidiaries results in side-byside format.
This answer will change your answer to the same question on the AR questionnaire.
The system uses the answer of the question answered last.
B10

DFLT-N
Customer Order Management can provide order entry journal transactions to

General Ledger to track your revenue from sales and cost of sales.
Master file and posted to the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer N (No) if you do
not want to have transactions edited against the General Ledger Master file and
posted to the Temporary General Ledger file.
the members from the General Ledger Master and Temporary General Ledger files if
other applications that interface with GL are not installed.
other applications and GL. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must
activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/
B11

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT- Y
return to question B02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
company options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-35
Define company options

B12
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY INFORMATION FOR

DFLT- Y
options and enter essential information.
If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),
depending on what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question B18.
B13
TYPE THE COMPANY NUMBER TO WHICH THE FOLLOWING RESPONSES

APPLY.
The number you enter must be between 1 and 89. The first company number must
be 1. Remember that if you install other applications that allow for multiple
companies, the company numbers should be consistent across all the applications.
This question does not appear if you selected single company support in the CAS
questionnaire (X03=N). If you use single company support, the company number
defaults to 1.
If IFM is installed and interfacing, be sure the companies in COM correspond to the
financial divisions in IFM. Company and financial division refer to the same type of
unit; COM uses the term company and IFM uses the term financial division.
B14
TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS).
Type a 15-character company name associated with the company number you
entered in question B13. The system uses the company name as part of the
headings on your reports.
The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The first time you
answer this question, the default is MAPICS/DB. After that, the company name that
you previously typed in for the particular company appears.
You cannot add, change, or delete company names using COM Company Master file
maintenance. You add new companies to the Company Master file using the
questionnaire. You cannot delete companies from the Company Master file once you
have added them. To soft delete a company, follow these steps:
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-36
1. Change the company name to one that the operators readily recognize, such as
***DELETED***, using the System Control DataField Format option on the CAS
Maintenance/Change menu (AMZM30). (Select the CZ record and update the
information using F23.) This should discourage the operators from selecting this
company.
2. Run the questionnaire. Use this question to blank out the company name.
B15
WHAT IS YOUR CURRENT PROCESSING MONTH/PERIOD?

1 = JANUARY OR PERIOD 1
Enter the number that corresponds to the month or period when you want to post
current Sales Analysis data.
Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise,
unpredictable results may occur.
B16

DFLT- N
If you need to add or change more companies, answer Y (Yes) and return to
questions B13 and B14 to enter the next company number and name. If you have
added or changed all companies, answer N (No) and continue with the next
question.
This question does not appear if you selected single company support in the CAS
questionnaire (X03=N).
B17

COMPANY INFORMATION?
DFLT- Y
This question completes the Define company options section of the questionnaire.
If you made a mistake and want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes)
and return to question B13 or B14, depending on your response to question X03.
Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the report options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-37

B18

DFLT- Y
options and enter essential information.
If this application is already installed, you can answer Y (Yes) or N (No) depending
on what needs to be changed.
If you answer N (No), you have completed the COM questionnaire.
B19
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF RECORD

CHANGES FOR SELECTED MASTER FILES?
DFLT- Y
When you add or change a master file record from the workstation, the information is
immediately available for use by other areas of your application.
Answer Y (Yes) to print before and after images of the files maintained by the
following menu options:
AMBM60 option 11, Salesreps

AMBM62 option 1, Item Master
AMBM71 option 1, Maintain Rules
AMBM71 option 2, Maintain Rule Priorities
AMBM71 option 4, Maintain Intercompany Accounts
AMBM73 option 4, Maintain Interface Control File
AMBM73 option 5, Maintain General Ledger Master (if General Ledger is not
installed)
This report is the audit trail of all manual changes made to these master files. We
suggest that you answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application.
If you decide later you no longer need a printed report of file changes, rerun the
questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
Contents
Index
B20
Exit
Page B-38

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT- Y
return to question B19.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-39
COM_Net
COM_Net
Note: These questions begin with a lowercase c rather than the uppercase C
shown in this text.

C01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR COM_NET

DFLT-Y
Answering Y (Yes) allows you to see the questions associated with your installed
applicaitons
Answering N (No) exits the questionnaire.
C02
HOW DO YOU SELECT COM_NET WAREHOUSE?
DFLT - 1
This option determines the warehouse that will be assigned to the customer order.
1. Use warehouse in customer master record.
2. Use COM_Net default warehouse. (See next question.)
3. Use User Exit.
4. Unused.
C03
ENTER DEFAULT COM_NET WAREHOUSE

DFLT - BLANK
This question only appears when the previous question was answered with option 2.
Response is mandatory.
C04
SELECT PRICING OPTION

DFLT - 1
1. Entry/Update time
2. Update time only
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-40
COM_Net
Option 1 shows the user the price, but therefore takes longer. The price will be
recalculated when the order is copied from offline files to live files.
Option 2 does not show the user the price and runs faster. The price will be
calculated when the order is copied from offline files to live files.
C05
DO YOU WANT COM_NET TO AUTOMATICALLY UPDATE ORDERS

ENTERED THROUGH COM_NET ORDER ENTRY?
DFLT - Y
This option will allow the customer-entered orders to go directly to the live database
without user intervention. They can still be put on hold depending on the answer to
the next question.
SYSCTL position 14
C06
DO YOU WANT COM_NET TO PLACE ORDERS ON COM_NET HOLD?

DFLT - N
This option will apply an order hold with a designation of CN to all orders coming
from COM_Net. The order level holds will be managed in the same way as other
order-level holds, such as PO hold, credit hold, etc.
C07
INVENTORY AVAILABILITY DEFINITION

DFLT - 1
Available inventory = On-hand

Available inventory = On-hand - Allocated + On-order
Available inventory = On-hand - Allocated
C08

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT - Y
This question completes the COM_Net questionnaire.

question c02. answer N (No) to exit the questionnaire.
Note:
Within COM_Net, all question numbers begin with a lower-case c.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-41

D01

ENTERPRISE PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question D12.
D02
DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCT COSTING?

DFLT-N
If you want to use the product costing function, answer Y (Yes). This causes the size
of the Item Master file to double from one to two records per item to accommodate
Enterprise Product Data Management (EPDM) costing data. If you answer N (No),
you cannot use the product costing function. For more information, see the
Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and the PDM Users Guide.
D03
DO YOU WANT PRODUCTION FACILITY STANDARD EFFICIENCY TO BE

USED FOR CALCULATING STANDARD AND CURRENT COSTS?
DFLT-Y
If you want production facility standard efficiency to be used in EPDM product

costing calculations, answer Y (Yes). If you answer Y (Yes), EPDM uses the value
from the Facility Master file. If you answer N (No) or if you do not select the Facility
Master file, EPDM uses a value of 1.00 (100%) for production facility efficiency. (For
more information, see question D07 or the Enterprise Product Data Management
Concepts Guide and the PDM Users Guide).
D04
DO YOU WANT TO USE FEATURE/OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
If you want features and options, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want features and
options, answer N (No). For more information, see the Enterprise Product Data
Management Concepts Guide and the PDM Users Guide.
Contents
Index
D05
Exit
Page B-42
DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE FOR YOUR BILLS OF

MATERIAL?
DFLT-Y
If you want to be able to maintain and retrieve your bills of material in a user-specified
sequence and have duplicate component items in your bills of material, answer Y
(Yes). If you do not want this function, answer N (No), and your bills of material are
maintained and retrieved in component item sequence.
For more information, see the Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide
and the PDM Users Guide.
Note: The sequence you choose controls the order in which the structure records
are retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the EPDM questionnaire and
change the sequence, you must reorganize the Product Structure file for the change
to take effect.
D06
HOW DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE IN RELATION TO

COMPONENT ITEMS?
1. USER SEQ./COMPONENT ITEM
2. COMPONENT ITEM/USER SEQ.
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D05. Enter the
sequence in which you want components to be retrieved for maintenance, inquiry,
and reports.
Continue with question D07.
are retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the EPDM questionnaire and
to take effect.
D07
DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCTION FACILITIES?

DFLT-Y
This question does not appear if PC&C is installed and interfacing because the
Facility Master file must exist for PC&C. This question does not appear if there are
existing Routing Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you are
installing the REP application.
If you want the Facility Master file, answer Y (Yes). For more information, see the
Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and the PDM Users Guide.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-43
Use the RMVM command to manually remove the Facility Master file from the disk if
all of the following conditions are true:
This is not your initial installation.

You are changing your response to this question from Y (Yes) to N (No).
PC&C is not installed and interfacing.
REP is not installed.
The Routing file (RTGHDR) is not needed.

D08
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE STANDARD ROUTING OPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D07 or if PC&C is
installed and interfacing. This question does not appear if there are existing Routing
Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you are installing the
REP application.
If you want Routing data for standard operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use
operation yield, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use the expanded item-receiving
capability in Purchasing, answer Y (Yes). Otherwise, answer N (No). For more
information, see the Enterprise Product Data Management Concepts Guide and the
PDM Users Guide.
D09
DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL ROUTING DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question D08. If you need
more than 20 characters of text for your routing operation descriptions, answer Y
(Yes) to create the Routing Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999
lines of 40-character text for each routing operation description. If you do not need
additional routing operation descriptions, answer N (No).
D10
IF MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING IS TO BE INSTALLED LATER, DO

YOU WANT ADDITIONAL MRP INFORMATION IN THE ITEM MASTER FILE?
DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you did not request the product costing function
(question D02). If you answer Y (Yes), the size of the Item Master file is doubled to
accommodate the future MRP data. If you answer N (No), the size of the Item Master
file remains at one record per item.
Contents
Index
D11
Exit
Page B-44

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made an error or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return to
question D02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.

D12

EPDM?
DFLT-Y
D13
TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY

(UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)
headings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is not
labeled DFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that,
the company name that you type in appears.
If you answered Y (Yes) to question D04 (features/options), continue with questions
D14 through D34.
If you answered N (No) to question D04 (features/options), skip to question D35.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-45
The following questions appear only if you requested features and options (question
D04). You can type in 0, 1, or 2 for each question up to where the accumulation of
your answers for this series of feature/options questions equals 20. When this total
equals 20, question D35 appears. If this total exceeds 20 (maximum), you are
automatically returned to the beginning of this series, question D14.
Note: Once the S-number template is defined for features and options, if you
decide to change the field sizes, you should revisit every F/O items structure to
ensure the correct options are selected.
D14
WHAT IS THE FIELD SIZE FOR THE OPTIONS OF FEATURE 01?

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

Contents
Index
D21
Exit
Page B-46

D22

D23

D24

D25

D26

D27

D28

Contents
Index
D29
Exit
Page B-47

D30

D31

D32

D33

D34

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
If you have made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return
to question D13. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-48

D35
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR EPDM?

DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), you have completed the EPDM portion of the questionnaire.
D36

ENTERPRISE PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT MASTER FILE RECORDS
WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master file record (such as item or Facility Master
report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. To
provide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install
the application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no longer
question.
are printed.
D37

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the questionnaire.

If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the Define report options
section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question D36.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-49
Financial Analysis
Financial Analysis
F01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR FINANCIAL

ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation, answer Y (Yes) to show the options. If this application is
already installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs
to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question F08.
F02
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE AUTOMATIC JOURNAL ENTRY FEATURE OF

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Automatic Journal Entry feature. If you
do not need this feature now, answer N (No).
F03
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE BUDGET PREPARATION FEATURE OF

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Budget Preparation feature. If you do
not need this feature now, answer N (No).
F04
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FINANCIAL RATIOS FEATURE OF FINANCIAL

ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Financial Ratios feature. If you do not
need this feature now, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
F05
Exit
Page B-50
Financial Analysis
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FIXED ASSET ACCOUNTING FEATURE OF

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Fixed Asset feature. If you do not need
this feature now, answer N (No).
F06
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE FINANCIAL STATEMENT REPORT WRITER

FEATURE OF FINANCIAL ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you are planning to use the Financial Statement Report Writer
feature. If you do not need this feature now, answer N (No).
F07
DO YOU WANT TO KEEP TRANSACTION DETAILS FOR IFM G/L LINES?

DFLT-N
This question appears only when IFM is installed. Answer Y (Yes) if you want to keep
transaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extract file. If the answer is N
(No), transaction details will not be saved in the Transaction Extract File.
F08

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
return to question F02. Answer N (No) to begin defining report options.
Contents
Index
Page B-51
Financial Analysis
Exit

F09
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR FINANCIAL

ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation you must answer Y (Yes) so that you can enter essential
information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N
(No), depending on what you need to change.
F10

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master record (such as a fixed asset) from the
workstation, the information is immediately updated in the master record and
available for use. If you want the system to print a report showing how the information
appeared before and after the change was made, as well as when and by whom the
change was made, answer Y (Yes).
This report is the printed audit trail for all manual changes made to your master files.
In case you need to recover master files for which you have no current backup, you
can use this report to identify transactions which you must type in again. Answer Y
(Yes) to this question when you first install the application. At a later date you can
rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question, if you decide the printed
report of changes is no longer necessary to your company.
F11

LOW-1
HILIM-89 ANSWER REQ
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to X03.

The number you enter must be between 1 and 89.
Enter a valid company number and answer the next two questions as they appear.
When this question appears again, enter the next valid company number. You
continue in the same way for each company number you need to enter. Remember
that if you install applications that allow for multiple companies, the company
numbers must be consistent across all applications.
Contents
Index
F12
Exit
Page B-52
Financial Analysis
WHAT IS THE BUDGET VARIANCE PERCENT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT

THE BUDGET VARIANCE REPORT TO HIGHLIGHT?
DFLT-150
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to F03.

If you enter a value, the system highlights, as a warning, any proposed budget
amount whose variance from the current budget or actual amount exceeds this limit.
The highlighting is on the Budget Variance Report. The message is only a warning.
You can still post the proposed budget. However, you may want to review the budget
factors and adjust the proposed budget amount before posting it. If you enter 000,
the system does not edit the budget variances against a limit.
Budget variances are expressed as the proposed budget amount percentage of the
current budget amount. For example, if the current budget is $300 and the new
budget is $450, the budget variance prints as 150%.
Enter the budget variance percent as a whole number.
F13

DFLT-N
If you answer Y (Yes), return to question F10 to enter the next company number. After
entering all of your company numbers, answer N (No) to this question and continue
with the rest of the questionnaire.
F14

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-N
return to question F09. You have now completed answering all the tailoring questions
necessary for your Financial Analysis application.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-53
Forecasting
Forecasting
After you complete the questionnaire, there are still more tasks to complete before
you are finished implementing Forecasting. Because these tasks are only done at the
time you first install Forecasting, they are referred to as implementation tasks.
Throughout Forecasting, you see references to the implementation phase. Before
you answer the questionnaire for the first time, read the Managing Forecasting
section of the Forecasting Users Guide for a description of the implementation
phase steps.

201

FORECASTING?
DFLT-Y
(No), the questionnaire skips to Define report options.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question 227.
202
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PLANNING?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is installed and interfacing or is being
installed at this time.
Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in providing an interface between
FCST and MRP. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the
interface through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate
interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
You must answer Y (Yes) to be able to release forecasted requirements of end items
and service parts to MRP. If you answer N (No), forecasted requirements cannot be
released to MRP.
Note:
MRP.
This interface must be activated before you can release requirements to
Contents
Index
203
Exit
Page B-54
Forecasting
DO YOU WANT TO PASS FORECASTED REQUIREMENTS TO THE DEMAND

INTERFACE FILE?
DFLT-N
You must answer Y (Yes) to be able to release forecasted requirements of end items
and service parts to the Demand Interface file (DMDIFF) for use by MPSP. If you
answer N (No), the Demand Interface file is not loaded with forecasted requirements.
The Demand Interface file contains item number/warehouse requirements over a
maximum of three years. The first year is composed of a maximum of 52 weekly
periods; the second and third years are composed of 12 or 13 periods each.
Note: The master schedule code (MSCOD) must be set to M for each item
whose forecasted requirements are to be released to the Demand Interface file.
204
HOW MANY YEARS DO YOU WANT TO FORECAST?

The answer to this question must be 1, 2, or 3 (years). Period forecasts can be

generated for up to 3 years. Forecasts for year 1 are tactical, statistical forecasts.
Forecasts for years 2 and 3 are strategic projections based upon life cycles.
Note: If your answer is 2 or 3, you must supply data to define each of your life
cycle curves.
205
DO YOU WANT TO PASS SAFETY STOCK REQUIREMENTS TO THE ITEM

BALANCE FILE?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the safety stock calculated in Forecasting to update the
safety stock quantity in the planning warehouse and selling warehouse Item Balance
records. If you answer Y (Yes), the safety stock calculated in Forecasting is used in
material requirements calculations in MRP.
206
DO YOU WANT TO PASS REORDER POINT QUANTITY TO THE ITEM

BALANCE FILE?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the reorder point calculated in Forecasting to update the
reorder point quantity in the planning warehouse and selling warehouse Item
Balance records. This field is useful for master scheduling and managing non-timephased items.
Contents
Index
207
Exit
Page B-55
Forecasting
DO YOU WANT TO USE UNIT COST DEFAULT FROM THE ITEM MASTER
FILE?
DFLT-Y
To value the forecasts, you must maintain an item standard cost for each end item or
service part maintained in Forecasting. If you answer Y (Yes), the unit cost default
value from the Item Master file automatically updates the unit cost field in
Forecasting. If you answer N (No), the unit cost field in Forecasting must be
maintained manually.
Note:
The unit cost field in Forecasting is a required field.
208
DO YOU WANT TO USE VALUE CLASS FROM THE ITEM MASTER FILE?
DFLT-Y
The value class is used to determine reporting priorities. If you maintain the value
class within the Item Master file and answer Y (Yes) to this question, the value class
assigned to a master level item (MLI) in the Item Master file automatically updates
the value class field in Forecasting. If you answer N (No) to this question, the value
class field in Forecasting must be maintained manually. If you manually maintain this
field, the value class can be defined to mean whatever you want. For instance, you
might assign value classes based upon standard cost and annual demand.
209
DO YOU WANT TO USE ITEM CLASS FROM THE ITEM MASTER FILE?
DFLT-Y
The item class is used to determine reporting priorities. If you maintain the item class
within the Item Master file and answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item class
assigned to each forecasted item in the Item Master file automatically updates the
product line field in Forecasting. If you answer Y (Yes), and depending on your
answer to question 210, you can maintain the other positions of the product line field
within Forecasting. If you answer N (No), the product line can be defined to mean
whatever you want. For instance, you might assign product lines based upon
product manager assignments.
Note:
The product line field in Forecasting is a required field.
Contents
Index
210
Exit
Page B-56
Forecasting
DO YOU WANT ITEM CLASS TO BE LEFT-ADJUSTED IN PRODUCT LINE?

DFLT-Y
If you answer Y (Yes) to question 209, you must determine whether the item class
field should be left-adjusted or right-adjusted in the product line field. If you answer Y
(Yes), item class is loaded into product line left-adjusted. If you answer N (No), item
class is loaded into product line right-adjusted.
211
DO YOU WANT TO USE CUMULATIVE MATERIAL LEAD TIME FROM THE

ITEM BALANCE FILE?
DFLT-Y
The cumulative material lead time (CMLT) is used to determine the time fence in
which requirements are added to MRP. If you answer Y (Yes), the CMLT field
maintained in the Item Balance file automatically updates the CMLT field in
Forecasting. If you answer N (No), the CMLT field in Forecasting must be manually
maintained.
Note: If the Item Balance file is not present, CMLT cannot be automatically passed
from that file.
212
HOW MANY FIRST YEAR PERIOD FORECASTS SHOULD BE

CONVERTED TO WEEKLY FORECASTS?
In this question, you designate the number of forecast periods to be converted into
weekly forecast buckets. The maximum number of forecast periods to be converted is
12 if you are using monthly forecast periods or if you are using 4- or 5-week forecast
periods. The maximum number of forecast periods to be converted is 13 if you are
using 4-week forecast periods. Your answer to question 213 determines the maximum
number of forecast periods.
Note: The number of periods to convert should be as long as the longest
cumulative material lead time (CMLT). This ensures that the conversion from periods
to weeks does not influence the material plan within the CMLT.
213
HOW MANY YEARS OF DEMAND HISTORY DO YOU WANT TO RETAIN?

You must designate how many years of demand history you want to retain. The
maximum number of years of demand history Forecasting retains is six. The answer
to this question controls when Demand History records are removed from the
Demand History file.
Contents
Index
214
Exit
Page B-57
Forecasting
TYPE IN THE YEARS OF DEMAND HISTORY YOU ARE SUPPLYING (TWO

DIGITS FOR EACH YEAR WITH NO BLANKS OR COMMAS).
During initial installation, you must identify which years of demand history are being
supplied. The maximum number of years of demand history Forecasting accepts is
six. List the last two digits of each year of demand history supplied, beginning with
the most recent year and going back in time. The first time you answer this question,
the default is blank. After that, the years of demand history that you previously typed
appear.
The system sets up your current period and year to be period 12 of the year, which is
one less than the system year when you install. The most recent year of history to
supply, which is the first year you enter, must also be equal to one less than the
system year. Also, if you are not installing at the beginning of a year, you have to run
multiple period update processes to bring the system up to the real current period.
For example, if you are installing in July 1990, the system initializes your Forecast
Control record to current period 12 and current year 1989; and sets you up at the
end of your last full year. Your most recent year of history would then be 1989, and
you would enter 89 as the first two digits here, followed by 888786, and so on for as
many years of history as you have.
Your answer to this question is independent of the previous question (question 219).
The years of history you are supplying in question 220 can be less than the years of
history you are retaining in question 219.
Note: You must prepare the Item Summary files and run Demand History Extract by
choosing option 1 from the Seasonal Update menu (AM2M50), after you have
completed the install/tailor process. Refer to the Forecasting Users Guide for the
ITSMnn data requirements. For example, if you answer this question with 888786,
then you must prepare ITSM88, ITSM87, and ITSM86. Refer to the Forecasting Users
Guide for the ITSMXX data requirements. For example, if you answer this question
with 888786, then you must prepare members ITSM8821, ITSM8722, and ITSM8623.
215
DO YOU WANT TO RETAIN DEMAND HISTORY BY SELLING WAREHOUSE?

DFLT-N
If you want to retain demand history by each selling warehouse, you must answer Y
(Yes). If you are not using selling warehouse demand history for seasonality analysis,
answer N (No) to this question.
216
WHAT IS THE HIGHEST SEASONAL GROUP PROFILE CODE ASSIGNED?

During initial installation and subsequent retailoring, you must identify the highest
seasonal group profile code assigned in Forecasting. You should specify several
more seasonal group profile codes than you actually intend to use. This allows
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-58
Forecasting
modification of your seasonal group profile code assignments without retailoring to

create more seasonal group profile codes.
For example, if you initially assign your products into 13 seasonal groups, you should
specify approximately 20 seasonal group profile codes during initial installation.
A maximum of 999 seasonal group profile codes is available. Typically, less than 25
seasonal group profile codes are assigned.
217
WHAT IS THE HIGHEST LIFE CYCLE PROFILE CODE ASSIGNED?

During initial installation and subsequent retailoring, you must identify the highest life
cycle profile code assigned in Forecasting. You should specify several more life
cycle profile codes than you actually intend to use. This allows modification of your
life cycle profile code assignments without retailoring to create more life cycle profile
codes.
For example, if you initially assign your products into 13 life cycle profiles, you should
specify approximately 20 life cycle profile codes during initial installation.
A maximum of 999 life cycle profile codes is available. The number of life cycle
profile codes is dependent upon how uniquely the life cycle curves are defined. You
could have one life cycle curve for the whole company or one life cycle curve for
each item.
218
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY OR YOUR RESPONSES CONCERNING

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes) to
return to question 202. Answer N (No) to continue with the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-59
Forecasting

219

FORECASTING?
DFLT-Y
(No), the questionnaire skips to the end.
Note: It is recommended that you select the reports individually from the report
menus until you become acquainted with the reports printed during a period update.
After you know which reports you want, return to the questionnaire to indicate which
ones you want to print during a period update.
If your answer is N (No), skip to the end of the questionnaire.
220
DO YOU WANT EFFECTIVE DATES PRINTED ON YOUR REPORTS?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want effective dates to print on reports generated by

Forecasting. The effective date is a user-defined field that can be used to refer to
hardcopy reports in the future. If the effective date is used, the first step in the period
update process is to revise the effective date field in the Forecast control record to
reflect the last day in the demand reporting period just ended.
221
DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR THE DEMAND HISTORY

CONSTRUCTION?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item for
each year of the demand history construction during initial installation. To provide an
audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install
Forecasting. If you later decide that the detailed printed report of demand history
construction is no longer necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and
answer N (No) to this question.
Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the error records and control
totals are printed.
Contents
Index
222
Exit
Page B-60
Forecasting
DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR FORECAST MASTER

EXTRACTION WITH THE ITEM MASTER FILE?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation and period updates, the contents of the Forecast Master file
are extracted and compared to the contents of the Item Master file for the purpose of
automatically reconciling the Forecast Master file. The extraction routine adds
records to, updates records in, and deletes records from the Forecast Master file. If
you want the system to print a report showing how the information appeared before
and after the change was made, answer Y (Yes). This report is the printed audit trail
of all changes made to the Forecast Master file. To provide an audit trail, you should
answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install Forecasting. If you later decide
that the detailed printed report of changes is no longer necessary in your company,
rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed (no
list of added item numbers is generated).
223
DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR PERIOD DEMAND DATA

CAPTURE?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item at
the end of each period when demand data is captured. To provide an audit trail, you
should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install Forecasting. If you later
decide that the detailed printed report of demand data captured is no longer
question.
Note:
If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed.
224
DO YOU WANT AN AUDIT TRAIL REPORT FOR THE INVENTORY

PARAMETER CALCULATION?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to print a detailed audit trail report by item for
inventory parameters. To provide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this
question when you first install Forecasting. If you later decide that the detailed
printed report of inventory parameters is no longer necessary in your company, rerun
the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
Note:
If you answer N (No) to this question, only the control totals are printed.
Contents
Index
Exit
225
Page B-61
Forecasting

FORECASTING MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or update Forecast Master, Seasonal Group Profile, or Life Cycle
Profile records from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by
other areas of Forecasting. If you want the system to print a report showing how the
information appeared before and after the changes were made, answer Y (Yes). This
report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to the appropriate file. To
Forecasting. If you later decide that the detailed printed report of changes is no
longer necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this
question.
Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after image
is printed.
226
ENTER YOUR COMPANYS NAME (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS).
This entry is used in the headings on your reports. The default company name
appears on the last lines of the prompt. The first time you answer this question, the
default is blank. After that, the company name that you previously typed in for the
particular company appears.
227

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 228. Answer N (No) to complete the
questionnaire.
After you have completed the installation of Forecasting, you must run an implementation
process for this application. That process is described in What you need to do after you
install Forecasting in Chapter 2 of the Forecasting Users Guide.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-62
Forecasting
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-63
General Ledger
General Ledger
If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, refer to the
Assigning General Ledger account numbers appendix in the General Ledger
Users Guide.

G01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY FUNCTIONAL INFORMATION

FOR GENERAL LEDGER?
DFLT-Y
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer
is N (No), skip to question G05.
G02
DO YOU WANT TO SAVE JOURNAL TRANSACTIONS FROM THE TEMGEN

FILE INTO AN ON-LINE HISTORY FILE?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to process journal transactions in a journal history file. You can then
accumulate, archive, and restore journal history, as well as inquire into the Journal
History file, and print journal history reports.
G03
DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN GL/FA?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to install Multiple Currency,

A foreign subsidiary can keep reports in its own currency but send results to its
parent company in the parent companys currency. The parent company can
produce consolidated reports showing subsidiaries result in side-by-side format.
Contents
Index
G04
Exit
Page B-64
General Ledger

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
question G02. Answer N (No) to begin defining the constants options.

G05

GENERAL LEDGER?
DFLT-Y
options and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, answer
If your answers are Y (Yes) to questions X03 and G05, continue with question G06.
If your answers are N (No) to questions X03 and G05, continue with question G16.
If your answers are N (No) to question X03 and Y (Yes) to question G05, skip to
question G16.
G06

The question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,
G07
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-65
General Ledger
This name is associated with the company number entered in question G06.
name that you entered appears on the last line as the default company name.
If you answered Y (Yes) to question X01, continue with question G09.
If you answered N (No) to question X01, continue with question G08.
Contents
Index
G08
Exit
Page B-66
General Ledger
WHAT IS THIS COMPANYS FIRST FISCAL MONTH?

If you are reinstalling the company after a processing cycle has started, continue
with question G13.
The computer assumes that each company has an independent accounting cycle
for the 12-month accounting year. The answer to this question tell General Ledger in
which month to begin year-to-date calculations.
Answer with the fixed number associated with the month.
01 = January
02 = February
03 = March
04 = April
05 = May
06 = June
07 = July
08 = August
09 = September
10 = October
11 = November
12 = December
For example, if this companys first fiscal month is July, type in 07.
If you previously answered this question, your last response appears as the default.
If Financial Analysis is installed, be sure to review Changing fiscal years in Section
7 of the Forecasting Users Guide before you change your response.
Note:
The 13-period accounting year always starts with period 1.
G09
WHAT IS THE FIRST FISCAL MONTH PERIOD FOR WHICH GENERAL

JOURNAL TRANSACTIONS WILL BE PROCESSED?
LOW-1 HILIM-13 OR 12 DFLT-1
The answer to this question tells the computer in which fiscal period or month you
want the General Ledger application to begin processing general journal
transactions.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-67
General Ledger
Answer with period 01-13 for period accounting or the fixed number associated with
the month.
01 = January
02 = February
03 = March
04 = April
05 = May
06 = June
07 = July
08 = August
09 = September
10 = October
11 = November
12 = December
The General Ledger application performs control functions which require a response
to this question. When you load the General Ledger Master file, you enter account
balances for all periods previous to this period, including the previous year amounts.
However, once you enter a batch of journal transactions for this company, you can
change General Ledger amounts only by using journal entries to adjust them.
G10
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD CURRENCY IDS FOR THIS

COMPANY?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to this question to set the Original and the Transaction Currency IDs.
Set the Original and Transaction Currency IDs if the balances in the General Ledger
Master file record types 1-3, Original Balances (current, budget, and last year), are
not in the local currency or will be translated for this company.
G11
ENTER ORIGINAL BALANCES CURRENCY ID (UP TO 3 CHARACTERS)
The answer to this question indicates the currency in which the balances in record
types 1-3, Original Balances (current, budget, and last year), in the General Ledger
Master file are recorded.
Enter the three-character Original Balances Currency ID. If balances are in the local
currency, leave this field blank and press Enter.
Note:
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question G10.
G12
ENTER TRANSLATION CURRENCY ID (UP TO 3 CHARACTERS)
The answer to this question indicates the currency in which balances in the General
Ledger Master file will be translated.
Enter the three-character Translation Currency ID.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-68
General Ledger
If you entered blanks in question G11, the Original Balances Currency ID will equal
the local currency.
If you entered an ID in question G11, the Translation Currency ID will be the same.
The Translation Currency ID represents the from currency, and the local currency is
the to currency.
Note:
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question G10.
G13

DFLT-N
This question tells the computer if you have entered all your companies. When you
answer Y (Yes), the computer returns you to question G06 to enter the next company
number, name, and the information that applies to that company. After you enter all
your companies, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of the
questionnaire.
If your answer is Y (Yes), return to question G06.
If your answer is N (No), continue with question G14.
If you answered N (No) to question X03, question G13 is not asked.
G14
WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF MONTHS OR PERIODS TO BE USED FOR

CHECKING VALID POSTING DATES?
Enter a number that is the maximum number of months or periods you want between
the last calendar month or fiscal period and the current posting date. The answer to
this question determines which months or periods. following the last closed one
(month or period), are valid for posting.
For example, you answer 02 to this question. You last closed the month of August.
Any date in September or October is valid, and a warning message is issued if you
enter any other posting date.
G15

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-69
General Ledger
If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses, answer Y (Yes).
Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.
If you answered N (No) to question X03 and answered Y (Yes) to question G15, the
questionnaire returns to question G05.
If you answered Y (Yes) to questions X03 and G15, the questionnaire returns to
question G06.
If you answered N (No) to question G15, continue with question G16.

G16
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD THE REPORT OPTION FOR

GENERAL LEDGER?
DFLT-Y
If you are installing this application for the first time. answer Y (Yes) to see all of the
options and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, answer
If your answer is N (No), skip to question G18.
G17
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALL GENERAL

LEDGER MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master file record, such as account definition, from the
workstation, the information can be used immediately by other areas of your
application. If you want the application to print a report showing how the information
appeared before and after you changed it, answer Y (Yes).
This report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files.
In case you need to recover master files for which the backup is not current, you can
use this report to identify transactions which you must enter again. To provide an
audit trail, answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first install the application. If you
decide later that the printed report of changes is N (No), no longer necessary in your
company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this question.
print on the File Maintenance Report.
Contents
Index
G18
Exit
Page B-70
General Ledger
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THE RESPONSE CONCERNING THE REPORT

OPTION?
DFLT-N
question G17. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-71

When IFM is installed, it interfaces and shares information with several other MAPICS
XA applications. Your answers to this questionnaire affect how IFM interfaces with
COM, IM, PC&C, PUR, PR, and REP. Information about the interfaces is in the IFM
Users Guide.

501

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
Answering Y (Yes) allows you to see the questions associated with your installed
applications.
Answering N (No) exits the questionnaire.
502
DO YOU WANT TO PASS MAPICS LEDGER TRANSACTIONS TO

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-N
Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing COM, IM, PC&C, and
REP, and PR to pass general ledger transactions to IFM.
Answering Y allows you to set up the GLI account rules and rule priorities and to
simulate account assignments using the IFM unit/nature format without actually
passing transactions to IFM. This means that units and natures appear on the GLI
displays instead of account numbers. However, you still use existing account
number rules and rule priorities, if present, to assign and edit accounts and create
ledger transactions.
Note: The COM assign and edit accounts and create ledger entries menu options
are disabled when IFM is installed and interfacing because their functions occur
during COM invoicing.
To have the interfacing applications begin assigning and editing accounts and
passing ledger transactions to IFM in the unit and nature format, you must activate
the interfaces between IFM and these applications using Cross Application Support.
See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces option in the Maintenance/Change chapter
of the CAS Users Guide.
Answering N (No) to this question does the following:
Allows COM, IM, PC&C, and REP to continue assigning and editing accounts
and generating transactions using existing account number rules and rule
priorities, if present
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-72
Allows PR to continue generating transactions using existing account numbers, if

present
For more information, see IFM and the GLI applications in the IFM Users Guide.
503
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MAPICS PURCHASING?

DFLT-N
This question appears only if Purchasing (PUR) is installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing IFM to perform the PUR
payables processing (invoicing) functions. You must then activate the interface
between IFM and PUR using Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate
Interfaces option in the Maintenance/Change chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Answering N (No) to this question allows you to perform PUR file maintenance using
the IFM format. You can set up your vendors, vendor/items, and terms for use with
IFM but you cannot use IFM for invoicing.
For more information, see the Using IFM with the other MAPICS XA applications
topic in the IFM Users Guide.
504
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH MAPICS CUSTOMER ORDER

MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-N
This question appears only if Customer Order Management (COM) is installed.

Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step in allowing IFM to work with the
COM invoicing and credit checking functions. You must then activate the interface
between IFM and COM using Cross Application Support. See the Activate/
Deactivate Interfaces option in the Maintenance/Change chapter of the CAS Users
Guide.
Answering N (No) to this question allows you to perform COM file maintenance and
terms calculations using the IFM format but you cannot use IFM with COM invoicing
and credit checking.
For more information, see the Using IFM with the other MAPICS XA applications
topic in the IFM Users Guide.
Contents
Index
505
Exit
Page B-73

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the IFM questionnaire.

question 502. Answer N (No) to exit the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-74
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-75
I01

INVENTORY?
DFLT-Y
If you are installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all options
and enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you can
answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question I35.
I02
DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS TRANSACTIONS IN BATCH MODE?

DFLT- Y
If you want transactions to update the master files in batch mode, answer Y (Yes) to
this question.
If you want transactions to immediately update the master files, answer N (No).
For more details, see the Transaction Processing chapter in the Inventory
Management Users Guide.
I03
DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING SUPPORT FOR PURCHASE ORDERS

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to release purchase orders and process purchase receipt
transactions. Y (Yes) is required if you are installing the MRP, PC&C, or PUR
applications. If you answer N (No), you cannot release purchase orders or process
purchase receipt transactions, and no report or display shows purchase on-order
information.
Questions I45 and I48 are skipped if you answer N (No).
You must manually remove the Purchase Order Item Detail file (POITEM) from the
disk, using the RMVM command, if all of the following conditions are met:
Contents
Index
Page B-76
Exit
PUR is not installed and interfacing.

MRP is not installed and interfacing.
Warning: Under no other circumstances should you remove the Purchase Order
Item Detail file from the disk.
I04
DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING SUPPORT FOR MANUFACTURING

ORDERS?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to be able to release manufacturing orders and track
issues to and receipts from those orders. Y (Yes) is required if you are installing the
PC&C, MRP, or REP applications.
If you answer N (No), you cannot release manufacturing orders, allocate inventory to
manufacturing orders, or process manufacturing receipts and issue transactions,
and no report or display shows any manufacturing on-order allocation information.
Questions I08, I09, I10, I11, I12, I45, I48, I49, and I61 are skipped if you answer N
(No).
You must manually remove the Manufacturing Order Master (MOMAST) file from the

MRP is not installed and interfacing.
REP is not installed and interfacing.
You must manually remove the Manufacturing Order Detail (MODATA) file from the

You previously answered Y (Yes) to question I03 or I04.
You are now answering N (No) to both questions I03 and I04.
COM is not installed and interfacing.
REP is not installed and interfacing.
The Manufacturing Order Master and Manufacturing Order Detail files must not be
removed from the disk unless all of the conditions listed for the file are met.
I05
WHAT TYPE OF LIFO/FIFO SUPPORT DO YOU WANT?

Answer with one of the following codes:

Code
0
1
2
3
MEANING
NONE
LIFO
FIFO
BOTH
Contents
Index
Page B-77
Exit
See Period Closing Activity (LIFO/FIFO valuations) chapter in the Inventory

Management Users Guide for detailed information on LIFO/FIFO support. Questions
I57 and I58 are skipped if you accept the 0 (NONE) default.
If this application is already installed and you are changing your response from 1, 2,
or 3 to 0, you must manually remove the LIFO/FIFO Transaction Save (LIFITR) file
from the disk using the DELETE command. A LIFO/FIFO transaction file is not
created if your answer is 0 (NONE). If your answer is 1, 2, or 3, the file is created.
I06
WHAT COSTING METHOD DO YOU WANT FOR INVENTORY

ACCOUNTING?

Code
1
2
3
MEANING
STANDARD
AVERAGE
LAST
See Item costing in Chapter 2 of the Inventory Management Users Guide for more
information.
I07
DO YOU WANT PHYSICAL INVENTORY/CYCLE COUNT SUPPORT?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the cycle counting function as described in the
Physical Inventory chapter of the Inventory Management Users Guide.
If you answer Y (Yes), you must also answer questions I59 and I60.
I08
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR THE MATERIAL DETAIL

LIST?
1=COMPONENT
2=WH/LOCATION/COMPONENT
3=USER SEQUENCE/COMPONENT

Code
1
2
3
MEANING
COMPONENT
WAREHOUSE/LOCATION/COMPONENT
USER SEQUENCE/COMPONENT
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-78
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. See the
Managing Inventory Management, Order Release and Closeout, and Report
descriptions chapters in the Inventory Management Users Guide for additional
information.
I09
DO YOU WANT A SEPARATE WAREHOUSE PICKING LIST?

DFLT- Y
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04.

The warehouse picking list is a shop packet function. If you want a separate picking
list to be printed in warehouse stocking location sequence, answer Y (Yes). The
separate warehouse picking list is printed before the shop packet worksheets.
If you do not want a separate warehouse picking list, answer N (No).
See the Managing Inventory Management, Order Release and Closeout, and
Report descriptions chapters in the Inventory Management Users Guide for
additional information.
I10
DO YOU WANT THE SEPARATE WAREHOUSE PICKING LIST

CONSOLIDATED FOR BULK PICK?
DFLT- Y
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions I04 and I09.
If you want the warehouse picking list consolidated by item for all orders being
released, answer Y (Yes). If you want a separate picking list for each order, answer N
(No).
I11
WHICH ORDER RELEASE SHORTAGE REPORTS DO YOU WANT TO PRINT

DURING BATCH RELEASE OF MANUFACTURING ORDERS?
Contents
Index
Page B-79
Exit

Code
1
2
3
4
MEANING
SHORTAGE BY ITEM
SHORTAGE BY ORDER
BOTH
NONE

I12
DO YOU WANT PAGE OVERFLOW WHEN PRINTING COMPONENT

EXPLOSIONS?
DFLT- N

If printing of component explosion is requested, answering Y (Yes) causes each new
order to begin on a new page. Answering N (No) causes more than one order to be
printed per page.
I13
DO YOU WANT THE COMPONENTS OF A PHANTOM ITEM TO USE THEIR

OWN OPERATION WHERE FIRST USED?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the component items of the phantom (created during
order release) to use their own operation where first used.
For example, if you have a phantom item at operation 20, your component items will
have the operation sequence that you defined for the component in the PSTRUC file.
Answer N (No) to make the components of the phantom item adopt the operation
where first used of the phantom item. If the component of a phantom item is another
phantom item, the components for the second phantom item will adopt the operation
where first used of the first level phantom item.
For example, if you have a phantom item at operation sequence of 20, your
component items of that phantom will all have operation sequence of 20.
I14
SHOULD THE SYSTEM ALLOW A NEGATIVE LOCATION QUANTITY?

1- ONCE 2- NEVER 3- ALWAYS
LOW- 1 HILIM- 3
DFLT- 1
Contents
Index
Page B-80
Exit

Code
MEANING
ALLOW THE LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVE

BALANCE, BUT ONCE NEGATIVE, DO NOT ALLOW THE QUANTITY
TO BECOME MORE NEGATIVE.
NEVER ALLOW A LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVE

BALANCE THERE IS ONE EXCEPTION TO THIS RULE. IF AN ITEM
DEFINED AS INSPECT-ON-RECEIPT IS RECEIVED WITH A
NEGATIVE QUANTITY, IT IS ALLOWED. THIS IS NECESSARY IN
ORDER TO CORRECT AN ERROR DURING THE QC (QUALITY
CONTROL) OF THE ITEM. THERE IS NO OTHER WAY TO REVERSE
A QC TRANSACTION.
ALLOW THE LOCATION QUANTITY TO HAVE A NEGATIVE

BALANCE, AND ONCE NEGATIVE, ISSUE A WARNING MESSAGE
IF AN ATTEMPT IS MADE TO MAKE IT MORE NEGATIVE. THIS WILL
ALLOW THE QUANTITY TO BE MADE MORE NEGATIVE.
I15
DO YOU WANT QUALITY CONTROL?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to control shelf life on any items stocked in a controlled
warehouse.
If the answer to this question is Y (Yes), then I16 and I18 default to Y (Yes), and the
questionnaire skips to question I17 and then to question I19.
I16
DO YOU WANT BATCH/LOT CONTROL?

DFLT- Y
If you answer Y (Yes), batch/lot numbers are validated during transaction processing
in this application, Purchasing, and Customer Order Management if installed and
interfacing. This applies to items stocked in controlled warehouses only. If you
answer Y (Yes), I18 defaults to Y (Yes) and the questionnaire skips to I19.
If you answer N (No), batch/lot numbers can still be entered; however, they are not
validated.
I17
WILL YOU BE USING DEFAULT LOCATION SUPPORT FOR CONTROLLED

WAREHOUSES?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want transaction entry to issue stock or receive stock into the
default location which is kept in the ITEMBL file.
Contents
Index
I18
Exit
Page B-81
DO YOU WANT TO KEEP A HISTORY OF TRANSACTIONS FOR INVENTORY

MANAGEMENT?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to look at past inventory transactions in detail.

A transaction history file is updated by the system and contains all transactions in the
sequence that they were posted. You can review transaction history on inquiry
displays or on reports. You can choose from a number of sequence and format
options for the inquiries and reports. You can also save transactions that you purge
from the system and restore them temporarily for review.
Answer N (No) if you do not want to maintain a transaction history file for reviewing
past inventory transactions.
You must answer Y (Yes) if you want to use the Invoice To Receipt Matching function
in IFM.
119
DO YOU WANT TO USE GOODS RECEIVED NOTES?

DFLT- N
If you answer Y (Yes), all menu options referring to the Goods Received Notes will be
available for controlled warehouses.
If you answer N (No), any reference to Goods Received Notes will not function. If you
are installing the application for the first time, the Goods Received Notes Master file
is not created if your answer is N (No). If you answer N (No) after initially answering Y
(Yes), the file is ignored. You may delete it if you want to.
Note: This question only controls the non-IFM use of the GRN function. If you plan
to use the GRN field in conjunction with the IFM Invoice to Receipt Matching function,
you should answer N (No).
I20
DO YOU WANT FIFO DATE INTEGRITY?

DFLT- N
If you answer Y (Yes), you must include a date for every transaction entered during
Inventory Management transaction processing. This function applies to all controlled
warehouses in IM.
Note: Refer to FIFO date control in chapter 2 of the Inventory Management
Users Guide for additional information on this option.
Contents
Index
I21
Exit
Page B-82
DO YOU WANT A WORK IN PROCESS STORE AREA?

DFLT- Y
If you answer Y (Yes), any reference to the Bulk Store Area 01 for each controlled
warehouse will name it Work in Process (WIP).
If you answer N (No), the Bulk Store Area 01 will be referred to as ST01.
I22
DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT TO BE THE FIRST AVAILABLE LOCATION

FOR IOR OR BATCH/LOT ITEMS?
DFLT- N
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I21.

Answer Y (Yes) if you want the program to search for the first available approved
stock location for Inspect on Receipt (IOR) or Batch/Lot items.
Answering N (No) causes display AMI3D14L to appear and allows you to type in the
stocking location of your choice for the IOR or Batch/Lot items.
Note: Normally IOR and Batch/Lot items are not allowed in a WIP (ST01) location.
If you use a WIP location, this message appears: WIP LOCATION IS EMPTY OR
NEGATIVE.
I23
DO YOU WANT ALPHABETIC OR NUMERIC SUBDIVISIONS?

A = ALPHABETIC N = NUMERIC
DFLT- N
Answering A allows you to establish location subdivisions from A to E only.

Answering N allows subdivision from 1 to 5 only.
The default appears on the last line of the prompt.
Note: Changing the answer to this question after assigning stock to these locations
causes unpredictable results throughout the application. Move your stock out of all
subdivisions before changing your answer.
I24

INVENTORY MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT- Y
To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes). Then when you add or change master file
records (such as item number or description) from the workstation, the information is
immediately available for use by other areas of your application. You may find it
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-83
useful to be able to print a report reflecting how the file records appeared both
before and after any changes. If, at a later date, you decide the report of changes is
not needed, rerun the questionnaire and change the answer to N (No).
Note: If you answer N (No) to this question, neither the before nor the after lines are
printed on maintenance edit lists.
For more information about the following interface questions, refer to How information flows between IM and other
applications in Chapter 1 of the Inventory Management Users Guide.
You will be prompted to answer questions I25 through I29 only if the associated application is not currently installed
and interfacing.
I25
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTION CONTROL AND

COSTING?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the PC&C application is being installed at this time.
Inventory Management and Production Control and Costing. After answering Y (Yes)
to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support.
I26
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is being installed at this time.
Inventory Management and Customer Order Management. After answering Y (Yes)
Note: When Inventory Management and Customer Order Management are not
installed together, the Manufacturing Order Detail file must be reorganized
immediately after the interface is activated to ensure proper processing of data.
I27

PLANNING?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is being installed at this time.
Inventory Management and Material Requirements Planning. After answering Y (Yes)
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-84
I28
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the PDM application is being installed at this time.
Inventory Management and Product Data Management. After answering Y (Yes) to
this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See
the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Note: If you have activated EPDM or if you activate it a later time, PDM will be
unavailable. IM then will access EPDM files (BOM, Routings, Facility Master). Once
EPDM has been activated, you cannot go back to using the PDM file set. Attempting
to do so will result in corrupted data and unpredictable results, because the PDM file
set is not maintained after EPDM is activated.
I29
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?

DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the Accounts Payable application is being installed at this
time.
Inventory Management and Accounts Payable. After answering Y (Yes) to this
question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the
Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Note: When interfacing Inventory Management with Accounts Payable, you must
provide at least one Transaction Entry Batch to be used by Accounts Payable when
outputting transactions to Inventory Management.
I30

DFLT- N
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-85
I31
DO YOU WANT TO KEEP HISTORY FOR MANUFACTURING ORDERS?

DFLT- N
If you answer Y (Yes), manufacturing orders are saved to the manufacturing order
history files.
If you answer N (No), history for manufacturing orders is not saved.
I32
DO YOU WANT THE TRANSACTION AMOUNT TO BE CALCULATED FOR

THE RP TRANSACTION?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you dont enter the transaction amount and you want the RP and
PQ transaction amounts (last cost and average cost) calculated. If you leave the
transaction amount blank and this question is answered No, then no variance will be
calculated for the receipt transaction. If this question is answered No, the PO amount
is not used. So even if the PO unit price was overridden, this system will not
recognize the amount.
This question appears only if Purchasing is installed and interfacing.
I33
DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE AVERAGE AND LAST COSTS WHEN

RECEIVING A MANUFACTURING ORDER OR SCHEDULE COMPLETE?
DFLT- N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the average and last cost to be calculated when a last
transaction manufacturing receipt is entered.
See Item costing in Chapter 2 of the Inventory Management Users Guide for more
information.
Contents
Index
I34
Exit
Page B-86

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT- Y
If you have made an error or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes)
to return to question I02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
constants options.

I35

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
I36
WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF ACTIVE BUSINESS DAYS THIS YEAR?

DFLT- 250
This value is used in the order point calculation.

See Order point in the Managing Inventory Management chapter of the Inventory
Management Users Guide for additional information.
I37
WHAT IS THE CARRYING COST PERCENT FACTOR?

DFLT- 20
This value is the default for the item master carrying rate and is used in the economic
order quantity calculation.
See Economic order quantity in the Managing Inventory Management chapter of
the Inventory Management Users Guide.
Contents
Index
I38
Exit
Page B-87
WHAT IS THE COST DEVIATION PERCENT ALLOWED ON THE RECEIPT OF

AN ITEM?
DFLT- 10.0
This value is used to print a warning message on the Transaction Register if the cost
of a receipt deviates significantly from the unit cost. This field has one decimal place.
For example, if 20 is entered, 2.0 percent is used. You do not need to type the
decimal point.
I39
WHAT IS THE ESTIMATED COST OF PLACING AN ORDER FOR AN ITEM?

DFLT- 10.00
This value is used in the economic order quantity calculation. See Economic order
quantity in the Managing Inventory Management chapter of the Inventory
Management Users Guide. This field has two decimal places.
I40
WHAT IS THE REORDER TOLERANCE PERCENT?

DFLT- .000
This value is used to determine if an items available quantity is near enough to the
reorder point to cause it to be printed on the reorder report. This field is three
positions long and has three decimal places.
I41
WHAT IS YOUR INVENTORY AVERAGING FACTOR?

DFLT- .25
This value is used in averaging calculations. See Alpha factor/averaging

calculations in the Managing Inventory Management chapter of the Inventory
I42
ENTER YOUR COMPANYS NAME (UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)
This entry is used in the headings on your reports. The default company name
appears on the last line of the prompt. The first time you answer this question, the
default is blank. After that, the company name that you previously typed in for the
particular company appears as the default.
Contents
Index
I43
Page B-88
Exit

INVENTORY SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT- Y
If you have made an error or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes)
to return to question I36. If your answer is N (No), continue with the next question.

The next group of questions asks for default values for report option displays. These
values can be changed each time you run a report. See the Report descriptions
chapter of the Inventory Management Users Guide for information on reports.
I44
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR INVENTORY

MANAGEMENT?
DFLT- Y
If your answer is N (No), this question completes the questionnaire for this
application.
I45
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PURCHASE ORDER STATUS

REPORTS?
Answer with one of the following codes for the print sequence you want:
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEANING
DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
PLANNER/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
ITEM/WAREHOUSE/ORDER
PLANNER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE/ORDER
VENDOR/ORDER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
VENDOR/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
PLANNER/VENDOR/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
ORDER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I03. This response
can be overridden on the options display when the program is run.
Contents
Index
I46
Page B-89
Exit
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR MANUFACTURING ORDER

STATUS REPORTS?
LOW- 1 HILIM-6 DFLT- 1
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
MEANING
DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
PLANNER/DUE DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
ITEM/WAREHOUSE/DUE DATE
PLANNER/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
START DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
PLANNER/START DATE/ITEM/WAREHOUSE
I47
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PURCHASING AND

MANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?
Code
1
2
3
4
MEANING
DUE DATE
PLANNER/DUE DATE
ITEM
PLANNER/ITEM
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions I03 or I04. This
response can be overridden on the options display when the program is run.
I48
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM DESCRIPTION AND REFERENCE

NUMBERS ON PURCHASE ORDER STATUS REPORTS?
DFLT- Y
Contents
Index
Page B-90
Exit
I49
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM DESCRIPTION AND QUANTITY

BREAKDOWN ON MANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?
DFLT- Y
I50
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT EXPLOSION ON

MANUFACTURING ORDER STATUS REPORTS?
DFLT- Y
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. Answering Y
(Yes) causes the printing of component detail in addition to manufacturing order
summary information.
This response can be overridden on the options display when the program is run.
I51
WHICH SECONDARY CALCULATION DO YOU WANT ON THE ABC

ANALYSIS REPORTS?

Code
1
2
MEANING
COST X ON-HAND QUANTITY
PRICE X ESTIMATED ANNUAL USAGE
I52
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ITEM DESCRIPTION ON REORDER REPORTS?

DFLT- Y
Answer Y (Yes) or N (No). This response can be overridden on the options display
when the program is run.
Contents
Index
I53
Page B-91
Exit
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR FINANCIAL STOCK

ANALYSIS REPORTS?
LOW- 1 HILIM-6 DFLT- 1
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
MEANING
ITEM NUMBER
VENDOR
DATE OF LAST USE
PROFIT AMOUNT
PROFIT PERCENT
ON-HAND COST
I54
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR STOCK MOVEMENT

ANALYSIS REPORTS?
Code
1
2
3
MEANING
ITEM NUMBER
VENDOR
DATE OF LAST USE
I55
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR REORDER REPORTS?

Code
1
2
3
MEANING
WAREHOUSE
VENDOR
ITEM
Contents
Index
I56
Page B-92
Exit
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR STOCK STATUS REVIEW

REPORTS?
Code
1
2
3
MEANING
ITEM
CLASS
VENDOR
I57
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR PERIOD-END/YEAR-END

CLOSE STOCK STATUS REPORTS?
Code
1
2
MEANING
ITEM
CLASS
I58
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR LIFO/FIFO REPORTS?

Code
1
2
3
4
MEANING
WAREHOUSE
ITEM
ITEM TYPE
ITEM CLASS
Note:
If you answered 0 to question I05, this question is skipped.
Contents
Index
I59
Page B-93
Exit
WHICH UNIT COST DO YOU WANT TO USE WHEN CALCULATING ONHAND COST FOR LIFO/FIFO INVENTORY VALUATION REPORTS?
Answer with one of the following codes for the unit cost you want to use:
Code
1
2
3
MEANING
STANDARD
AVERAGE
LAST
Note:
If you answered 0 to question I05, this question is skipped.
I60
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR THE TOTAL PHYSICAL/

CYCLE COUNT LIST?
Code
1
2
3
MEANING
ITEM
WAREHOUSE
STOCK LOCATION

Note:
If you answered N (No) to question I07, this question is skipped.
I61
DO YOU WANT THE QUANTITY ON-HAND TO PRINT ON THE TOTAL

PHYSICAL/CYCLE COUNT LIST?
DFLT- Y

Answer Y (Yes) or N (No). This response can be overridden on the options display
when the program is run.
Note:
If you answered N (No) to question I07, this question is skipped.
Contents
Index
I62
Page B-94
Exit
WHAT DEFAULT OPTION DO YOU WANT FOR MANUFACTURING ORDER

RELEASE PER CUSTOMER ORDER?
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to question I04. Answer with one
of the following codes:
Code
1
2
MEANING
ONLY ITEMS WITH S-NUMBERS
ALL ITEMS ON CUSTOMERS ORDERS
If you are not installing PDM, answer with code 2. This response can be overridden
on the options display when the program is run.
I63

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT- Y
If you made a mistake or want to change one of your responses in the Define report
options section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question I45.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-95

MPA application dependencies
For MPA to be installed, Inventory Management must be installed. In addition, the
following measurements require other MAPICS XA applications to be functional:
Measurement
Required Application
Customer Order Booking Performance (MPM 1)
Customer Order Backlog Analysis (MPM 2)
Shipping Performance (MPM 4)
Bill of Material Accuracy Performance (MPM 7)
Queue Performance (MPM 12)
Production Control & Costing
Output Performance (MPM 13)
Production Control & Costing
Some measurements optionally use data from Material Requirements Planning if it is

installed and interfacing with MPA:
Master Schedule Performance (MPM 3)

Inventory Performance Profile (MPM 5)
Inventory Turnover Trend (MPM 14)
Excess Inventory Analysis (MPM 15).
Before you answer your MPA questionnaire, review the answers to the following
questions in Customer Order Management and Inventory Management to ensure
that all of your Manufacturing Performance Measurements are selectable.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-96

Answer YES to the tailoring question, Do you want booking records placed in the
Monthly Activity File. The following measurement is dependent on this question:
Customer Order Booking Performance (MPM 1)
Production Monitoring & Control

Answer YES to the tailoring question, Do you want to interface with Inventory
Management. The interface must be activated before transaction receipts for
manufacturing and purchase orders will be passed to MPA.
Answer YES to the tailoring question, Do you want order tracking support for
Purchasing Orders. The following measurements are dependent on this question:
Purchase Commitment Performance (MPM 8)
Order Reschedule Reliability (MPM 9).
Answer YES to the tailoring question, Do you want order tracking support for
Manufacturing Orders. The following measurements are dependent on this
question.
Master Schedule Performance (MPM 3)

Bill of Materials Record Accuracy (MPM 7)
Order Reschedule Reliability (MPM 9)
Order Release Reliability (MPM 10)
Material Availability Reliability (MPM 11).
Note: If you retailor the tracking for purchase orders or manufacturing orders from
NO to YES in IM, you must answer your MPA questionnaire again.
Purchasing
Purchasing always sets the IM question for purchase order tracking to YES. If you
install Purchasing after MPA, and IM did not have purchase order tracking, you must
answer your MPA questionnaire again.
Preinstallation
Before installing MPA, review the Functional Description and Implementation
sections of the Users Guide. After you load the MPA application, answer this tailoring
questionnaire to activate the appropriate application interfaces for your MAPICS XA
environment.
After you install the program and tailor the application, review and maintain each
measurement using the Measurement Master Maintenance option from the File
Maintenance menu (AM7M30). The Implementing and using section of the Users
Guide describes the Measurement Master Maintenance options available and the
implementation steps you should follow when you install MPA.
Contents
Index
Page B-97
Exit
Use the following table to define your defaults.
1Booking
2Backlog
3MSP
4Shipping
5Inventory
Performance
6Inventory Record
7BOM
8POs
9Order reschedule
10Order release
11Material availability
12Queue
13Output
14Inventory Turnover
15Excess Inventory
Notes:
1 (Booking), 2 (Backlog), and 4 (Shipping) should be the same frequency.
3 (MSP) should be a frequency equal to changes to your master production schedule.
5 (Inv perf) and 14 (Inv turn) should be the same.
6 (Inv record) should correspond to your cycle counting frequency.
7 (BOM), 12 (Queue), and 13 (Output) depend on order closeout and purge in IM and PCC
9 (Order reschedule), 10 (Order release), and 11 (Material avail) correspond to MRP regeneration or re-plan
inventories.
Excess period lengths
Include customer reqs in availability calculations
# of periods to determine availability
Include schedule receipts
Use req/planned orders in MRP
Cost calculation method
Default date for past due R/M
# of forecast periods (history + forecast = 26)
# of history periods
Unit basis
Dollar basis
High target value
MPM
Low target value
Measurement Master defaults
Frequency
Table B-1.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-98

701

MANUFACTURING PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.
Note: Questions 702 through 705 are shown only if the associated applications are
not currently installed and interfacing.
702

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is being installed at this time.
Manufacturing Performance Analysis and Customer Order Management. After you
answer Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross
Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces section of the CAS
Users Guide.
703

COSTING?
DFLT-N
Manufacturing Performance Analysis and Production Control and Costing. After
answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross
Users Guide.
Contents
Index
704
Exit
Page B-99

PLANNING?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is being installed at this time.
Manufacturing Performance Analysis and Material Requirements Planning. After
Users Guide.
705

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the Define functional
options section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 702.
Contents
Index
Page B-100
Exit
Define constant options

706
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANTS INFORMATION

FOR MANUFACTURING PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.
If your answer is N (No), you have completed the Manufacturing Performance
Analysis portion of the questionnaire.
707
HOW DO YOU WANT TO SPECIFY YOUR MODEL CODE DEFAULT IN THE

ITEM MEASUREMENT FILE?
Use one of the following codes to select your default:

1
THERE IS NO RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MODEL CODE AND

THE ITEM CLASS IN ITEM MASTER. YOU MUST ENTER ALL YOUR
MODEL CODES IN ITEM MEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.
WHEN THE MODEL CODE IS BLANK, THE ITEM CLASS FROM

ITEM MASTER WILL BE USED AS A DEFAULT. IF YOU DO NOT
WANT THE ITEM CLASS TO BE USED AS A DEFAULT FOR AN
ITEM, YOU MUST ENTER A MODEL CODE FOR THAT ITEM IN THE
ITEM MEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.
THEMODEL CODE WILL ALWAYS EQUAL THE ITEM CLASS. THE

MODEL CODE FIELD CANNOT BE ENTERED IN ITEM
MEASUREMENT MAINTENANCE.
Note: Your default should be carefully considered. If you change your value from 1
or 2 to a 3, all of the Model Codes in the Item Measurement file will be changed to the
Item Class.
708

SYSTEM CONSTANTS INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define constant options section of the questionnaire.
If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the Define constant options
section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 707.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-101

L01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR MASTER

PRODUCTION SCHEDULE PLANNING?
DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question L07.
L02

DFLT-
Answer Y (Yes) for MPSP to use customer order data from COM. MPSP uses
customer orders extensively. For example, MPSP blends customer orders with
forecasts to determine an items independent demand for master schedule
generation. MPSP also uses customer orders during aggregation of production
families to determine a familys total demand. Many displays and reports also show
the current information about customer orders.
Master Production Schedule Planning and Customer Order Management. After
Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate interfaces chapter of the CAS
Users Guide.
Answer N (No) if you do not want MPSP to use customer order data from COM.
However, if the Demand Interface file (DMDIFF) exists, MPSP looks into that file for
any customer order data. See the Creating and using the Demand Interface file
appendix in the MPSP Users Guide for more information about the DMDIFF file.
L03

PLANNING?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to get the master scheduled orders into MRPs planning run. Then
you can also release master scheduled orders through MRPs order release function
and update MPSP with order release information from MRP.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-102
If you do not want to plan master scheduled orders in MRP and release them through
MRPs order release function, answer N (No). MRP runs as if MPSP is not installed.
Master Production Schedule Planning and Material Requirements Planning. After
Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate interfaces chapter of the CAS
Users Guide.
L04
DO YOU WANT TO SEE YOUR FAMILY OPERATING PLAN INFORMATION IN

COSTS OR IN UNITS?
1-COSTS 2-UNITS
Enter 1 to review production planning data for production families in terms of costs.
Enter 2 to review production planning data for production families in terms of units.
Your answer to this question sets up defaults for how production planning information
appears. You can change this default at runtime.
L05
WHAT COSTS DO YOU WANT TO USE FOR CALCULATING FAMILY PLAN

INQUIRIES?
1-BASE PLAN COSTS 2-OPERATING PLAN COSTS
Enter 1 to calculate family plan inquiries using the costs in effect when you
established your base plans.
Enter 2 to calculate family plan inquiries using the costs in effect when you
established your current family operating plan.
Your answer to this question sets up defaults for how cost information appears on the
family plan inquiries. You can change this default at runtime.
L06

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question L02. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-103

L07
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR MPSP?

DFLT-Y
Answer N (No) to complete the questionnaire.
L08

RESOURCE MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
If you answer Y (Yes), the Resource Master File Maintenance Edit List (AML599)
prints after each Resource Master file maintenance session.
To provide an audit trail, you should answer Y (Yes) to this question when you first
install the application. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no
longer necessary in your company, rerun the questionnaire and answer N (No) to this
question.
are printed.
L09
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT DAILY RATES ON THE FAMILY OPERATING PLAN

REPORT?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to print daily rates for all family operating plans and their
item production plans (if included) on the Family Operating Plan Report. Your answer
to this question sets defaults vfor printing this report. You can override the default at
runtime.
L10
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ITEM PRODUCTION PLANS FOR EACH

FAMILY INCLUDED IN THE FAMILY OPERATING PLAN REPORT?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to print the item production plans for each family included
in the Family Operating Plan Report. Answer N (No) if you do not want to print the
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-104
item production plans. Your answer to this question sets defaults for printing this
report. You can override the default at runtime.
L11

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question L07. Answer N (No) to complete the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-105

M01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR MATERIAL

REQUIREMENTS PLANNING?
DFLT-Y
M02
DO YOU WANT TO USE NET CHANGE PLANNING?

DFLT-Y
If you will be running only Generation Runs and no Net Change Planning Runs,
answer N (No) to this question because product structure maintenance performance
will be significantly improved.
If Customer Order Management is not installed, skip question M03.
M03
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH THE CUSTOMER ORDER

MANAGEMENT APPLICATION?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to include customer backlog information in your inquiries and on your
reports. Otherwise, answer N (No).
Material Requirements Planning and Customer Order Management. After answering
Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application
Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Note: This interface must be activated before you can receive customer backlog
information from COM.
M04
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH THE INVENTORY APPLICATION?

DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-106
Answer Y (Yes) to be able to release orders from MRP (planning system) to Inventory
Management (execution system). If you answer N (No), you cannot release orders
from MRP to IM.
Material Requirements Planning and Inventory Management. After answering Y (Yes)
Note:
This interface must be activated before you can release orders to IM.
M05

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question M02. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-107
Payroll
Payroll
If you need to assign new account numbers for your Chart of Accounts, see
Assigning general ledger account numbers appendix in the Payroll Users Guide.
If IFM is installed, Payroll accounts are in the IFM unit/nature account format rather
than the GL account number format. For information on setting up the Payroll unit/
nature defaults, see the Work with Financial Divisions option in the International
Financial Management Users Guide.

P01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR PAYROLL?

DFLT-Y
When you first install Payroll, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enter
essential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),
depending on what you want to change. If you answer N (No), skip to question P26.
P02
DO YOU WANT TO USE ORDER DISTRIBUTION INFORMATION?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to this question if you plan to install or have already installed
Production Control and Costing (PC&C). The Payroll application generates an Order
Distribution register. If you install PC&C, the Payroll application automatically
generates input transactions to PC&C. Enter the following for each transaction you
want to pass to PC&C:
Order number
Job operation
Sequence number
Run code
Completion code
If you want information to be passed to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) to the Payroll interface
question in PC&C.
Answer N (No) and the system does not prompt for these fields. The information
does not appear on reports.
P03

DFLT-N
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-108
Payroll
Answer Y (Yes) if you plan to install or have already installed the General Ledger
application. Perform the following tasks while you establish the master files used in
Payroll:
Associate account numbers for each of the department/production facility
combinations established in the Labor Distribution file. These accounts are the
expense accounts against which the gross payroll is to be debited.
Associate account numbers with each of the following deductions when you
establish the Deduction Distribution file:
-
Miscellaneous
Directed
State
County
Local
Union
SUI
SDI
Other compensation/payments
These accounts generate the majority of the credit entries for each payroll run.
Establish the rest of the accounts to be credited later in this questionnaire.
Even if you have not installed nor plan to install the General Ledger application, you
can still take advantage of this feature. Enter your chart of accounts into the General
Ledger master file so the system can edit the account numbers. The system
generates all transactions for your general ledger and combines them by account
number at the end of the month. You can manually capture the transaction amount
for your books. Continue to question P04.
This is the first step in providing the interface between Payroll and General Ledger.
You must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/
Deactivate Interfaces section of the CAS Users Guide for more information.
If Payroll is already installed and you want to change your response, clear all entries
from the Temporary General Ledger file. Answer the questionnaire again. Manually
remove members from the General Ledger master and Temporary General Ledger
files if other applications that interface to General Ledger are not installed.
Answer N (No) so the system will not generate transactions for your general ledger.
Use manually prepared journal entries to apply the payroll transactions to your
general ledger. Questions P04, P05, P33 through P41, and P46 do not appear if you
answer N (No).
P04
DO YOU WANT TO DISTRIBUTE PAYROLL EXPENSES TO GENERAL

LEDGER BY ORDER NUMBER?
DFLT-N
Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions P02 and P03.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-109
Payroll
Answer Y (Yes) to debit the payroll expense accounts by order number within
department/production facility. If you answer Y (Yes), the manufacturing order
number is included in the General Ledger entry.
Answer N (No) to distribute payroll expenses by department/production facility only.
P05
WILL YOU BE USING A CASH ACCOUNTING METHOD?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to manually prepare and post accrual entries at the end of the month.
Question P36 does not appear.
Answer N (No) to let the system make the accrual entries for the end of the month.
Enter the accrual period during data entry. The Labor Distribution register prints in a
sequence of accrual period within company. The system writes records to the
General Ledger master file for each accrual period you entered during data entry.
The application may write many more records to the general ledger than if cash
accounting is used.
P06
DO YOU WANT TO ENTER HOURS BY DAY?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to balance time records to attendance or to check each employees

total daily hours, or if you plan to use automatic overtime calculation on a daily basis.
Answer N (No) to group all time for a pay period. You will be unable to distinguish
time entered for a particular day. Question P42 does not appear.
P07
DO YOU WANT TO DO UNION PROCESSING? (DEDUCTIONS AND

REPORTING)
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if any of the following are true:

You calculate union deduction using the same hourly rate or the same
percentage of gross for everyone in the union.
You divide union deduction into several categories, such as pension fund, group
life, benefit fund, and so on.
You need the weekly and monthly reports that show who worked in each union,
how much each employee was paid, and what the deduction amount was for
each category.
Answer N (No) to treat your union deductions as miscellaneous deductions. The
system does not report money deducted from the employees check to the union.
Questions P08 and P35 do not appear.
Contents
Index
Exit
P08
Page B-110
Payroll
DO YOU WANT EMPLOYER PAID UNION FRINGES APPLIED AS INDIRECT

LABOR?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to apply the cost of employer-paid rate-per-hour or percent-of-gross

union fringe benefit expenses to a specific account as indirect labor. Answer N (No)
if you do not have this requirement.
Note: The system applies all employer-paid fixed-amount union fringe benefit
expenses as indirect labor.
P09
DO YOU WANT STATE DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if of the following are true:

You must report earnings of employees who work in more than one state to the
appropriate state.
You withhold a state income tax from each employees wages.
You report state unemployment insurance (SUI).
You report state disability insurance (SDI).
Answer N (No) if you none of these is true. Question P10 does not appear.
P10
DO YOU WANT TO WITHHOLD STATE DISABILITY INSURANCE?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if any state in which your employees work requires a state disability
insurance (SDI) deduction from the employees check.
Answer N (No) if you do not have this requirement.
P11
DO YOU WANT COUNTY DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you withhold a county income tax from each employees wages.
Answer N (No) if you have no county income tax to withhold.
Contents
Index
P12
Exit
Page B-111
Payroll
DO YOU WANT CITY OR LOCAL DISTRIBUTION FOR TAX PURPOSES?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you withhold local or city (municipality) income tax from each
employees wages.
Answer N (No) if you have no local income tax to withhold.
P13
DO YOU WANT TO RECONCILE YOUR PAYROLL CHECKS ON THE

SYSTEM?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) so the system can add a summary of each check you wrote to the
Check Reconciliation file. When you receive your bank statement and canceled
checks each month, you can enter the number of each check that has been cashed
or voided. The system compares the canceled paycheck numbers to the ones in the
file, and prints a listing of non-canceled checks.
Answer N (No) so no operations connected with check reconciliation in Payroll are
active.
P14
DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW EMPLOYEES TO WORK IN COMPANIES OTHER

THAN THEIR HOME COMPANY?
DFLT-N
Appears only if you select multiple-company support.

Answer Y (Yes) to automatically create the intercompany payable and intercompany
receivable accounting transactions when an employee works for a company other
than the one to which he or she is assigned.
Answer N (No) to flag as an error any employees assigned to one company and
claiming time worked for another company. Questions P40 and P41 do not appear.
P15
DO YOU WANT AUTOMATIC OVERTIME CALCULATIONS?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to automatically calculate overtime hours for employees who are paid
weekly or biweekly. Define an overtime parameter record in the Labor Distribution file
for each department in which the system should calculate automatic overtime.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-112
Payroll
See the Automatic overtime calculation appendix in the Payroll Users Guide to
decide if this function applies to your company.
P16
DO YOU WANT TO IMPLEMENT PAYROLL HISTORY?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to capture payroll check and stub information and store it in the
History file.
P17
DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW ELECTRONIC DEPOSIT?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to allow electronic deposit deductions. You can take an electronic
deposit deduction, create prenotes, and format records to NACHA requirements.
Warning: Payroll does not transmit the deposits. See the Electronic deposit
section in the Payroll Users Guide to decide if this function applies to your company.
P25

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
question P02. Answer N (No) to continue.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-113
Payroll

P26

PAYROLL?
DFLT-Y
essential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No),
depending on what you want to change.
Answer N (No) to skip to question P56.
P27
WHAT IS THE CHECK AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THE PAYROLL
SYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT HOURLY EMPLOYEES?
(ZERO ASSUMES NO HIGHLIGHTING)
DFLT-0.00
Enter a reasonable maximum amount that any hourly employee can be paid in one
period. The Payroll register sends a warning message if an hourly employees check
exceeds the value you enter. For example, to specify a maximum check of $250,
enter 25000; the application inserts the decimal point. The system writes the check,
but you have an audit of this exceptional condition. If the Gross Earnings register
program detects an employee with a gross amount above this limit, the system prints
a warning on the register. The system provides early warning of a possible error in
the number of hours or rates. If you do not enter a value, Payroll does not check for a
maximum check amount.
P28
WHAT IS THE CHECK AMOUNT ABOVE WHICH YOU WANT THE PAYROLL
SYSTEM TO HIGHLIGHT SALARIED EMPLOYEES?
(ZERO ASSUMES NO HIGHLIGHTING)
DFLT-0.00
This question is the same as question P27, but relates to salaried employees. When
you establish this maximum, remember that company executives will normally be
included in this category (salaried pay type).
P29
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY COMPANY CONSTANTS

RELATED TO PAYROLL?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-114
Payroll
essential information. If this application is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or
N (No), depending on what you want to change.
Answer N (No) to skip to question P55.
P30

RESPONSES WILL APPLY.
Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question X03.

Enter a number between 1 and 89. The first company number you choose must be 1.
Company numbers should be consistent across all MAPICS XA applications you
install.
If IFM is installed, be sure the companies in PR correspond the financial divisions in
IFM. Company and financial division refer to the same type of unit; PR uses the term
company and IFM uses the term financial division.
P31
Enter a 15-character name for each company number you plan to install. The name
appears as part of the headings on your reports and is associated with the company
number entered in question P30 or company 1 if you answered N (No) to question
X03.
When you first install Payroll, the default is blank. After that, the company name you
have previously typed in for the particular company appears on the last line as the
default company name.
P32
WHAT IS THE LENGTH OF YOUR PAYROLL CHECK FORM?

1 = 7 INCHES 2 = 11 INCHES
Choose the length of the check form you want this company to use. The standard
check form has a 3-1/2-inch stub and a 3-1/2-inch check. The standard stub shows
up to 12 detailed lines of earnings/advances and deductions/benefits. The long form
has a 7-1/2-inch stub over a 3-1/2-inch check. The long stub shows up to 34 detailed
lines.
Contents
Index
P33
Exit
Page B-115
Payroll

DFLT-0
Enter the account number you normally credit as a result of writing a payroll check.
All payroll checks for this company credit this account number with the net amount of
the check. If you have several payroll accounts, enter the account number used most
often; manually transfer the amounts to be credited to the other accounts, using a
journal entry each pay period. The number you enter must be a valid general ledger
account number for this company.
If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), a zero appears on displays,
The system uses the number 9999997 as the default on all reports. Add the general
ledger number (either the number you chose or the default9999997) to the General
Ledger master file.
P34
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FEDERAL

INCOME TAX WITHHELD?
DFLT-0
Enter the liability account established for the income tax payable to the Federal
government. The total amount of FIT deducted during each payroll run is credited to
this account. The number you enter must be a valid account number for this
company.
If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), zero appears on displays. The
system uses the number 9999997 as the default on all reports. Add the general
Ledger master file.
P35
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR EMPLOYERPAID UNION FRINGE BENEFITS EXPENSE?
DFLT-0
Appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question P07.

Enter the expense account debited for any union benefits the employer must pay.
The account to be credited is the one established in the Deduction Distribution
master file for the union. If you answered Y (Yes) to question P08, this account is
used for all employer-paid union fringe benefit expenses. The number you enter must
be a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.
If you answered N (No) to question P08, this account is used for employer-paid fixedamount union fringe benefit expenses only.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-116
Payroll
Ledger master file.
P36
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR ACCRUED

SALARIES AND WAGES?
DFLT-0
Appears only if you answered N (No) to question P05.

Enter the liability account number established for the accrual of wages in a period
other than the period in which the payroll check is printed. The number you enter
must be a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.
Ledger master file.
P37

INTERCOMPANY RECEIVABLES?
DFLT-0

Enter the asset account debited when an employee from this company works in
another company but is paid by his or her home company. The number you enter
must be a valid account number in the general ledger for this company.
Ledger master file.
P38

INTERCOMPANY PAYABLES?
DFLT-0

Enter the account number, corresponding to the account in Question P37, that you
want to credit for the company in which the employee worked (other than his or her
home company). The number you enter must be a valid account number in the
general ledger for this company.
Contents
Index
Page B-117
Payroll
Exit
Ledger master file.
P39
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REGULAR HOURS PER DAY AN

EMPLOYEE SHOULD WORK?
HILIM-24
DFLT-0

Enter a number of regular hours that, if exceeded, you want the system to issue a
warning message. (In most cases, eight is the maximum.) The application prints a
warning message on the Current Hours Proof if, for any one day, more than the
specified maximum appears for the total regular hours for that day. This edit
indicates that some hours should have been put into overtime.
If you enter no value, the application assumes no maximum regular hours per day
and prints no warning messages. If you calculate hours on a premium-hours basis,
consider how often your employees work more than their regular hours before you
decide whether to enter a value.
P40
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF REGULAR HOURS PER PAY CYCLE

AN EMPLOYEE SHOULD WORK?
HILIM-99
DFLT-0
This question is the same as question P39, but for pay cycle instead of day. It
establishes whether the system prints warning messages when a maximum number
of regular hours per pay cycle is exceeded. The system compares the value you
enter to the total regular hours entered for an employee for one pay cycle. The
system prints a warning message on the Current Hours Proof if the maximum is
exceeded. If you have employees paid on several pay schedules, such as weekly,
biweekly, and semimonthly, enter the maximum hours associated with the cycle in
which most employees are paid. For instance, if the largest pay cycle is biweekly,
you should enter 80. In this case, if you also have employees who are paid
semimonthly and monthly, the warning message appears for each one of them
because their normal regular hours exceed the normal biweekly value.
If you enter no value, the system assumes no maximum hours per pay period and
prints no warning messages.
P41
DO YOU REQUIRE SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL RATES?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to apply a shift differential rate to the employees normal rates for
second and third shift work.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-118
Payroll
Answer N (No) if you do not need a shift differential.

If you answer N (No) to this question and to question X03, skip to question P55. If you
answer N (No) to this question and Y (Yes) to question X03, skip to question P44.
P42
IS YOUR SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL COST APPLIED AS INDIRECT LABOR?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if shift differential hours worked is directed to a burden account,

and is not considered part of the direct labor cost.
Answer N (No) if it is a part of direct labor cost.
If Production Control and Costing (PC&C) is installed and you use the application
interface to transfer data from Payroll to PC&C, changing your response can result in
a mixture of some direct labor that includes shift differentials and some direct labor
that does not. For example, if you previously answered N (No) to this question, the
system has been including shift differential on the direct labor passed to PC&C. If
you change your answer to Y (Yes), shift differential is no longer included in direct
labor passed to PC&C. Therefore, jobs currently open will have some labor costs that
include shift differential and some that do not.
P43
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SHIFT

DIFFERENTIAL COST?
DFLT-0

Enter the indirect labor account assigned to the extension of shift differential hours.
The number you enter must be a valid general ledger account number for this
company.
If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), zero appears only display. The
Ledger master file.
P44

DFLT-N
Appears only if you answered N (No) question X03.

Answer Y (Yes) if you have more companies. Return to question P30 to enter the next
company number and name (questions P30 and P31) and the information that
applies to that company. Return to question P30.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-119
Payroll
Answer N (No) when you have entered all companies. Continue to question P55.
P55

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
question P29. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.

P56

PAYROLL?
DFLT-Y
essential information. If Payroll is already installed, answer Y (Yes) or N (No),
depending on what you want to change.
Answer N (No) to complete the questionnaire.
P57
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES FOR ALL

PAYROLL MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to print a report that shows how information appeared before and
after you changed a master record. When you add or change a master record (such
as an employee name and address), the information is immediately available for use
by other areas of your application. The report is the printed audit trail of all manual
changes made to your master files. When you first install Payroll, you should answer
Y (Yes) to this question. If you later decide that the printed report of changes is no
longer necessary, run the questionnaire again and answer N (No).
P58
DO YOU WANT YEAR-TO-DATE AMOUNTS TO PRINT ON THE PAYROLL

CHECK STUB?
DFLT-N
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-120
Payroll
Answer Y (Yes) to see year-to-date gross earnings and taxes on the check stub of all
checks written on the system.
If you do not answer this question, the system assumes the default of N (No). See
Special forms on page C-1 for more information.
P59
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE EMPLOYEES ADDRESS ON THE PAYROLL

CHECKS?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print the employees address on the check.

If you do not answer this question, the system assumes the default of N (No). See
Special forms on page C-1 for more information.
P60
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT QUARTER-TO-DATE YEAR-TO-DATE REGISTER?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print the Year-To-Date/Quarter-To-Date Earnings register with the

normal reports each pay period.
Answer N (No) to not print it.
You can override your answer when you print checks and reports.
P61
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE VACATION HOLIDAY SICK-PAY REGISTER?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print the Vacation/Holiday/Sick register with the normal reports
each pay period.
P62
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE STATE COUNTY AND LOCAL REPORT?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print the State, County and Local Report with the normal reports
each pay period.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-121
Payroll

P63
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE WORKERS COMPENSATION WORKSHEET?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print the Workers Compensation Worksheet with the normal
reports each pay period.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-122
Payroll

P64
DO YOU WANT TO SHOW PROD. FACILITY DISTRIBUTION ON YOUR

LABOR DISTRIBUTION REPORT?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you have established production facilities within departments and
want the report to show totals for each of these facilities. The Labor Distribution
register prints in total by department number. You must enter the time using the
department and facility numbers associated with the hours worked before the
system can calculate any meaningful facility totals. The system uses the home facility
(or the production facility associated with the order if Production Control and Costing
is installed) as the default.
P70

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
question P57.
Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-123

E01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR PRODUCT

DATA MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question E12.
E02
DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCT COSTING?

DFLT-N
If you want to use the product costing function, answer Y (Yes). This causes the size
of the Item Master file to double from one to two records per item to accommodate
future Material Requirements Planning (MRP) data and Product Data Management
(PDM) costing data. If you answer N (No), you cannot use the product costing
function. For more information, see Managing Product Data Management in the
Product Data Management Users Guide.
E03
DO YOU WANT PRODUCTION FACILITY STANDARD EFFICIENCY TO BE

USED FOR CALCULATING STANDARD AND CURRENT COSTS?
DFLT-Y
If you want production facility standard efficiency to be used in PDM product costing
calculations, answer Y (Yes). If you answer Y (Yes), PDM uses the value from the
Production Facility file. If you answer N (No) or if you do not select the Production
Facility file, PDM uses a value of 1.00 (100%) for production facility efficiency. (For
more information, see question E07 or the Product Data Management Users Guide.)
E04
DO YOU WANT TO USE FEATURE/OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
If you want features and options, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want features and
options, answer N (No). For more information, see Managing Product Data
Management in the Product Data Management Users Guide.
Contents
Index
E05
Exit
Page B-124
DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE FOR YOUR BILLS OF

MATERIAL?
DFLT-Y
If you want to be able to maintain and retrieve your bills of material in a user-specified
sequence and have duplicate component items in your bills of material, answer Y
(Yes). If you do not want this function, answer N (No), and your bills of material are
maintained and retrieved in component item sequence.
For more information, see Managing Product Data Management in the Product
Data Management Users Guide.
are retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the PDM questionnaire and
to take effect.
E06
HOW DO YOU WANT TO USE USER SEQUENCE IN RELATION TO

COMPONENT ITEMS?
1. USER SEQ./COMPONENT ITEM
2. COMPONENT ITEM/USER SEQ.
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E05. Enter the
sequence in which you want components to be retrieved for maintenance, inquiry,
and reports.
Continue with question E07.
are retrieved from the Product Structure file. If you rerun the PDM questionnaire and
to take effect.
E07
DO YOU WANT TO USE PRODUCTION FACILITIES?

DFLT-Y
This question does not appear if PC&C is installed and interfacing because the
Production Facility file must exist for PC&C. This question does not appear if there
are existing Routing Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you
are installing the REP application.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-125
If you want the Production Facility file, answer Y (Yes). For more information, see
Managing Product Data Management in the Product Data Management Users
Guide.
Use the RMVM command to manually remove the Production Facility file from the
disk if all of the following conditions are true:

REP is not installed.
The Routing file (ROUTNG) is not needed.

E08
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE STANDARD ROUTING OPERATIONS?

DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E07 or if PC&C is
installed and interfacing. This question does not appear if there are existing Routing
Maintenance batches. You are required to answer Y (Yes) if you are installing the
REP application.
If you want Routing data for standard operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use
operation yield, answer Y (Yes). If you want to use the expanded item-receiving
capability in Purchasing, answer Y (Yes). Otherwise, answer N (No). For more
information, see Managing Product Data Management in the Product Data
E09
DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL ROUTING DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question E08. If you need
more than 20 characters of text for your routing operation descriptions, answer Y
(Yes) to create the Routing Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999
lines of 40-character text for each routing operation description. If you do not need
additional routing operation descriptions, answer N (No).
E10
IF MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING IS TO BE INSTALLED LATER, DO

YOU WANT ADDITIONAL MRP INFORMATION IN THE ITEM MASTER FILE?
DFLT-Y
This question appears only if you did not request the product costing function
(question E02). If you answer Y (Yes), the size of the Item Master file is doubled to
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-126
accommodate the future MRP data. If you answer N (No), the size of the Item Master
file remains at one record per item.
E11

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made an error or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return to
question E02. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.

E12

PDM?
DFLT-Y
E13
TYPE IN THE NAME OF THIS COMPANY

(UP TO 15 CHARACTERS)
headings. The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is not
labeled DFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that,
the company name that you type in appears.
If you answered Y (Yes) to question E04 (features/options), continue with questions
E14 through E34.
If you answered N (No) to question E04 (features/options), skip to question E35.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-127
The following questions appear only if you requested features and options (question
E04). You can type in 0, 1, or 2 for each question up to where the accumulation of
your answers for this series of feature/options questions equals 20. When this total
equals 20, question E35 appears. If this total exceeds 20 (maximum), you are
automatically returned to the beginning of this series, question E14.
E14

E15

E16

E17

E18

E19

E20

Contents
Index
E21
Exit
Page B-128

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

Contents
Index
E29
Exit
Page B-129

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
If you have made a mistake or want to change a response, answer Y (Yes) to return
to question E13. Answer N (No) to continue the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-130

E35
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR PDM?

DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), you have completed the PDM portion of the questionnaire.
E36
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BEFORE AND AFTER IMAGES OF ALL PRODUCT

DATA MANAGEMENT MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master file record (such as item or production facility
report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files. To
question.
are printed.
E37

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the questionnaire.

section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question E36.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-131

C01

PRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING?
DFLT-Y
can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question C20.
C02
DO YOU WANT TO SCHEDULE MANUFACTURING OPERATIONS

BACKWARD FROM THE ORDER DUE DATES?
DFLT-N
Your answer here tells the system if you want to use forward scheduling or backward
scheduling in figuring operation dates.
A Y (Yes) answer means you want backward scheduling. The operation dates are
based on the order due date.
A N (No) answer means you want forward scheduling. The operation dates are
based on the system date, the date of work list generation.
(Yes) to N (No), be sure to run option 7 from the File Maintenance menu (AMCM70) to
reschedule all of your open manufacturing orders.
C03
WHICH METHOD OF ORDER COSTING DO YOU WANT?

1-NO ORDER COSTING, 2-STANDARD ORDER COSTING,
3-ACTUAL ORDER COSTING
Contents
Index
Page B-132
Exit
This defines to the system the order costing routines to be used in the generation of
both standard and actual (or transaction) costs. Answer with one of the following
codes:
Code
MEANING
NO ORDER COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE PERFORMED. THE

SYSTEM PLACES ZEROS IN ALL OF THE STANDARD AND ACTUAL
COST FIELDS.
STANDARD COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE USED IN THE

GENERATION OF ACTUAL (OR TRANSACTION) COSTS. THE
SYSTEM EXTENDS WORK CENTER STANDARD RATES BY LABOR
TRANSACTIONS FOR ACTUAL COSTS.
ACTUAL COSTING ROUTINES ARE TO BE PERFORMED. THE

SYSTEM USES EMPLOYEE RATES TO GENERATE LABOR
TRANSACTION COSTS. AN ACTUAL TRANSACTION COST CAN
BE ENTERED BY ITSELF USING THIS OPTION. ACTUAL COSTS
CAN BE CALCULATED ONLY IN SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE.
Note: Employee rates are used only if the Payroll application is installed and
interfacing with Production Control and Costing.
C04
DO YOU WANT TO REFRESH OPERATION RATES FROM PRODUCTION

FACILITY FOR INITIAL OPERATION CHARGE?
DFLT-Y
When you release a manufacturing order, the operation record gets the standard
work center rate from the Production Facility file. This rate may change over time. To
use the work center rate that is in effect at the time an operation is started, answer Y
(Yes). Answer N (No) to use the standard work center rate that was in effect when the
manufacturing order was released.
C05
HOW WOULD YOU LIKE YOUR PRODUCTION RATIO EXPRESSED?

1-HOURS PER PIECES 2-PIECES PER HOURS
This defines to the system the way to express the production ratio on the Order
StatusProduction Report. If you want the ratio expressed as hours per piece,
answer 1. The system then divides total to date operation hours by total to date
quantity worked. If you want the ratio expressed as pieces per hour, answer 2. The
system will divide total to date quantity worked by total to date actual operation
hours.
C06
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY SHOP ACTIVITY TRANSACTION EDITS?

DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Page B-133
Exit
options and enter essential information. If the application is already installed, you can
answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.
Shop activity transaction edits occur during the data entry and edit programs of shop
activity update. They affect the move and labor transaction edit logic by activating or
deactivating the edits specified in the explanations of questions C07, C08, C09, C10,
C11, and C12. A Y (Yes) answer also allows you to create a shop activity error
recovery file in question C13. If your answer is N (No), skip to question C14.
C07
DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS SHOP ACTIVITY IN SEQUENCE?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). This defines to the system
the relationship between operation status changes in shop activity update and the
operation sequence of open manufacturing orders. If you want to process in
sequence, answer Y (Yes) so that the system requires labor and move completes to
be in sequence. Also, move transactions have to be consecutive. If you do not want
to process in sequence, then answer N (No), and the system processes status
changes without checking previous operation status.
C08
HOW SHOULD MOVE TRANSACTIONS OCCUR?

1-NO MOVE TRANSACTIONS, 2-MOVE TO NEXT OPERATION,
3-MOVE TO NEXT WORK AREA
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). This defines to the system
how to edit the move transaction in shop activity update. Answer with one of the
following codes:
Code
MEANING
DO NOT ALLOW ANY MOVE TRANSACTIONS.
ALLOW THE MOVE TRANSACTION TO GO TO THE NEXT

OPERATION ONLY, SO THAT THE NEXT OPERATION FIELD CAN BE
EDITED PROPERLY.
ALLOW THE MOVE TO GO TO A WORK AREA ON OTHER THAN

AN OPERATION, SO THE SYSTEM CAN USE THE NEXT WORK
AREA FIELD.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-134
A move to the next operation may change the next operations status. Also, the
orders current work area may be updated to be at that operation. A move to a work
area may update only the order summary to show the orders current work area. The
operation status of the next operation is changed only by the first transaction against
it. The order summarys current work area is updated to show the order to be at this
operation at that time. Additionally, the move install options for no moves and move
to work area causes the work list generation programs to include in queue analysis
any operation with a status of 10 that follows an operation with a status of 40 or 50
within a manufacturing order.
C09
DO YOU WANT SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE TO EDIT TRANSACTION

QUANTITY COMPLETE?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to compare the
actual (or transaction) operation quantity reported (worked and scrapped) to date
against the expected operation quantity for an exception message, answer Y (Yes).
The expected quantity is the quantity worked of the previous operation. For the first
operation, the expected quantity is the order quantity, minus the quantity in split
orders, plus the order quantity deviation. When the actual quantity reported is over
the expected quantity by the tolerance entered in question C10, the system prints a
warning exception message in the shop activity edit programs. If you do not want the
edit to occur, answer N (No). When an operation status is changed to labor complete
(40), a further check is made due to this option between the operation quantity
reported and the expected quantity. If the quantity reported is less than the quantity
expected by more than the tolerance specified in question C10, then an exception
message is printed.
C10
WHAT IS YOUR EDIT TOLERANCE PERCENTAGE FOR QUANTITY

COMPLETE?
This question is asked only if C06 and C09 were answered Y (Yes). The tolerance
percentage specified here is used in the two edits requested by question C09. The
tolerance is a whole number and is added to 100% before the edits are performed. A
value of 25 is 125% and represents 1-1/4 times the comparison value.
C11
DO YOU WANT SHOP ACTIVITY UPDATE TO EDIT TRANSACTION HOURS

WORKED?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to compare the
actual (or transaction) operation time reported to date against the standard time of
the expected operation quantity for an exception message, answer Y (Yes). The
expected quantity is the quantity worked of the previous operation. For the first
operation, the expected quantity is the order quantity, minus the quantity in split
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-135
orders, plus the order quantity deviation. The actual time includes setup and run for
both labor and machine hours where these values exist. When the actual time
reported is more than the standard expected time by the tolerance entered in
question C12, a warning exception message is printed in the shop activity edit
programs. If you do not want the edit to occur, answer N (No).
C12
WHAT IS YOUR EDIT TOLERANCE PERCENTAGE FOR HOURS WORKED?

This question is asked only if C06 and C11 were answered Y (Yes). The tolerance
percentage specified here is used in the edit requested by question C11. The
tolerance is a whole number and is added to 100 percent before the edit is
performed. A value of 25 is 125 percent and represents one and one quarter times
the comparison value.
C13
DO YOU WANT TO USE A SHOP ACTIVITY ERROR RECOVERY FILE?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want to retain errors
encountered in the batch processing of shop activity update after the update
program has been performed, answer Y (Yes) so that the Error Recovery file can be
created. If you do not want the Error Recovery file, answer N (No) and the system
does not create one. If you want to remove the Error Recovery file, answer N (No)
and the system removes an existing one even if there is data in it.
C14
DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-N
If you need more than 20 characters of text for your manufacturing order operation
descriptions, answer Y (Yes) to use the Manufacturing Order Operation Additional
Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999 lines of 40-character text for
each operation. If you do not need additional operation descriptions, answer N (No).
C15
SHOULD PAYROLL APPLICATION INTERFACE WITH PRODUCTION

CONTROL AND COSTING?
DFLT-N
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want payroll labor
transactions to interface with manufacturing orders in shop activity update, answer Y
(Yes) so that the system can copy data from Payroll data entry batches to shop
activity update data entry batches. You still have to activate the interface using the
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-136
Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want Payroll labor transactions
to update manufacturing orders, answer N (No).
Production Control and Costing and Payroll. After answering Y (Yes) to this question,
you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See Activate/
C16
SHOULD ACCOUNTS PAYABLE APPLICATION INTERFACE WITH

DFLT-N
This question is asked only if C06 was answered Y (Yes). If you want Accounts
Payable miscellaneous charge transactions and outside operation cost transactions
to interface with manufacturing orders in shop activity update, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system can copy data from the Accounts Payable data entry batches to shop
activity update data entry batches. You still have to activate the interface using the
Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want Accounts Payable
miscellaneous charge transactions or outside operation cost transactions to update
manufacturing orders, answer N (No).
Production Control and Costing and Accounts Payable. After answering Y (Yes) to
this question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See
C17

DFLT-N
Contents
Index
C18
Exit
Page B-137

DFLT-N
This question appears only when IFM is installed and the answer to Do you want to
have General Ledger distribution is yes. Answer Y (Yes) to have the Create Ledger
Entries function keep transaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extract
file. Answer N (No) to not save the transaction details in the Transaction Extract file.
C19

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question C02. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-138

C20

DFLT-Y
C21
headings. It specifies the name of the company identified for company number one.
PC&C does not contain multiple company support. The company name of company
number one is, however, printed in the heading of each of the PC&C reports.
The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. It is not labeled
DFLT-. The first time you answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the
company name that you previously typed in for the particular company appears.
C22

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
question C21. Answer N (No) to begin defining the report options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-139

C23

DFLT-Y
and enter essential information. If this application is already installed and interfacing,
answer Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
C24

PRODUCTION CONTROL AND COSTING MASTER FILES RECORDS WHEN
THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you add or change a master file record (such as production facility
description) from the workstation, the information can be used immediately by other
information appeared before and after a change was made, answer Y (Yes). This
report is the printed audit trail of all manual changes made to your master files, such
as the Manufacturing Order Operation Detail file, Manufacturing Order
Miscellaneous Charge Detail file, Manufacturing Order Master file, Manufacturing
Order Material Detail file, and Production Facility file. When these file maintenance
programs are called by menus in other MAPICS XA applications, the option for
before and after printing is controlled by the answers in their questionnaires. To
question.
are printed.
C25
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORT OPTIONS FOR CREATING

SHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
The shop packet is created once for any manufacturing order when requested as
part of a batch flow. Shop packets can be called for multiple orders both in Inventory
Management and in PC&C. The fixed options for this version of the shop packet are
specified in questions C26 through C40, which are used when you run order release
with shop packets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-140
packet creations separately. Refer to the Shop Packet OptionsMultiple Orders

display (AMI4E3) in the Shop Packet Creation chapter of the Production Control
and Costing Users Guide.
C26
DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing this
application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enter
essential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer either Y
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer is N
(No), skip to question C36. If you want shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so
that the system prints them. If you do not want worksheets, answer N (No).
C27
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you want a
material picking list, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the material detail
information while it prints the shop packet worksheets. If you do not want material
component information on your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No). If you want
to work with milestone operations, answer Y (Yes). If you want shop packet
worksheets or milestone reporting, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the
worksheets and milestone tickets. If you do not want worksheets or milestone tickets,
answer N (No).
C28
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATIONS DETAIL?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you want
operations detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system prints the manufacturing order routing after the picking list. If a picking list
is requested (question C27), there is a skip to a new page before the operations list.
If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
C29
Exit
Page B-141
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE INACTIVE

OPERATIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25, C26, and C28 were answered Y (Yes). If you want
inactive operations (operation status is 00) to print within the operation detail list on
your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints inactive
operations with the manufacturing order routing. The PC&C order status inquiries are
the only procedures other than the shop packet procedures that allows you to review
inactive operations within manufacturing orders. All other PC&C procedures are
concerned only with active operations. If you do not want inactive operations to be
printed with the operations list, answer N (No).
C30
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE ADDITIONAL

OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C14, C25, C26, and C28 were answered Y (Yes). If you
want additional operation descriptions on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y
(Yes) so the system prints this information along with the manufacturing order
routing. If you do not want the additional operation descriptions to be printed, answer
N (No).
C31
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD TIMES?

DFLT-Y
standard times to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system prints them with the operations detail information. You are required to
have a special security clearance to see this information if you activate application
security using the Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want
standard times to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
C32
Exit
Page B-142
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS

DETAIL?
DFLT-Y
miscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer
Y (Yes) so that the system prints the charges list right after the operations list. There
is a page skip after the material picking list but not after the operations list. If you do
not want miscellaneous charges to be printed on your shop packet worksheets,
answer N (No).
C33
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD COSTS?

DFLT-Y
standard costs to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the
system prints the standard summary and detail record costs. If you do not want any
costs to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).
C34
DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING DATES ON YOUR WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-N
tracking dates to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the
system prints the tracking summary and detail record dates. If you do not want any
dates to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).
C35
DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25 and C26 were answered Y (Yes). If you are
installing this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and
enter essential information. If this application is already installed, you can answer
either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If your answer
is N (No), skip to question C39.
If you want paper labor and milestone tickets to serve as the turnaround media for
the reporting of operation transactions to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) so that the system
creates paper labor and milestone tickets with the shop packets for multiple orders.
Answer N (No) if you do not want paper labor and milestone tickets.
Contents
Index
C36
Exit
Page B-143
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER FORMAT FOR LABOR/

MILESTONE TICKETS?
DFLT-N
This question is asked only if C35 was answered Y (Yes). If you answered N (No) to
C35, go to question C40.
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints each
labor or milestone ticket on a single form, one over another (also called the over/
under format), so you can report milestone operation transactions.
Answer N (No) if you want the system to print labor tickets only. The system then
prints two labor tickets on one form, side by side.
The side by side format is not available if PM&C is installed.
See Appendix C. for sample labor and milestone tickets.
C37
DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). If you want to
print labor and milestone tickets for multiple orders on preprinted forms, answer Y
(Yes) so that the system prints only the operation identification information. The
special characters and field descriptions are all suppressed with this option. If you
want to use blank paper for your paper labor and milestone tickets for multiple
orders, answer N (No).
Both the preprinted forms and the blank paper you use for labor and milestone
tickets are special forms. You may want to print the tickets on regular stock paper,
but the labor tickets are printed over the perforations of the stock paper. When labor
tickets are printed, you will see system messages which allow you to change and
align the forms. If you want to print the tickets on regular stock paper, respond to the
system messages without changing the forms.
C38
WHAT IS THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT PRINTED?

This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). This question
specifies a low-limit for the number of tickets printed for each manufacturing
operation. The operation duration (standard hours according to the operations prime
load code) is calculated for each operation. A ticket would then be printed for every
four standard operation hours. If this value is lower than the low-limit value specified
by the answer to this question, then the low-limit value is used.
Contents
Index
C39
Exit
Page B-144
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT PRINTED?

This question is asked only if C25 and C35 were answered Y (Yes). This specifies a
high-limit for the number of tickets that the system prints for each manufacturing
operation. The operation duration (standard hours according to the operations prime
load code) is calculated for each operation. A ticket would then be printed by the
system for every four standard operation hours. If this value is higher than the highlimit value specified by the answer to this question, then the high-limit value is used.
C40

SHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
The shop packet can be created multiple times for any individual manufacturing
order. Shop packets can be called for individual orders both in Inventory
Management and in PC&C. The fixed options for this version of the shop packet are
specified in questions C40 through C53. These options can be overridden when you
run shop packet creation for individual orders. Refer to the Shop Packet Options
Multiple Orders display (AMI4E4) in the Shop Packet Creation chapter of the
Production Control and Costing Users Guide.
C41
DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C51.
If you want shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints them.
Also answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints
milestone reporting tickets with the worksheets. Answer N (No) if you do not want
worksheets or milestone reporting tickets.
Contents
Index
C42
Exit
Page B-145
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C40 and C41 were answered Y (Yes). If you want a
material picking list, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the material detail
information while it prints the shop packet worksheets. If you do not want material
component information on your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).
C43
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATION DETAIL?

DFLT-Y
operation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system prints the manufacturing order routing after the picking list. If a picking list
is requested (question C42), there is a skip to a new page before the operations list.
Also answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints
milestone reporting tickets so you can report milestone operation transactions.
Answer N (No) if you do not want the operations list or milestone reporting tickets.
C44
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE INACTIVE

OPERATIONS?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C40, C41, and C43 were answered Y (Yes). If you want
inactive operations (operation status is 00) to be printed within the operations detail
list on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints
inactive operations with the manufacturing order routing. The PC&C order status
inquiries are the only procedures other than the shop packet procedures that allow
you to review inactive operations within manufacturing orders. All other PC&C
procedures are concerned only with active operations. If you do not want inactive
operations to be printed with the operations list, answer N (No).
C45
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE ADDITIONAL

OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-146
This question is asked only if C14, C40, C41, and C43 were answered Y (Yes). If you
want additional operation descriptions on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y
(Yes) so the system prints the additional operation descriptions along with the
manufacturing order routing.
If you do not want the additional operation descriptions to be printed, answer N (No).
C46
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD TIMES?

DFLT-Y
standard times to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system prints them with the operations detail information. You are required to
have a special security clearance to see this information if you activate application
security using the Cross Application Support Master Menu. If you do not want
standard times to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).
C47
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS

DETAIL?
DFLT-N
miscellaneous charges information to be printed on your shop packet worksheets,
answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints the charges list right after the operations list.
There is a page skip after the material picking list but not after the operations list. If
you do not want miscellaneous charges to be printed on your shop packet
worksheets, answer N (No).
C48
DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE STANDARD COSTS?

DFLT-Y
standard costs to be printed on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that
the system prints the standard summary and detail record costs. If you do not want
any costs to be printed on your worksheets, answer N (No).
C49
DO YOU WANT ORDER TRACKING DATES ON YOUR WORKSHEETS?

DFLT-Y
tracking dates to print on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y (Yes) so that the
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-147
system prints the tracking summary and detail record dates. If you do not want any
dates to print on your worksheets, answer N (No).
C50
DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?

DFLT-N
(No), the questionnaire skips to question C55.
If you want paper labor and milestone tickets to serve as turnaround media for the
reporting of operation transactions to PC&C, answer Y (Yes) so that the system
creates paper labor and milestone tickets with the shop packets for individual orders.
Answer N (No) if you do not want paper labor and milestone tickets.
C51
DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER FORMAT FOR LABOR/

MILESTONE TICKETS?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C50 was answered Y (Yes). If you answered N (No) to
C50, go to question C55.
Answer Y (Yes) if you want to work with milestone operations. The system prints each
labor or milestone ticket on a single form, one over another (also called the over/
under format), so you can report milestone operation transactions.
Answer N (No) if you want the system to print labor tickets only. The system then
prints two labor tickets on one form, side by side.
See Appendix C. for sample labor and milestone tickets.
C52
HOW MANY DO YOU WANT PRINTED?

This question is asked only if C40 and C50 were answered Y (Yes). This specifies the
number of tickets that the system prints for each manufacturing operation.
Contents
Index
C53
Exit
Page B-148
DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?

DFLT-N
print your labor and milestone tickets for individual orders on preprinted forms,
answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints only the operation identification information.
Special characters and field descriptions are all suppressed with this option. If you
want to use blank paper for your paper labor and milestone tickets for individual
orders, answer N (No).
Both the preprinted forms and the blank paper you use for labor and milestone
tickets are special forms. You may want to print the tickets on regular stock paper,
but the tickets are printed over the perforations. When labor and milestone tickets are
printed, you see system messages which allow you to change and align the forms. If
you want to print labor and milestone tickets on regular stock paper, respond to the
system messages without changing the forms.
C54
DO YOU WANT ALL OF THE OPERATIONS FOR A MANUFACTURING

ORDER TO PRINT ON THE PAPER LABOR TICKETS?
DFLT-Y
print labor and milestone tickets for all of the operations of each individually selected
manufacturing order, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want to produce labor and
milestone tickets for all of an orders operations, answer N (No). The system lets you
identify a specific operation when you select the order for shop packet creation.
C55
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR WORK LIST GENERATION OPTIONS

FOR REPORT SELECTION?
DFLT-Y
can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If
your answer is N (No), skip to question C64.
The operations are in priority sequence within reverse operation status sequence.
Running orders (status 30 operations) are first, with waiting orders (status 20
operations) next and arriving orders (status 10 operations) last. Certain reports can
be selected to run during this procedure by the responses to questions C56 through
C62. These options can be overridden when you run work list generation. See the
Work List Generation display (AMC710) in the Work List Generation chapter of the
Production Control and Costing Users Guide.
Contents
Index
C56
Exit
Page B-149
DO YOU WANT A LIST OF ALL ORDERS UNDER THE CRITICAL RATIO

VALUE?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a critical orders
list, answer Y (Yes) so that the work list generation procedure produces one. Critical
ratios are recalculated for all orders while each order is rescheduled. Right after this
occurs, an order summary list can be produced showing these orders organized by
the priority routine selected for this work list generation run. The critical ratio is just
one of four possible priority routines. If it is selected as the priority, then the orders
are in critical ratio order with only the ones appearing less than the value entered in
question C57. If the priority is other than critical ratio, the orders are in the other
sequence but they still appear only if they are below the ratio limit specified in
question C57. If you do not want a Critical Orders list produced in work list
generation, answer N (No).
C57
WHAT IS THE CRITICAL RATIO VALUE?

LOW-0.00 HILIM-999.99 DFLT-1.20
specify a critical order limit to be used on the critical ratio listing, answer Y (Yes). If a
value is entered it is used only to limit the number of orders printed on the report. A
critical ratio is calculated for all open orders regardless of this entry. The critical ratio
is the time remaining on an order divided by the work remaining in an order. The time
remaining is the difference in shop days between the order due date and the order
start date (or the system run date if it is more current). This value is replaced with a
zero whenever it goes negative. The work remaining is the difference in shop days
between the scheduled completion date and the order start date (or a more current
run date). When one orders critical ratio is lower than the critical ratio of another
order, then the first order is more critical than the second order. If you do not want to
specify a critical ratio limit, answer N (No) and the system prints all of the orders in
priority sequence.
C58
DO YOU WANT A LIST OF PRIORITY VALUES WITHIN OPERATION STATUS

CODES ON THE LIST?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C54 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a work list to be
printed during work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that the system prints one prior
to the creation of the Work List Inquiry file. This report is in priority sequence within
reverse operation status sequence. Running orders (status 30 operations) are first,
with waiting orders (status 20 operations) next and arriving orders (status 10
operations) last. There is a skip to a new page with each change in work center ID. If
you do not want the Work List report to be printed, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
C59
Exit
Page B-150
DO YOU WANT A WORK LIST BY DEPARTMENT?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work List by
Department to be printed within work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that the
system prints one. This report is the same as the regular Work List report except that
the work center department ID provides the major sort category. There is a skip to a
new page with each change in department and with each change of work center
within department. If you do not want a Work List by Department report, answer N
(No).
C60
DO YOU WANT A WORK LIST BY FOREMAN?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work List by
Foreman to be printed within work list generation, answer Y (Yes) so that the system
prints one. This report is the same as the regular Work List report except that the
work center foreman ID provides the major sort category. There is a skip to a new
page with each change in foreman and with each change of work center within
foreman. If you do not want a Work List by Foreman report, answer N (No).
C61
DO YOU WANT A WORK CENTER ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes). If you want a Work Center
Analysis report, answer Y (Yes) so that the system will run this report within the work
list generation procedure. The Work Center Analysis report can also be run as part of
the order closeout procedure. The only difference in the function of the two
procedures is that only during order closeout is it possible to update the output
averages (standard output, actual output, and efficiency) back into the Production
Facility file. The queue averages are updated back into the Production Facility file
every time the report is run. The report looks the same regardless of its update
options. When run in work list generation, all status 30 and 20 operations are
included in queue analysis. When the install option for move transactions (question
C08) is for no moves or move to work area, the status 10 operations that occur right
after status 40 or 50 operations within a manufacturing order are included in queue.
In work list generation, all completed operations (status 40 or 50) are included in the
output calculations if they have any nonzero values in their this-period fields. If you
do not want to run a Work Center Analysis report as part of work list generation,
answer N (No).
Note: Either question C62 or C63 is asked, depending on your response to using
the option schedule to due dates, question C02.
Contents
Index
C62
Page B-151
Exit
WHAT PRIORITY DO YOU WANT TO PRINT YOUR WORK LIST?

1-ORDER DUE DATE, 2-SLACK TIME PER OPERATION,
3-CRITICAL RATIO
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes).

If you answered N (No) to question C02 to use forward scheduling, then answer with
one of the following codes:
Code
1
2
3
MEANING
ORDER DUE DATE
SLACK TIME PER OPERATION
CRITICAL RATIO.
This install time option selects the work list generation priority routine. With each
running of work list generation, both the critical ratio and the work list priority value
are updated into each Manufacturing Order Master record. If critical ratio is selected,
then both fields contain the same value. The order due date is already contained in
the summary record and is just moved to the priority field if that is the selected
priority routine. The slack time per operation is the sum of the remaining standard
queue time in days in an order divided by the number of open operations remaining
in an order. The critical ratio is explained in question C57. When the priority value of
one order is lower than the priority value of another order, then the first order is more
critical.
C63
HOW DO YOU WANT TO PRINT WORK LISTS?

1-ORDER DUE DATE, 2-SLACK TIME PER OPERATION,
3-CRITICAL RATIO, 4-OPERATION DUE DATE
This question is asked only if C55 was answered Y (Yes).

If you answered Y (Yes) to question C02 to use backward scheduling, then answer
with one of the listed codes.
C64
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR REPORTING AND PURGING OPTIONS

FOR ORDER CLOSEOUT?
DFLT-Y
can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If
your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C78.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-152
The order closeout procedure removes from the open order database the summary
and the detail records of the orders identified for closeout by the order closeout
selection procedure. Certain reports can be selected to be run during this procedure
by the response to questions C65 and C77. You can override these options when you
run order closeout reporting and purging. See the Order Closeout Options displays
(AMC530, AMC531, AMC532, and AMC533) in the Order Closeout chapter of the
Production Costing and Control Users Guide.
C65
DO YOU WANT A WORK CENTER ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you answer N (No),
the questionnaire skips to question C67. If you want a Work Center Analysis report,
answer Y (Yes) so that the system runs this report within the order closeout
procedure.
The Work Center Analysis report can also be run as part of the work list generation
procedure. The only difference in the reports function between the two procedures is
that only during order closeout is it possible to update the output averages (standard
output, actual output, and efficiency) back into the Production Facility file. The queue
averages are updated back into the Production Facility file every time the report is
run. The report looks the same regardless of its update options. When run in order
closeout, status 30 and 20 operations are included in queue analysis. When the
install option for move transactions (question C08) is for no moves or move to
location, the status 10 operations that occur right after status 40 or 50 operations
within a manufacturing order are included in queue. In order closeout, the output
calculations include all completed operations (status 40 or 50) and operations within
orders to be closed out are included in the output calculations if they have any
nonzero values in their this-period fields. If you do not want to run a Work Center
Analysis report in order closeout, answer N (No).
C66
DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE YOUR WORK CENTER AVERAGES?

DFLT-Y
update the new smoothed average values for output (standard output, actual output,
and efficiency) into the Production Facility file, answer Y (Yes). The new smoothed
average fields involved with queue analysis are updated into the Production Facility
file every time the Work Center Analysis report is run. The Period Analysis Cost
Summary report should be selected (question C76) to clear this-period fields
(question C77) after the update of the new output values of the Production Facility
file. If you do not want to update the new output averages back into the Production
Facility file, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
C67
Exit
Page B-153
DO YOU WANT TO UPDATE THE CURRENT VALUES IN YOUR ROUTING

FILE?
DFLT-Y
(No), the questionnaire skips to question C72.
If you want to update the new smoothed average values for completed operation
time back into the Routing file, answer Y (Yes). The system selects the completed
operations (status 40 or 50) of manufacturing orders selected for closeout and
averages their total to date actual times into corresponding routing records
according to the end item of the order. The current values become the average
values without smoothing when the first operation updates a routing record. If you do
not want to average actual times back into the Routing file, answer N (No).
C68
WHAT IS YOUR ALPHA FACTOR?

LOW-.00 HILIM-.99 DFLT-.20
This question is asked only if C64 and C67 were answered Y (Yes). The routing
current values update alpha factor is the weighted averaging factor used to average
actual setup labor, run labor, and run machine times back into the Routing file. The
factor is the ratio of the weight of each of the new values divided by the
corresponding old values. This factor is ignored for the very first update of a routing
record. Refer to Alpha factor/averaging calculations in the Inventory Management
Users Guide for more information.
C69
DO YOU WANT EXCEPTION PRINTING?

1-NO PRINTING, 2-EXCEPTION WITH TOLERANCE PERCENT,
3-FULL PRINT
This question is asked only if C64 and C67 were answered Y (Yes). If you are
installing this application for the first time, you should answer 2 so that the options
appear.
If this application is already installed, you can answer 1, 2, or 3, depending upon
what needs to be changed. If your answer is 1 or 3, the questionnaire skips to
question C72. If you do not want any printing, answer 1 so that the system does not
print on an exception basis. If you want printing on an exception basis, answer 2 so
that the system uses the tolerance percentage for exception printing. If you want
printing with each update that occurs, answer 3 so that the system does not use
tolerance percentages. The exception is defined by establishing tolerance limits
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-154
both high and low. The averaging calculations are asked in questions C68 and C69.
When any of the three average fields is changed by a value greater than specified
tolerance limits, an exception occurs.
If you answer 2, continue with question C70. If you answer 1 or 3, skip to question
C72.
C70
WHAT IS YOUR OVER PERCENTAGE TOLERANCE DURING EXCEPTION

PRINTING?
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions C64 and C67 and 2
to question C69. To see only those values that have been changed significantly
during the current value update run, enter a whole number that indicates the
percentage above which a change is considered significant. This number is added
to 100 percent before the run. For example, a value of 25 is125 percent and
represents one and one-quarter times the old average values.
C71
WHAT IS YOUR UNDER PERCENTAGE TOLERANCE DURING EXCEPTION

PRINTING?
This question is asked only if you answered Y (Yes) to questions C64 and C67 and 2
to question C69. The tolerance is a whole number and is subtracted from 100
percent before the update run is performed. A value of 25 is 75 percent and
represents three-quarters of the old average values.
C72
DO YOU WANT A PRODUCTION REPORT?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C64 was answered Y (Yes). If you want an Order
StatusProduction Report to be printed during order closeout, answer Y (Yes). The
report is the same as the one that can be produced on a demand basis from the
Report Analysis menu (AMCM20). A report is printed for each noncanceled order
closeout candidate (status not 99). If you do not want an Order StatusProduction
Report, answer N (No).
C73
DO YOU WANT AN ACCOUNTING REPORT?

DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-155
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want an Order
StatusAccounting Report to be printed during order closeout, answer Y (Yes). The
report is the same as the one that can be produced on a demand basis from the
Report Analysis menu (AMCM20). A report is printed for each non-canceled order
closeout candidate (status not 99). If you do not want an Order StatusAccounting
Report, answer N (No). If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question
C76.
C74
DO YOU WANT MACHINE TOTALS TO PRINT?

DFLT-Y
print machine totals for cost, time and quantity scrapped values, answer Y (Yes). A
line is printed for each operation detail record showing these machine values.
Machine costs are included in overhead costs which are printed on another line for
each operation. If you do not want a separate printing of zero machine totals, answer
N (No), and only lines with machine values are printed.
C75
DO YOU WANT OPERATION TOTALS BY OPERATION TO PRINT?

DFLT-Y
print an operation total line for each operation detail record, answer Y (Yes). The total
line is a summary of the time and costs broken down by categories for each
operation detail record. If you do not want a separate line of printing of zero
operation totals, answer N (No), and only lines with operation totals are printed.
C76
DO YOU WANT A CURRENT PERIOD ANALYSIS REPORT?

DFLT-Y
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want a current
Period Analysis Cost Summary report, answer Y (Yes).
This report summarizes the work-in-process costs of the open order database for the
current manufacturing accounting period as well as for all orders to date. The
breakdown of costs is the same as that which appears on all work-in-process and
cost totals sheets. If you do not want a current Period Analysis Cost Summary report,
answer N (No). If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C78.
Contents
Index
C77
Exit
Page B-156
DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR YOUR CURRENT PERIOD VALUES?

DFLT-Y
clear the period fields after the current period report has been run, answer Y (Yes).
This, in effect, serves as a period-end cutover. The open order database is able to
accept transaction information into the period fields for the next manufacturing
accounting period. If you do not want to clear the period fields, answer N (No), and
the current period report can serve as a checkpoint of the current period.
C78
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE YOUR WORK CENTER ANALYSIS OPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if C61 or C65 was answered Y (Yes). If you are installing
this application for the first time, answer Y (Yes) to see all of the options and enter
(Yes) or N (No), depending upon what needs to be changed. If you want to change
the parameters required for the calculations performed by the Work Center Analysis
Report program, answer Y (Yes).
The Work Center Analysis Report can be produced both in work list generation and
in order closeout. The values entered here affect the report calculations regardless of
where it is run. This parameter information is presented again as runtime options
before the running of the Work Center Analysis Report.
If you do not want to change your Work Center Analysis Report parameters, answer
N (No). You can override these options when you do work center analysis either
during order closeout reporting and purge, or during work list generation. See the
Order Closeout OptionsWork Center Analysis Report display (AMC531) in the
Order Closeout chapter and the Work List Generation display (AMC710) in the
Work List Generation chapter of the Production Costing and Control Users Guide.
If your answer is N (No), the questionnaire skips to question C86.
C79
WHAT IS YOUR QUEUE ALPHA FACTOR?

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The queue alpha factor is
the weighted averaging factor used to average current queue values back into the
Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the weight of the new value divided
by the old value. The factor is used to calculate a new average current queue and a
new mean absolute deviation value between current queue and averaged queue.
Refer to Alpha factor/averaging calculations in the Inventory Management Users
Guide for more information.
Contents
Index
C80
Exit
Page B-157
WHAT IS YOUR STANDARD OUTPUT ALPHA FACTOR?

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The standard output alpha
factor is the weighted averaging factor used to average standard output values back
into the Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by the
old value.
C81
WHAT IS YOUR ACTUAL OUTPUT ALPHA FACTOR?

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The actual output alpha
factor is the weighted averaging factor used to average actual output values back
into the Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by the
old value.
C82
WHAT IS YOUR EFFICIENCY ALPHA FACTOR?

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The efficiency alpha factor
is the weighted averaging factor used to average efficiency values back into the
Production Facility file. The factor is the ratio of the new value divided by the old
value.
C83
WHAT IS YOUR QUEUE RANGE?

LOW-0.00 HILIM-9.99 DFLT-2.50
This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The queue range defines a
high and a low tolerance limit for both the average queue time and the standard
queue time (high norm and low norm, respectively). When the new current queue for
a work center is above or below these limits on the Work Center Analysis Report, a
queue exception message is noted. The value entered here is multiplied by the mean
absolute deviation to develop the tolerances. The lower limit is replaced with a zero
whenever it goes negative. There are separate tolerance checks for queue
exceptions. The new current queue in hours is compared with the old average queue
(range) in hours for one exception, while the new current queue (in days) is
compared with the work center standard queue (range) in days for a second
exception.
Contents
Index
C84
Page B-158
Exit
HOW MANY DAYS IN THE PERIOD?

This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The number of days in the
period is used by the Work Center Analysis program to calculate the amount of
planned capacity from a work centers shift capacities. This capacity value
represents the amount of work capable of being done by a work center during that
period of time. The number of days in the period is also used to calculate the
average actual output per day and the average standard output per day.
C85
WHAT IS YOUR TRACKING SIGNAL TRIP?

LOW-0.0 HILIM-9.9
DFLT-7.5
This question is asked only if C78 was answered Y (Yes). The tracking signal trip
defines the limit that causes the work center tracking signal to be reset once the
signal has exceeded the limit value. The entered value is multiplied by the new mean
absolute deviation to develop the tracking signal trip limit. The tracking signal is the
sum of the errors (or differences) between current queue and the old average queue.
The Work Center Analysis Report shows an exception message with the date that the
tracking signal was last tripped and the current signal value before it is reset to zero.
Use a higher value such as 8.0 if you want fewer warning messages to be printed on
the Work Center Analysis Report.
C86

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question C24.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-159

J01

PRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL?
DFLT-Y
If your answer is N (No), skip to question J09.
Note: You are prompted to answer questions J2 through J4 only if the associated
application is not currently installed and interfacing.
J02
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH INVENTORY MANAGEMENT?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the IM application is being installed at this time.

Production Monitoring and Control and Inventory Management. After answering Y
(Yes) to this questions, you must activate the interface through Cross Application
Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
J03

COSTING?
DFLT-N
Production Monitoring and Control and Production Control and Costing. After
Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS
Users Guide.
Contents
Index
J04
Exit
Page B-160
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH PAYROLL?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the PR application is being installed at this time.

Production Monitoring and Control and Payroll. After answering Y (Yes) to this
question, you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the
J05
DO YOU WANT TO CREATE LABOR TIME BATCHES?

DFLT-N
Answering Y (Yes) to this question creates transactions for you to use. These
transactions can be used with your payroll system. If Payroll is installed, the
transactions are moved to a payroll transaction batch.
J06
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE WITH REPETITIVE PRODUCTION

MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the Repetitive Production Management application is being

installed at this time.
Production Monitoring and Control and Repetitive Production Management. After
Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the CAS
Users Guide.
J07

PRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL MASTER FILE RECORDS
WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
To provide an audit trail, answer Y (Yes). Then when you add or change master file
records (such as item number or description) from the workstation, the information is
immediately available for use by other areas of your application. You may find it
useful to be able to print a report reflecting how the file records appeared both
before and after any changes. If, at a later date, you decide the report of changes is
not needed, rerun the questionnaire and change the answer to N (No).
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-161
are printed on maintenance edit lists.
J08

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the Define functional
options section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J02.

J09
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY CONSTANTS INFORMATION

FOR PRODUCTION MONITORING AND CONTROL?
DFLT-Y
J10
WHAT IS THE LOWEST NUMBER FOR A TEMPORARY BADGE?

DFLT-00001
You can limit the temporary badge numbers that are assigned to the range that you
specify here. If you enter no range, the numbers are assigned starting at 1.
You must be aware, however, that if you are using the Payroll application with PM&C,
the employee number in the Employee Master file (EMPMAS) is used as part of the
badge number in PM&C. Please do not enter a range that you currently intend on
assigning for employee numbers in Payroll. For example, your Payroll employee
numbers may be from 1 to 80000, while temporary badge numbers may be from
80001 to 99999.
J11
WHAT IS THE HIGHEST NUMBER FOR A TEMPORARY BADGE?

DFLT-99999
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-162
You can limit the temporary badge numbers that are assigned to the range that you
specify here. If you enter no range, the highest limit is assigned at
Note: Please refer to question J10 before assigning this number. You must ensure
that the highest temporary badge number is greater than the lowest temporary
badge number entered in J10.
J12

SYSTEM CONSTANTS INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change a response in the Define constants
options section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J10.

J13
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR PRODUCTION

MONITORING AND CONTROL?
DFLT-Y
The following questions apply to MULTIPLE ORDERS only.
J14

SHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
part of a batch flow. Shop packets for multiple orders can be called in PM&C, IM,
and PC&C. The fixed options are used when you run order release with shop
packets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop packet
creations separately.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-163

Note: If you answered N (No) to question C24 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS? in
the PC&C questionnaire, questions J15 through J17 are skipped.
J15
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODES ON THE

WORKSHEETS?
DFLT-Y
This answer is needed only if you answered Y (Yes) to question C25 DO YOU WANT
YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire.
If you use the worksheets as the turnaround media for individual component
transactions, answer Y (Yes) so that the turnaround number bar code is printed on
the shop packet worksheet. If you want to print the components for informational
purposes, but are not using the worksheet as a transaction entry document, enter N
(No) so that the worksheets print more quickly and have more components per page.
J16
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT OPERATION BAR CODES ON THE

WORKSHEETS?
DFLT-Y
YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE OPERATIONS DETAIL? in the PC&C
questionnaire.
If you want operation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer is Y
(Yes), then the system prints the manufacturing order routing after the material detail.
If material detail is requested (question J14), there is a skip to a new page before the
operations list. If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).
J17
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MISCELLANEOUS CHARGE BAR CODES ON

THE WORKSHEETS?
DFLT-Y
YOUR WORKSHEETS TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL? in the PC&C
questionnaire.
If you want miscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packet
worksheets, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want miscellaneous charges to print on
your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
J18
Exit
Page B-164
DO YOU WANT MANUFACTURING RECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N
If you want manufacturing receiving tickets to serve as the turnaround media for
reporting production receipts, answer is Y (Yes), manufacturing receiving tickets
print with the shop packet. If you do not want receiving tickets, answer N (No).
If you answer Y (Yes), continue with the next question.
If you answer N (No), skip to question J24.
J19
DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR YOUR MANUFACTURING

RECEIVING TICKETS?
DFLT-N
If you want to print your receiving tickets on preprinted forms, answer Y (Yes). If you
want to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N (No). Both the preprinted
forms and the blank forms you use for receiving tickets are special forms. When
receiving tickets are printed, you see the system messages that allow you to change
the forms.
Note: If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to Special forms on page C-1 for
form detail.
J20
HOW SHOULD THE NUMBER OF TICKETS PER ORDER BE CALCULATED?

(1 = FIXED NUMBER OF TICKETS PER ORDER 2 = ONE TICKET PER
NUMBER OF ITEMS)
DFLT-1
Enter 1 if you want to print a fixed number of receiving tickets for all orders. Enter 2 if
you want the number of tickets per order to vary, depending on the size of the order.
If you answer 1, continue with the next question.
If you answer 2, skip to question J22.
Contents
Index
J21
Exit
Page B-165
WHAT IS THE FIXED NUMBER OF TICKETS THAT PRINT FOR EACH

ORDER?
DFLT-1
If you chose option 1 for question J20, the value you enter here is the fixed number of
receiving tickets that print for each order.
After answering this question, skip to question J24.
J22
WHAT IS THE NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU REQUIRE FOR EACH ITEM?

DFLT-1
If you chose option 2 for question J20, the order quantity is divided by the value you
enter here to determine the number of receiving tickets required.
J23
WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF TICKETS YOU WANT TO PRINT?

DFLT-0
You can enter a value here to limit the number of tickets printed for each order. If you
accept the default of zero or if you enter a value of zero, the total number of tickets
printed is calculated using your response to question J22.
J24
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE RESPONSES ABOUT REPORT OPTIONS FOR

CREATING SHOP PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define report options for multiple orders section of the
questionnaire.
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J14. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
The following questions apply to INDIVIDUAL ORDERS only.
Contents
Index
J25
Exit
Page B-166

SHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
part of a batch flow. Shop packets for multiple orders can be called in PM&C, IM,
and PC&C. The fixed options are used when you run order release with shop
packets. These options can be overridden when you run multiple shop packet
creations separately.
Note: If you answered N (No) to question C38 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS? in
the PC&C questionnaire, then skip questions J26 through J28.
J26
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODE ON THE

WORKSHEETS?
DFLT-Y
If you answered Y (Yes) to question C39 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO

INCLUDE MATERIAL DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.
If you use the worksheets as the turnaround media for individual component
the shop packet worksheet. If you want to print the components for informational
purposes, but are not using the worksheet as a transaction entry document, enter N
(No) so that the worksheets print more quickly and have more components per page.
J27
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT OPERATION DETAIL BAR CODES ON THE

WORKSHEET?
DFLT-Y
If you answered Y (Yes) to question C40 DO YOU WANT YOUR WORKSHEETS TO

INCLUDE OPERATION DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.
If you want operation detail information on your shop packet worksheets, answer Y
(Yes). If you do not want the operations list, answer N (No).
Contents
Index
J28
Exit
Page B-167
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL BAR CODES ON THE

WORKSHEETS?
DFLT-Y
If you answered Y (Yes) to question C44 DO YOU WANT WORKSHEETS TO

INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS DETAIL? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question
appears.
If you want miscellaneous charges information to print on your shop packet
worksheets, answer Y (Yes). If you do not want miscellaneous charges to print on
your shop packet worksheets, answer N (No).
J29
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT MANUFACTURING RECEIVING TICKETS?

DFLT-N
If you want manufacturing receiving tickets to serve as the turnaround media for
reporting production receipts, answer is Y (Yes), manufacturing receiving tickets
print with the shop packet. If you do not want receiving tickets, answer N (No).
If you answer Y (Yes), continue with the next question.
If you answer N (No), skip to question J32.
J30
DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR MANUFACTURING RECEIVING

TICKETS?
DFLT-N
want to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N. Both the preprinted
the forms.
Note:
If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to Special forms for form detail.
J31
HOW MANY TICKETS DO YOU WANT TO PRINT PER ORDER?

DFLT-1
Your answer specifies the number of tickets printed for the order.
Contents
Index
J32
Exit
Page B-168
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE RESPONSES ABOUT REPORT OPTIONS FOR

CREATING SHOP PACKETS FOR INDIVIDUAL ORDERS?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Define report options for individual orders section of
the questionnaire.
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J25. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
The following questions establish the default printing options for shop packets that
include both multiple and individual orders, as well as other printing options in
PM&C.
J33
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT COMPONENT BAR CODE ON THE PICKING

LIST?
DFLT-Y
If you use the picking list as a turnaround document for individual component
the picking list.
J34
DO YOU WANT LOCATION BAR CODE ON THE PICKING LIST?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want location bar code on the picking list.
Answer N (No) if you do not want location bar code on the picking list.
J35
DO YOU WANT LOCATION BAR CODE ON THE WORKSHEET?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) if you want location bar code on the worksheet.

Answer N (No) if you do not want location bar code on the worksheet.
Contents
Index
J36
Exit
Page B-169
WHICH WORKSHEET FORMAT DO YOU WANT?

If you answered Y (Yes) to either question C23 or C38 DO YOU WANT

WORKSHEETS? in the PC&C questionnaire, this question appears.
If you enter 1, the worksheets print on standard computer paper. If you enter 2, the
worksheets print in a more compact format on 8 1/2" x 11" paper. If you are using a
3812 printer to print your Shop Packets, you must enter 2. If you enter 3, the
worksheets print using the IM format without the bar codes.
J37
WHICH PICKING LIST FORMAT DO YOU WANT?

If you enter 1, the picking lists print on standard computer paper. If you enter 2, the
picking lists print in a more compact format on 8 1/ 2" x 11" paper. If you are using a
IPDS Laser printer to print your Shop Packets, you must enter 2. If you enter 3, the
picking lists print using the IM format without bar codes.
J38
WHICH TEMPORARY BADGE FORMAT DO YOU WANT?

This question allows you to select the forms length of your temporary badges. If you
select 1, the format for your badge will be large. If you select 2, the format for your
badge will be small.
Please refer to the Special forms appendix of this book for the temporary badge
forms.
J39
DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS FOR YOUR PURCHASING

RECEIVING TICKETS?
DFLT-N
want to use blank forms for your receiving tickets, answer N. Both the preprinted
the forms.
Note: If your answer is Y (Yes), please refer to the Special forms appendix in this
book for form detail.
Contents
Index
J40
Exit
Page B-170
DO YOU WANT TO USE RECEIVING TICKETS AS INVENTORY TAGS?

DFLT-N
If you enter Y (Yes), the item number prints on the receiving tickets in large
characters. The item number prints in large characters on the manufacturing, as well
as the purchasing, receiving tickets.
J41

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question J14.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-171
Purchasing
Purchasing
601

PURCHASING?
DFLT-Y
When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so the
options appear. If Purchasing is already installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No).
If you answer N (No), skip to question 617.
602
DO YOU WANT TO PROCESS INVOICES IN PURCHASING?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to capture actual cost against the order. You must receive and
invoice all purchase orders before you can close and purge them from Purchasing.
You may enter your payable invoices in Purchasing or Accounts Payable (AP).
Answer N (No) to not capture actual cost against the order. You must receive but not
invoice all purchase orders before you can close and purge them from Purchasing.
You may only enter your payable invoices in Accounts Payable (AP).
603
DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE ORDER

QUANTITY IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a G type comment for your
purchase orders when you change an order quantity. This comment prints on
purchase orders. You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) to
question 606.
Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to generate a G type comment for your
purchase orders when you change an order quantity.
604
DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE ORDER

PRICE IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-172
Purchasing
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a comment for your purchase
orders when you change an order price. This comment prints on purchase orders.
You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) to question 606.
purchase orders when you change an order price.
605
DO YOU WANT TO GENERATE A COMMENT RECORD WHEN THE DATE

TO DOCK IS CHANGED ON A PURCHASE ORDER?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the system to generate a G type comment for your
purchase orders when you change the date to dock. This comment prints on
purchase orders. You can save the comment to history if you answer Y (Yes) to
question 606.
purchase orders when you change the date to dock.
606
DO YOU WANT G TYPE COMMENTS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to send all G type comments generated during purchase order
processing to the online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge. Answer
N (No) if you do not want to send G type comments to the history file.
607
DO YOU WANT T TYPE COMMENTS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to send all T type comments generated during transaction

processing to the online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge. Answer
N (No) if you do not want to send T type comments to the history file.
608
DO YOU WANT MISCELLANEOUS AND SERVICE ITEMS ON A PURCHASE

ORDER TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to send all miscellaneous and service items with Receipt
Required = Yes that appear on purchase orders to the online Purchase History file
(POHIST). The system calculates vendor performance for them.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-173
Purchasing
Answer N (No) to send only inventory items to the Purchase History file (POHIST).
The system will calculate vendor performance for them.
609
DO YOU WANT DEBIT MEMOS TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to send all debit memos generated during transaction processing to
the online Purchase History file (POHIST) during order purge.
Answer N (No) to not send debit memos to the history file.
610

PURCHASING MASTER FILE RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) to provide
an audit trail. When you add or change master file records (such as buyer number
and name), the information is immediately available for use. You may find it useful to
report before and after file records. If, at a later date, you decide you do not need
the report of changes, run the questionnaire again and change the answer to N (No).
If you answer N (No) to this question, the system reports neither the before nor the
after lines.
611
DO YOU WANT THE ORDER UNIT OF MEASURE TO PRINT ON THE

PURCHASE ORDER AND DEBIT MEMO?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to print the unit of measure entered during PO entry/edit on purchase
orders and debit memos.
Answer N (No) to print the purchasing unit of measure associated with each
purchase order or debit memo.
612
DO YOU WANT THE QUANTITY RECEIVED TO STOCK TO BE USED AS

THE QUANTITY RECEIVED?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to use the quantity received to stock (RP transaction) as the quantity
received on inquiries and reports.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-174
Purchasing
Answer N (No) to use the quantity received to dock (RD transaction) as the quantity
received. If you answer N (No) and never perform an RD transaction for items
received, the system does not update the Quantity Received field. The system will
generate invalid data on inquiries and reports.
613
DO YOU WANT ITEMS WITHIN PURCHASE ORDERS TO BE REPORTED/

DISPLAYED IN AS ENTERED SEQUENCE (ARRIVAL SEQUENCE)?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to print all items in the order in which you entered them on reports,
displays, and printed purchase orders.
Answer N (No) to print all items in item-number sequence on reports, displays, and
printed purchase orders.
614
DO YOU WANT TO INTERFACE TO MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

PLANNING?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if you are installing or have installed the Material Requirements
Planning (MRP) application. This is the first step in providing the interface between
Purchasing and MRP. After you answer Y (Yes) to this question, activate the interface
through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate interfaces section
615
DO YOU WANT MULTIPLE CURRENCY SUPPORT IN PURCHASING AND

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to enter amounts in trading currency. The system converts the
amounts to local currency. Reports and displays show both trading and local
amounts where applicable. The system posts to General Ledger in local currency
only. If you accept the default, trading and local currency amounts are the same, and
the system assumes you use local currency.
616

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-175
Purchasing
Return to question 602. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
vendor performance constants. Continue to question 618.
617
DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE VENDOR AND BUYER PERFORMANCE?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to calculate interim performance for an order whenever an item or

release is completed. Only actuals are saved until the order is closed and purged.
Answer Y (Yes) to calculate the following at order closeout and purge:
Performance for each vendor

Performance for each item purchased from each vendor
Performance for each order for each item purchased from each vendor
Performance for each buyer.
Continue to the next question.

If, at a later time, you want to calculate vendor and buyer performance again, run the
questionnaire again and answer this and question 618 Y (Yes). The system clears all
present vendor and buyer performance calculations. You can start performance
calculations with fresh information.
Answer N (No) to not calculate vendor and buyer performance. If you answer N (No),
skip to question 634.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-176
Purchasing

618
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY VENDOR PERFORMANCE

CONSTANT INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so you
can enter information essential to vendor performance measurement. If this
application is already installed, answer Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you
want to change. If your answer is Y (Yes), continue to the next question.
619
DO YOU WANT TO CLEAR ALL VENDOR AND BUYER PERFORMANCE

STATISTICS?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to clear all vendor and buyer performance statistics in the current
environment. You should clear the vendor and buyer performance statistics in the
following situations:
If you have converted to MAPICS XA from a previous system
If you want to experiment with different weighting factors and alpha factors to see
the results
Answer N (No) to not clear the vendor and buyer performance statistics.
YOU WILL CLEAR ALL OF YOUR BUYER AND VENDOR PERFORMANCE
STATISTICS. DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE?
DFLT-N
This message warns you that you will clear all buyer and vendor performance
statistics. Answer Y (Yes) to clear all your calculated vendor and buyer performance
statistics.
Answer N (No) to not clear your performance statistics. Question 619 appears again.
Change your answer to question 619 to N (No).
Contents
Index
620
Exit
Page B-177
Purchasing
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR LEAD TIMES?

Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations to lead time.
621
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR QUANTITY

DELIVERED?
Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to differences between the quantity
ordered and quantity delivered.
622
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR QUALITY?

Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations in quality standards.
623
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR PRICE?

Enter the weighting factor you want to apply to deviations between standard and
actual price.
Note: The following weighting factors are secondary factors. See the Purchasing
Users Guide for more information about weighting factors.
624
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR DAYS EARLY?

Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case of early delivery to your dock.
625
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR DAYS LATE?

Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case of late delivery to your dock.
Contents
Index
626
Exit
Page B-178
Purchasing
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR LOW QUANTITY

DELIVERED?
Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case the quantity delivered to your
dock is less than you expected.
627
WHAT IS YOUR WEIGHTING FACTOR PERCENT FOR HIGH QUANTITY

DELIVERED?
Enter the weighting factor you want to assign in case the quantity delivered to your
dock is more than you expected.
628
WHAT IS YOUR ALPHA FACTOR FOR VENDOR PERFORMANCE

ANALYSIS?
The vendor rating on each order averages an overall rating for a vendor. The factor is
the ratio of the weight of each of the new values divided by the corresponding old
values. See Alpha factor/averaging calculations in the Inventory Management
Users Guide for more information.
629
DO YOU WANT TO INCLUDE FORCE CLOSED ORDERS FOR

PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to include orders that are force closed for vendor analysis. Answer N
(No) to not include force closed orders.
630
FOR PURPOSES OF PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS, SHOULD DATE RECEIVED

BE INTERPRETED AS THE FIRST DATE RECEIVED?
DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to use the first date received for days early or late measurement.
Answer N (No) to use the last date received for this comparison.
Contents
Index
631
Page B-179
Purchasing
Exit
FOR PURPOSES OF PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS, WHAT COST DO YOU

WISH TO USE FOR YOUR BASE STANDARD COST WHEN CALCULATING
PRICE?
DFLT-1
STANDARD UNIT COST OR (ITEMBL) OR UNIT COST DEFAULT

(ITEMASA)
STANDARD MATERIAL CONTENT THIS LEVEL (ITEMASB)
CURRENT MATERIAL CONTENT THIS LEVEL (ITEMASB)
AVERAGE COST (ITEMBL)
LAST COST (ITEMBL).
The system uses the cost you select to calculate the overall vendor performance
rating for each order/item/release. Select a 1 to default to unit cost.
632
DO YOU WANT VENDOR PERFORMANCE TO BE SENT TO HISTORY?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to calculate and send a vendor/item performance history record to

history for every inventory item on every order. If you answered Y (Yes) to question
608, the system creates an identical record for every miscellaneous item with a
receipt required on every order. You must answer Y (Yes) to get interim performance
on an order.
Answer N (No), the system does not send the vendor/item history record to history;
however, the system still calculates vendor/item performance and accumulates it in
the Vendor/Item and Vendor files.
633

VENDOR PERFORMANCE CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-180
Purchasing
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question 617. Answer N (No) to continue with
the questionnaire.
634
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY INVOICE CONSTANT

INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) so you
can enter information essential to invoice constants. If Purchasing is already
installed, answer Y (Yes) or N (No) depending on what you want to change.
If your answer is Y (Yes), continue to the next question.
Note:
If IFM is interfacing, questions 635 through 641 do not appear.
635
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN THE OVER

INVOICING OF MATERIAL QUANTITY VERSUS WHAT WAS RECEIVED?
Enter the percentage variance you allow the system to process without issuing a halt
code when it processes an invoice for a quantity greater than the amount ordered or
received.
636
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN THE UNDER

INVOICING OF MATERIAL QUANTITY VERSUS WHAT WAS RECEIVED?
code when it processes an invoice for a quantity less than the amount ordered or
received.
637
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN OVER

CHARGE OF THE INVOICE UNIT PRICE VERSUS WHAT WAS EXPECTED?
Enter the over-charge tolerance of the invoice unit price versus what you expected.
Contents
Index
638
Exit
Page B-181
Purchasing
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN UNDER

CHARGE OF THE INVOICE UNIT PRICE VERSUS WHAT WAS EXPECTED?
Enter the under-charge tolerance of the invoice unit price versus what you expected.
639
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN OVER

CHARGE OF THE INVOICE EXTENDED AMOUNT VERSUS WHAT WAS
EXPECTED?
code when it processes an invoice for an amount greater than the purchase order
amount.
640
WHAT PERCENTAGE VARIANCE DO YOU WANT TO ALLOW IN AN UNDER

CHARGE OF THE INVOICE EXTENDED AMOUNT VERSUS WHAT WAS
EXPECTED?
code when it processes an invoice for an amount less than the purchase order
amount.
641
DO YOU WANT TO ENTER VOUCHER NUMBER AS A SYSTEM CONTROL

MEDIUM?
DFLT-N
If your company uses vouchers or wants to introduce them for payables control and
reference, this question lets you use your own numbering scheme. Answer Y (Yes) to
use your own voucher number system as part of invoice entry. The maximum
sequence number is 99999 (five digits), and each invoice must be assigned a
unique voucher number per vendor.
Answer N (No) to let the Purchasing application assign voucher numbers as you
enter invoices. The sequence begins with the first open payables data you enter
when your Purchasing application is operational.
This question is asked from both Accounts Payable and Purchasing. The last
application to answer the question determines how the system creates voucher
numbers by both Accounts Payable and Purchasing.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-182
Purchasing
Note: Questions 642 to 654 appear only if you answered Y (Yes) to invoicing
question 602 and the Accounts Payable application is not installed. The explanation
that follows these questions is based on Purchasing installed without Accounts
Payable.
642
DO YOU WANT INVOICING COST ADJUSTMENTS PASSED TO IM?

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) to enter cost adjustments against line items. Purchasing passes
these adjustments to Inventory Management.
643
DO YOU WANT INVOICING MISCELLANEOUS CHARGE AND OUTSIDE

OPERATIONS PASSED TO PC&C?
DFLT-N
Appears if PC&C is installed. Answer Y (Yes) to enter miscellaneous charges or

outside operations against line items on invoices. Purchasing passes these charges
to PC&C.
644

DFLT-N
Purchasing can provide purchase journal transactions to General Ledger to track

your purchases. If Accounts Payable is installed, it can provide Cash Disbursements
transactions for your payments.
Answer Y (Yes) if you want the application to create these journal transactions. You
must answer Y (Yes) to activate an interface to the General Ledger application and to
automatically transfer these transactions to General Ledger.
Even if you have not installed nor plan to install the General Ledger application, you
can still take advantage of this feature. Enter your Chart of Accounts into the General
Ledger Master file so the system can edit the account numbers. The system
generates all transactions for your general ledger and writes them to the temporary
General Ledger file. You can then capture the transaction amount and transfer it to
your ledger.
This is the first step in providing the interface to General Ledger. After you answer Y
(Yes), you must activate the interface through Cross Application Support. See the
Activate/Deactivate Interfaces section of the CAS Users Guide for more
information.
Answer N (No) if you do not want the system to create any journal transactions. You
must manually enter these transactions into your general ledger using data entry.
The system creates no journal distribution reports.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-183
Purchasing
If this function is already active and you plan to change your response from Y (Yes)
to N (No), first, clear all entries from the Temporary General Ledger file. Run the
questionnaire again, and remove the numbers from the General Ledger Master and
Temporary General Ledger files. Use the RMVM command to do this if the Accounts
Receivable, Payroll, Financial Analysis, and General Ledger applications are not
installed.
Note:
If IFM is interfacing, questions 645 through 654 do not appear.
645
DO YOU WANT THE ITEM NUMBER PASSED TO GENERAL LEDGER AS

DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
If you answer Y (Yes) to this question, the item number will be passed to General
Ledger from those invoice detail lines that contain an item number. If the item number
is not present, the invoice detail line is passed to General Ledger. If neither the item
number nor the invoice detail description is present, the invoice header description
is passed to General Ledger.
If you answer N (No), the item number will never be passed to General Ledger. If the
item description is present, it is passed to General Ledger; otherwise, the invoice
description is passed.
This question is also asked in Accounts Payable.
646
DO YOU WANT TO ADD OR CHANGE ANY COMPANY CONSTANTS

RELATED TO INVOICE ENTRY?
DFLT-Y
When you first install the Purchasing application, you must answer Y (Yes) to see all
of the options and to enter essential information. If this application is already
installed, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what you want to change.
Answer N (No) and skip to Question 655.
647

RESPONSES WILL APPLY.
Enter a company number for each company you plan to install. Enter a number
between 1 and 89. The first time you answer this question, the company number
defaults to 1. Remember, if you install other applications that allow for multiple
companies, the company numbers and names should be consistent across all the
applications.
This question does not appear if you answered N (No) to question X03. In this case,
Contents
Index
Exit
648
Page B-184
Purchasing
Enter a name for each company number you plan to install. Enter the 15-character
company name you want to use as part of the headings on your reports. This name is
associated with the company number entered in question 647 or company 1 if you
answered N (No) question X03.
name that you have previously typed in for the particular company appears on the
last line as the default company name.
649

PAYABLE?
DFLT-0
Enter the general ledger number you want to credit when you enter invoices payable
to vendors. You can enter your own 15-digit account number.
You can have several accounts to which you credit invoices, such as notes payable
(2030), interest payable (2050), accounts payablevendors (2000). (The account
numbers in parentheses refer to numbers from the sample chart of accounts. Your
account numbers may be different.) The number requested by this question is for
invoices payable to vendors.
If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), the display shows a zero, but
Purchasing uses 9999998 as the default for the accounts payable account on all
applicable reports. You must also add the General Ledger number (either the
number you chose or the default9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.
The following applications reserve default general ledger account numbers to
Payroll9999997
Accounts Payable9999998.
To keep the system from posting an out-of-balance entry, applications use their
numbers if a valid account number is not available when the system posts a
transaction. If the system uses one of these numbers, manually transfer the entry to
the proper account before you close the period.
650

DFLT-0
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-185
Purchasing
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when you write
accounts payable checks. If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), the
display shows a zero, but Purchasing uses 9999998 as the default for accounts
payable on all applicable reports. Add the general ledger number (either the number
you chose or the default9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.
651
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR DISCOUNTS

EARNED?
DFLT-0
Enter the General Ledger account number you want to credit when you write
accounts payable checks and take any discount amounts. If you must distribute the
discounts earned account to multiple accounts, you can do so by making manual
journal entries.
If you do not enter a number, or if you enter a zero (0), the display shows a zero, but
Purchasing uses 9999998 as the default for accounts payable on all applicable
reports. Add the general ledger number (either the number you chose or the
default9999998) to the General Ledger Master file.
652
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR FREIGHT?
Enter the general ledger account number you want to use as the default freight
account during invoice entry. If you have the General Ledger application installed,
add the general ledger account number to the General Ledger master file; otherwise,
when the system uses this account number as a default, edit errors occur.
653
WHAT IS YOUR GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNT NUMBER FOR SALES TAX?
Enter the general ledger account number you want to use as the default sales tax
account during invoice entry. If you have the General Ledger application installed,
add the general ledger account number to the General Ledger master file; otherwise,
when the system uses this account number as a default, edit errors occur.
654
This question appears only if you answered Y (Yes) to question X03.

Answer Y (Yes) to tell the system if you have any more companies. Question 647
appears.
Answer N (No) to tell the system you have no more companies.
Contents
Index
655
Exit
Page B-186
Purchasing

INVOICE CONSTANT INFORMATION?
DFLT-Y
This question completes the Invoice Constants section of the questionnaire and
also completes the tailoring necessary for your Purchasing application. If you made
a mistake or want to change any of your responses, answer Y (Yes) and return to
question 634. Answer N (No) to end the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-187
Repetitive Production Management

Q01

REPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation, answer Y (Yes) so that the options are shown. During
reinstallation, answer either Y (Yes) or N (No).
If your answer is N (No), skip to question Q10.
Q02

PLANNING?
DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the MRP application is installed or is being installed at this
time.
Answer Y (Yes) to extract schedule requirements from MRP planned orders. MRP is
the primary source for schedule requirements. You can override MRP as a source for
individual items, using the extract source code in the Item Balance file.
Repetitive Production Management and MRP. After this installation run you must
Deactivate interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Q03

DFLT-N
Answer Y (Yes) only if the COM application is installed or is being installed at this
time. Answer Y (Yes) to extract schedule requirements from COM customer orders. If
COM is installed and interfacing, but MRP is not, then COM customer orders and the
Schedule Interface file are the primary sources for schedule requirements. You can
override the Extract Source Code using the extract source code in the Item Balance
file.
You must answer Y (Yes) to this question in order to be able to maintain customer
manufacturing dates from either COM and REP.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-188
Repetitive Production Management and COM. After this installation run you must
Deactivate interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide.
Q04

DFLT- N
Q05

DFLT-N
If your answer is N (No), transaction details will not be saved in the Transaction
Extract file. If your answer is Y(Yes), the Create Ledger Entries function will keep
transaction details for IFM G/L lines in the Transaction Extract file.
This question appears only when IFM is installed and you have answered Y(Yes) to
Do you want to have General Ledger distribution?.
Q06
WHAT PERCENTAGE OF A PRODUCTION LINES AVAILABLE HOURS WILL

BE USED FOR THE LOWER LIMIT?
LOW-0 HILIM=100 DFLT-75
Type in the percentage that determines if a production line is underloaded in

comparison to total available hours. Available hours are the sum of desired shift
hours in the line capacity record for a production line on a given day.
This question affects the daily production line schedule hours edit on the Sequence
Schedule displays. Daily line schedule hours below this percentage are highlighted.
Contents
Index
Q07
Page B-189
Exit
DO YOU WANT TO USE ADDITIONAL OPERATION DESCRIPTIONS?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) if you need more than 20 characters of text for your manufacturing
schedule operation descriptions in order to create the Manufacturing Order Routing
Description file. This file allows you to enter up to 999 lines of 40-character text for
each operation. If you do not need additional operation descriptions, answer N (No).
If you answer Y (Yes), you must also answer Y (Yes) to PDM question E09 or EPDM
question D09.
Q08
DO YOU WANT TO KEEP HISTORY FOR PURGED SCHEDULES?

DFLT-Y
Answer Y (Yes) to have records being purged from the manufacturing order files
retained in schedule purge files:
Data purged from:
Will be retained in:
MOMAST
MOHMST
MOROUT
MOHRTG
MODATA
MOHDTA
You have the responsibility for managing and deleting data in these schedule purge
files (MOHMST, MOHRTG, and MOHDTA), as required.
Answer N (No) to purge schedules without retaining purged records.
Q09

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question Q02. Answer N (No) to continue the
questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Page B-190
Exit

Q10

REPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation you must answer Y (Yes) so that essential information can be
entered. During reinstallation, you can answer Y or N, depending on what needs to
be changed.
If you answer N (No), the questionnaire is completed.
Q11

REPETITIVE PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT RECORDS WHEN THEY ARE
MAINTAINED?
DFLT-Y
To provide an audit trail of master file maintenance changes, answer Y (Yes).

If you answer N (No), neither the before nor the after lines are printed on the
maintenance edit lists.
Q12
WHAT PRINT SEQUENCE DO YOU WANT FOR REQUESTED REPETITIVE

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT REPORTS?
1 - PRODUCTION LINE
2 - ITEM
This question selects the sequence of the information in these reports:
Schedule Performance Report

Released Schedules Report
Production Schedules Report
Item/Line Process Report
Item/Line Report
Answer with one of the following codes for the sequence you want:
1
REPORTS ARE SEQUENCED BY PRODUCTION LINE AS THE

PRIMARY SEQUENCING FIELD.
REPORTS ARE SEQUENCED BY ITEM AS THE PRIMARY

SEQUENCING FIELD.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-191
You can override this response by using each of the report options shown when you
run the program.
Q13
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT BAR CODES AND ENLARGED CHARACTERS?

DFLT-N
This question appears only if the PM&C application is installed and interfacing with
Repetitive Production Management.
Answer Y (Yes) to print bar codes on pick lists, container labels, component return
lists, and production reporting lists. In addition, you can print enlarged print on
container labels. If you answer Y (Yes), production line, line location, component,
and supply location appear in enlarged type on container information printed on
these labels. Printers with special characteristics (IPDS printers) are required to print
bar codes and enlarged type.
Answer N (No) to print pick lists, container labels, component return lists, and
production reporting lists without bar codes and enlarged characters.
Q14

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
questions, answer Y (Yes) to return to question Q10.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-192
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-193
Sales Analysis
Sales Analysis
S01
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE ANY FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS FOR SALES

ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
and enter essential information. If this application is already installed and interfacing,
you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
If you answer N (No), skip to question S07.
S02
HOW DO YOU WANT TO CALCULATE YOUR GROSS PROFIT PERCENT?

0=PERCENT OF SALES, 1=PERCENT OF COST
Choose the method that best suits your needs. Enter 0 to calculate gross profit as a
percent of gross sales; enter 1 to calculate gross profit as a percent of cost.
S03
SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE ACCOUNTS

RECEIVABLE APPLICATION?
DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if you have previously installed AR and the AR interface is
not already active.
Answer Y (Yes) if AR is to interface with SA.
Answering Y (Yes) to this question is the first step towards installing and interfacing
SA and AR. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the interface
through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter
Contents
Index
S04
Exit
Page B-194
Sales Analysis
SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE CUSTOMER ORDER

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if you have previously installed COM and the COM
interface is not already active.
Answer Y (Yes) if COM is to interface with SA.
SA and COM. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must activate the
interface through Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate
Interfaces chapter of the CAS Users Guide for more information.
S05
SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS INTERFACE WITH THE INVENTORY

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if you have previously installed IM and the IM interface is
not already active.
Answer Y (Yes) if IM is to interface with SA.
SA and IM. After answering Y (Yes) to this question, you must interface through
Cross Application Support. See the Activate/Deactivate Interfaces chapter of the
CAS Users Guide for more information.
The following statement appears if none of the interfacing applications (AR, COM,
and IM) has been selected to interface with SA.
IN ORDER TO INSTALL SALES ANALYSIS, YOU MUST INTERFACE WITH
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE, CUSTOMER ORDER MANAGEMENT, OR INVENTORY
MANAGEMENTPRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
S06

FUNCTIONAL OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
return to question S02. Answer N (No) to begin the next section on defining the
constants options.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-195
Sales Analysis

S07

SALES ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
If you are installing this application for the first time, you must answer Y (Yes) so that
essential information to run the company can be entered. If this application is already
installed and interfacing, you can answer either Y (Yes) or N (No), depending upon
what needs to be changed.
If your answer is N (No), skip to question S16.
S08
SHOULD SALES ANALYSIS CLOSE AUTOMATICALLY UPDATE THE

CUSTOMER AND ITEM CLASS CODES?
DFLT-N
If you wish, Sales Analysis will update every summary record for the current fiscal
year during each Sales Analysis Close with the current value of class stored in the
Customer and Item Master files.
Answer Y (Yes) if you want this processing to occur during Sales Analysis Close.
Answer N (No) if you want to manually update the class values using file
maintenance to match the master files or to purposely be different from the master
files.
Note: Question S09 is not shown if you answered N (No) to question X03. the
company number is always 1 in this case.
S09

The number you enter must be from 1 to 89. The first company number defaults to a
1. Remember that if you install other applications that allow for multiple companies,
the company numbers and names should be consistent across all the applications.
S10
The 15-character company name entered at this time is used as part of the headings
on your reports. This name is associated with the company number entered in
question S09 or company 1 if the question was not shown. A name must be entered
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-196
Sales Analysis
for each company number you plan to enter. This is the only way the system can
determine that the company is active and the number is valid.
The default company name appears on the last line of the prompt. The first time you
answer this question, the default is blank. After that, the company name that you
have previously typed in for the particular company appears.
Note:
Question S11 is not shown if you answered Y (Yes) to question X01.
S11
IN WHAT MONTH DOES YOUR FISCAL YEAR BEGIN?

1 = JANUARY
The computer assumes that each company has an independent accounting cycle
for the 12-month accounting year. The answer to this question tells Sales Analysis in
which month to begin year-to-date calculations. If you elected 13-period accounting
system (question X01), this question does not appear.
Enter the number that corresponds to the first month that you want your fiscal year to
begin.
Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise, unpredictable
results may occur.
Note:
The 13-period accounting year always starts with period 1.
S12
WHAT IS YOUR CURRENT PROCESSING MONTH/PERIOD?

1 = JANUARY OR PERIOD
Enter the number that corresponds to the month or period that you want current data
entered to be posted.
Note: If you are retailoring, leave this answer unchanged; otherwise, unpredictable
results may occur.
S13
IN WHAT MONTH/PERIOD WAS YOUR LAST SALES ANALYSIS CLOSE? 1 =

JANUARY OR PERIOD 1
If this is the initial installation of Sales Analysis, enter a number that corresponds to
one period prior to the current period. For example, in 12 month processing, if the
current period is 1, then enter 12 for the last Sales Analysis close.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-197
Sales Analysis
If this is not the initial installation of Sales Analysis, enter the number of the period or
month last closed by either a Sales Analysis close or a year-end close.
Notes:
1. At the end of a reporting period, after Reporting Period Close and before
Sales Analysis Close, the last Sales Analysis close field is two periods prior to
the current field (assuming that you close at the end of each period).
2. Question S14 is not shown if you answered N (No) to question X33.
S14

DFLT-N
This question is a decision or test point for the system to determine if all your
companies have been entered. Answer Y (Yes) to return to question S09 to enter the
next company number and name (questions S09 and S10). When all your companies
are entered, answer N (No) to this question and continue with the rest of the
questionnaire.
S15

SYSTEM CONSTANTS?
DFLT-Y
return to question S08. Answer N (No) to continue with the questionnaire.

S16
DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE OR ADD ANY REPORT OPTIONS FOR SALES

ANALYSIS?
DFLT-Y
During initial installation, you should answer Y (Yes) so that the options are shown to
you. If this application is already installed and interfacing, you can answer Y (Yes) or
N (No), depending on what needs to be changed.
S17
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE CUSTOMERS ONLY?

DFLT-N
Contents
Index
Exit
Page B-198
Sales Analysis
This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either AR or COM.

You may choose to print all customers on the customer reports or only those
customers that have had sales activity during the current reporting period.
Answering Y (Yes) causes all customers to be printed on the reports. Answering N
(No) causes only those customers with sales activity during the current reporting
period to be printed on the reports.
S18
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE ITEMS ONLY?

DFLT-N
This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either COM or IM.

You may choose to print all items selected for SA on the item reports or only those
items selected for SA with activity during the current reporting period.
Answering Y (Yes) causes all items selected for SA to be printed on the reports.
Answering N (No) causes only those items selected for SA with activity during the
current reporting period to print on the reports.
S19
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT ACTIVE SALESREPS ONLY?

DFLT-N
You may choose to print all sales representatives selected for SA on the salesrep
reports or only those sales representatives selected for SA with activity during the
current reporting period.
Answering Y (Yes) causes all sales representatives selected for SA to be printed on
the reports. Answering N (No) causes only those sales representatives selected for
SA with activity during the current reporting period to print on the reports.
S20
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT REPORTS AT MONTH/PERIOD OR YEAR-END

CLOSE?
DFLT-Y
If you answer N (No) to this question, you may manually choose, prior to updating the
files, to print certain reports at month or period close and at year-end close. If you
answer Y (Yes) to this question, the reports you select are printed automatically. You
may also print other reports by manual selection prior to updating the files.
Contents
Index
S21
Exit
Page B-199
Sales Analysis
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY CUSTOMER?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either AR or COM.

Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Customer to be printed prior to month or
period close and year-end close.
Answering N (No) causes month or period close and year-end close to update the
files without printing Sales Analysis by Customer.
S22
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY ITEM?

DFLT-Y
This question is asked only if SA interfaces with either COM or IM.

Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Item to be printed prior to month or
files without printing Sales Analysis by Item.
S23
DO YOU WANT TO PRINT SALES ANALYSIS BY SALESREP?

DFLT-N
Answering Y (Yes) causes Sales Analysis by Salesrep to be printed prior to month or

files without printing Sales Analysis by Salesrep.
The following statement appears if none of the month/period or year-end close
reports have been selected.
REPORT(S) HAVE BEEN SELECTED TO PRINT AT MONTH/PERIOD OR YEAR-END
CLOSE AT LEAST ONE REPORT MUST BE SELECTED PRESS ENTER TO
CONTINUE
Contents
Index
S24
Exit
Page B-200
Sales Analysis

REPORT OPTIONS?
DFLT-Y
If you made a mistake or want to change any of your responses in the Define report
options section, answer Y (Yes) to return to question S17. Answer N (No) to
complete the questionnaire.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-1
Special forms
Appendix C. Special forms

This appendix gives you information about the special forms that you need for some
MAPICS XA applications.
Overview.................................................................................................................. C-2
Accounts Payable ................................................................................................... C-4
Accounts Receivable .............................................................................................. C-9
Customer Order Management .............................................................................. C-16
Manufacturing Performance Analysis ................................................................... C-20
Payroll.................................................................................................................... C-21
Production Control and Costing ............................................................................ C-29
Production Monitoring and Control........................................................................ C-32
Purchasing ............................................................................................................ C-49
Repetitive Production Management ...................................................................... C-61
Contents
Index
Page C-2
Special forms
Exit
Overview
Some application reports require special forms other than the standard size
computer forms. Depending on the application function, these special forms have
preprinted headings or are blank and the application prints the headings. This
chapter contains, by application, the samples and suggested layouts for the
preprinted forms and the samples and dimensions for the blank forms.
When you need a special form, the printer stops and sends a message containing
the form type you should load into the printer. For example, the form type for PM&C
labor tickets is LABORTKT and the form type for standard computer paper is *STD.
(You find the form type in the beginning of the discussion of forms for each
application.) After you indicate that the form is loaded, you may see additional
messages for assistance with forms alignment.
For example, when you print Accounts Payable or Payroll checks, the first check
printed is for alignment purposes. A line of information prints, printing stops, and a
message is shown. You can then check and adjust the alignment. Depending on
your response to the message, either the alignment process is repeated or checks
are printed. The check printed during alignment is always voided.
At the end of any printing operation with special forms, printing again stops. System
messages tell you to load another special form or to load the printer with standard
computer paper.
Be sure to refer to the manual that comes with your printer for any additional
instructions.
The following table summarizes the special forms by application.
Application
Form
Type
Description
Accounts Payable
Vendor check
CKxx
Preprinted
Remittance advice
RAxx
Preprinted
1099
1099
Government
Statement type 1 or 2
S00
Preprinted
Delinquency notice
DELQ
Preprinted
Acknowledgment
ACKNOWLEDG
Preprinted
Invoice
INVOICE
Preprinted
Quote
QUOTE
Preprinted
Manufacturing Performance
Analysis
Inventory tags
TAGS
Blank
Payroll
Employee check type

1 or 2
PCxx
Preprinted
941A
941A
Government
W-2
W-2
Government
Labor ticket
LT01 or LABORTKT (if

PM&C is installed)
Preprinted
Accounts Receivable
Customer Order
Management
Production Control and

Costing
Contents
Index
Page C-3
Special forms
Exit
Application
Form
Type
Description
Production Monitoring and

Control
Employee badge
EMPBDG
Blank
Temporary employee
badge
TMPEMPBDG
Blank
Labor ticket
LABORTKT
Preprinted
or blank
Physical inventory tag
INVTAGS
Blank
Quality control ticket manufactured,

purchased, or cyclic
items
QCTKTMQ,
QCTKTPQ, or
QCTKTCQ
Preprinted
or blank
Manufacturing order
receiving ticket
MFGTKT
Preprinted
or blank
Purchase order
receiving ticket
PURTKT
Preprinted
or blank
Debit memo
DBFM
Preprinted
Purchase order
formats - vendor
acknowledgment
POFM3
Preprinted
Quotation request
QUOTEFORM4
Preprinted
Container label single or double

format
CLBLS-1UP or
CLBLS-2UP
Blank
Purchasing
Repetitive Production
Management
Note:
1BAxx2 is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI acknowledgments.
2BIxx2 is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI invoices.
3POFM-EDI is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI purchase orders.
4QTE-EDI is the form type for printed backup copies of EDI quotation orders.
Contents
Index
Page C-4
Special forms
Exit
Accounts Payable
Form
Type
Description
Vendor checks
CKxx, where xx is the company number for

which checks are being written. If you have
only one company, xx is always 01.
Preprinted
Remittance advice
RAxx, where xx is the company number
Preprinted
1099 Miscellaneous form

(not shown in this appendix)
1099
Government
Vendor checks
The check stub lists up to 12 invoices that may be included in the check total. If
invoices overflow the check stub, the system prints CONTINUED ON REMITTANCE
ADVICE on line 17, in positions 22 through 51. If the payment is to an assignee, the
vendors name and address print on the check stub.
Form width:
8-1/2 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)
Form length:
7 (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)
First body line:
Last body line:
17
First total line:
19
Last total line:
19
Page number line:
21
First check line:
26
Last check line:
38
Fits standard #10 window envelope.
Contents
Index
Page C-5
Special forms
Exit
X
INVOICE NO.
0
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
52
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
INVOICE DATE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V E NDO R
/ 10/ * *
/ 10/ * *
/ 10/ * *
/ 10/ * *
/ 11/ * *
/ 11/ * *
/ 11/ * *
/ 11/ * *
/ 11/ * *
/ 12/ * *
/ 12/ * *
CHECK NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
GROSS AMOUNT
J OHN SON & P A RT NE RS CO.

8 X 1 0 C AM E RA
2 1 / 4 C AM E R A
5 5 MM L E N S
2 8 MM L E N S
B & W E N L A RG E R
CO L O R E N L A RG E R
CHEM I CA L S
TON E R
T H E RMOM E T E R S
B A C KG ROUN D S
S TUD I O L I GH T S
C O N T I N U E D O N R EMM I T T A N C E
TOTALS
132
DISCOUNT
CHECK
575
324
85
115
150
375
65
20
35
320
650
ADV
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
NET AMOUNT
11 / 20 / * *
575 .
324 .
85 .
115 .
150 .
375 .
65 .
20 .
35 .
320 .
650 .
DA TE
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
CE
3 , 056 . 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 , 056 . 00
P0001
CHECK DATE
CHECK NO.
11 / 20 / * *
132
CHECK AMOUNT
* * * * * * * 3 ,056 .00
THREE
THOU S AND
TO TH E
ORDE R O F
F I FTY - S I X
AND
00 / 100 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
J OHN SON & PA R T N E R S CO .

SO U T H C O U R TWR I G H T
BUF FALO NY
20155 - 0532
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE
Figure C-1. Accounts Payable vendor check sample
Contents
Index
Page C-6
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
INVOICE DATE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
GROSS AMOUNT
DESCRIPTION
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DISCOUNT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
NET AMOUNT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTALS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PXXX
CHECK DATE
XXXXXXXX
CHECK NO.
XXXXXX
CHECK AMOUNT
E
OF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Figure C-2. Accounts Payable vendor check form layout
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3.5 inches
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7 inches
XXXXXX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
X
6
X
7
X
X
8
X
9
X 10
X 11
X 12
X 13
X 14
X 15
X 16
X 17
18
X 19
20
X 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
X X 30
X X 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
3.5 inches
Perforation
line
1 X
2
3
INVOICE NO.
4
5
XXXXXXXX
6
XXXXXXXX
7
XXXXXXXX
8
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
9
XXXXXXXX
10
11
XXXXXXXX
12
XXXXXXXX
13
XXXXXXXX
14
XXXXXXXX
15
XXXXXXXX
16
XXXXXXXX
17
XXXXXXXX
18
CHECK NUMBER
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30 X X X X X X X X X
31 X X X X X X X X X
32
33
34
35
36
TO TH
ORDE R
37
38
39
40
41
42
Contents
Index
Page C-7
Special forms
Exit
Remittance advice
When all the invoices paid by an Accounts Payable check cannot be listed on the
check stub, the additional invoices are listed separately on this form.
Form width:
Form length:
Page number line:
First body line:
Last body line:
38
First total line:
40
Last total line:
40
Fits standard #10 envelope.
P0 0 01
INVOICE NO.
0
L
L
L
L
0
T
T
T
T
0
5
5
5
5
452
5
6
7
8
CHECK NUMBER
INVOICE DATE
V ENDOR
11 / 1 2 /
11 / 1 2 /
11 / 1 2 /
11 / 1 2 /
*
*
*
*
DESCRIPTION
J OH N SON & P A R T N E R S
* L I GH T MOU N T S
* CL OSE - UP L ENSES
* 5 0 - 2 0 0 MM Z OOM
* SC RE ENS
1 32
TOTALS
GROSS AMOUNT
DISCOUNT
CHECK
CO .
7
3
20
4
0
0
0
2
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 , 056 . 00
Figure C-3. Accounts Payable Remittance Advice sample
DATE
NET AMOUNT
11 / 20 / * *
7
3
2 0
4
0
0
0
2
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3 , 056 . 00
Contents
Index
Page C-8
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
PXXXX 2
INVOICE NO.
XXXXXXXXXX
GROSS AMOUNT
DISCOUNT
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTALS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Figure C-4. Accounts Payable Remittance Advice forms layout
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
NET AMOUNT
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
3.5 inches
CHECK NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7 inches
XXXXXXXXXX
INVOICE DATE
XXXXXXXX
3.5 inches
Fold
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Contents
Index
Page C-9
Special forms
Exit
Accounts Receivable
Form
Type
Description
Statements type 1 or 2
S00
Preprinted
Delinquency notice
DELQ
Preprinted
Statement type 1 (standard window statement)

Line item for each invoice, payment, and adjustment
Summarized aging for customer account
Tear strip
Date of line item on tear strip
Form width:
11 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters to the inch)
Form length:
8-1/2 (vertical spacing is 6 lines to the inch)
First body line:
3
Number of detail lines: 22
Last body line:
49
Contents
Index
Page C-10
Special forms
Exit
DATE
PAGE
0 1 / 29 / * *
1
CO
DATE
PAGE
01 / 29 / * *
CUSTOMER
CO
10 0
CUSTOMER
100
AP PO L LO SU PPL Y C O .
6 2 5 WEST OGL E THORPE A VE .
AT L A N TA
GA 3 0 1 0 1 - 2 97 8
THANK YOU FOR YOUR
BUS I NESS W I TH GOOD W I SHE S
FOR A HA PP Y NEW YEA R
DATE
1 1 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
11 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
12 / 15 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
12 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
12 / 3 0 / * *
01 / 29 / * *
TRN
REFER.
NUMBER
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
ADJ
10 1
10 1
102
10 2
103
10 3
10 4
10 4
10 4
CURRENT
35 . 40
PAST 90
50 . 00
CURRENCY
CURRENCY
CASH RECEIVED
ADJUSTMENT AMT.
AMOUNT
DISCOUNT
95 0 . 00
1 , 00 0 . 00
1 , 000 . 00
800 . 00
ADJ - 1
5 0 . 0 0 1 , 1 10 . 0 0
50 . 00 1 , 0 80 . 00
50 . 00 1 , 000 . 00
. 00 1 , 0 00 . 0 0
. 00 1 , 025 . 00
25 . 00 1 , 025 . 00
80 . 00 1 , 100 . 00
20 . 00
820 . 00
80 . 00
31 . 65
3 . 75
DATE
11 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
11 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
1 2 / 15 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
12 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
0 1 / 15 / * *
12 / 30 / * *
0 1 / 29 / * *
TRN
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
ADJ
REFER.
NUMBER
10 1
10 1
10 2
10 2
10 3
10 3
10 4
104
10 4
AMOUNT
1 , 1 10 . 0 0
1 , 080 . 00 1 , 000 . 00
1 , 000 . 00 1 , 025 . 00
1 , 025 . 00 1 , 10 0 . 0 0
820 . 00 80 . 00 31 . 65
3 . 75
PAST 60
PAST 30
200 . 00
PAST 120
. 00
AMOUNT DUE
. 00
EURO TOTAL
. 00
TOTAL DUE
PLEASE PAY THIS AMOUNT
EURO TOTAL
SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE
2 5 0 . 0 0 A T 1 8 . 0 0% APR
SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE
2 5 0 . 0 0 A T 1 8 . 0 0%
APR
Figure C-5. Accounts Receivable Statement type 1 sample
285 . 40
3 , 456 . 78
Contents
Index
Page C-11
Special forms
Exit
11 inches
11111111111
1 11 11 1 1 1 1 12 22 2 22 2 22 2 3 33 33 33 33 3 4 4 4 444 44 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 55 5 5 5 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 67 77 7 7 77 77 7 8 888 8 8 88 8 899 9 9 9 99 9 9 9 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 1
12 3456 78 9 0 12 34 5 6 7 8 90 12 3 45 6 78 9 0 12 34 56 78 9 0 1 2 345 67 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 90 12 3 4 56 78 9 0 123 4 5 67 8 901 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 89 0
Fold
XX
PAGE
XXXXXX
DATE
XX / XX / XX
DATE
XX / XX / XX
CO CUSTOMER
XX XXXXXX XX
PAGE
XX XXXX
CO CUSTOMER
X X X X X XX X XX
XX XXXXX X XXX X XXXXXXX X XX XX

XXX XXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
DATE
REFER.
TRN NUMBER
CASH RECEIVED
ADJUSTMENT AMT.
CURRENCY
XXXXXXXXXX XXXX
DISCOUNT
AMOUNT
X X / X X / XX X XX X XX X XX X X X XX X X X X XX X XX X X X X X . X X - X X XX X X X X X X X XX X . X X -
CURRENCY
XXXX XXXXXX XXXX
DATE
REFER.
TRN NUMBER
Fold
AMOUNT
X X / X X / X X X XX X X X X XX XX XX X X X XX X X . X X -
8.5 inches
Fold
1X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Fold
PAST 60
CURRENT
PAST 30
XX X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - XX X X X X X X X X X X X . XX PAST 90
PAST 120
AMOUNT DUE
XX X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - XX X X X X X X X X X X X . XX EURO TOTAL
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X
TOTAL DUE
XX XXXX X XXX X XX . X X EURO TOTAL
XX XXXX X XXX X XX . X X SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE
X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X XX XX X X X X X X X X
Perforation
line
Figure C-6. Accounts Receivable Statement type 1 layout
Contents
Index
Page C-12
Special forms
Exit
Statement type 2 (standard spread window statement)

Line item for each invoice, payment, and adjustment
Summarized aging for customer account
Aging by line item
Tear strip
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
3
Last body line:
50
XX
PAGE
DATE
01 / 29 / * *
DATE
01 / 29 / * *
CO CUSTOMER
1
100
PAGE
1
CO CUSTOMER
1
100
APOL L O SUPP L Y CO .
6 2 5 WES T OGL E THORPE A VE .
A T L AN T A
GA 3 0 3 0 1 - 2 9 7 6
THANK YOU FOR YOUR

BUS I NES S WI TH GOOD WI SHES
FOR A HA PP Y NEW YEAR
REFER.
TRN NUMBER
DATE
11 / 30 /
0 1 / 15 /
11 / 30 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 1 5 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 30 /
0 1 / 15 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 30 /
0 1 / 29 /
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
AD J
1 01
10 1
102
102
103
103
104
104
104
CURRENT
35 . 00
PAST 90
50 . 00
AGE
TOTAL
AMOUNT 1
PA S T 9 0
PA S T 9 0
PA S T 3 0
PA S T 3 0
PA S T 3 0
PA S T 3 0
PA S T 3 0
PA S T 3 0
CURRENT
CURREN T
PAST 60
. 00
AMOUNT DUE
. 00
2 5 0 . 0 0 A T 1 8 . 0 0 % APR
Figure C-7. Accounts Receivable Statement type 2 sample
REFER.
TRN NUMBER
DATE
11 / 30 /
0 1 / 15 /
11 / 30 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 15 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 3 0 /
0 1 / 15 /
0 1 / 15 /
12 / 30 /
0 1 / 29 /
1 , 110 . 00
1 , 060 . 00
1 , 000 . 00
1 , 000 . 00
1 , 025 . 00
1 , 025 . 00
1 , 100 . 00
820 . 00
80 . 00
3 1 . 65
3 . 75
PAST 30
200 . 00
PAST 120
. 00
EURO TOTAL
SC CAL CUL A T ED ON B A L ANCE OF
CURRENCY
CURRENCY
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
I NV
PMT
AD J
10 1
10 1
10 2
102
103
10 3
104
10 4
10 4
AMOUNT
1 , 11 0 . 0 0
1 , 060 . 00 1 , 000 . 00
1 , 000 . 00 1 , 025 . 00
1 , 025 . 00 1 , 100 . 00
820 . 00 80 . 00 3 1 . 65
3 . 75
TOTAL DUE
285 . 40
EURO TOTAL
3 , 456 . 78
SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE OF
2 5 0 . 0 0 A T 1 8 . 0 0 % A PR
Contents
Index
Page C-13
Special forms
Exit
11 inches
11111111111
1 11 11 1 1 1 1 12 22 2 22 2 22 2 3 33 3 3 33 33 3 4 4 4 444 44 4 455 5 55 55 5 55 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 67 7 77 7 77 77 78 88 88 88 8 8 8 999 99 99 9 9 9 0 00 00 00 0 00 1
12 3 456 789 0 12 34 5 6 7 8 90 12 3 45 6 78 9 0 12 3 4 56 78 9 0 1 2 345 67 8 901 2 34 56 7 89 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 90 1 23 4 56 78 90 12 34 56 7 8 9 012 34 56 7 8 9 0 12 34 56 7 89 0
Fold
XX
DATE
X X / XX / XX
PAGE
XXXXX X
PAGE
XX XXXX
DATE
XX / XX / XX
CO CUSTOMER
XX XXXXXX XX
CO
XX
CUSTOMER
XX XXXX XX
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
X X X X XX X X XX X X XXX XX XX X XX XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X
X X X X XX X X XX X X XXX XX XX X XX XX XX X X X X X X X X X X X XX X
DATE
REFER
TRN NUMBER
AGE
CURRENCY
X XX X X X XX X X X X XX
CURRENCY
XXXXXXXXXX XXXX
AMOUNT
TOTAL
X X / X X / X X X XX X XX X XX X X X XX X XX X XX X XX X X X X X . X X - XX X X X X XX X X X XX X . X X -
DATE
REFER.
TRN NUMBER
X X / X X / X X X X X XX X X XX
AMOUNT
XXX XXXX X XX X . X X -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 Fold
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 Fold
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
8.5 inches
Fold
1 X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
PAST 60
CURRENT
PAST 30
XX X X X X X X X X X X X . XX - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . XX PAST 90
PAST 120
AMOUNT DUE
XX X X X X X X X X X X X . XX - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X - X X X X X X X X X X X X X . XX EURO TOTAL
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
TOTAL DUE
X XX XX XX X XX X X X . X X EURO TOTAL
X X XXX XX X XX XX X . XX SC CALCULATED ON BALANCE
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X
XX X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X XX X X XXX
Perforation
line
Figure C-8. Accounts Receivable Statement type 2 layout
Contents
Index
Page C-14
Special forms
Exit
Delinquency notice
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
3
Last body line:
19
X
DATE
CO
01 / 29 / * *
CUSTOMER
CURRENT
CURRENCY
10 0
PAST 30
35 . 40
PAST 60
. 00
200 . 00
TH I S I S A
DEL I NQUENCY NOT I CE
PAST 90
PAST 120
TOTAL DUE
50 . 00
. 00
285 . 40
APOL LO SUPPL Y CO .
DELINQUENT AMT.
6 2 5 WEST OGL ETHORPE AVE .

AT LANTA
GA 3 0 3 0 1 - 2 9 7 6
EURO TOTAL
250 . 00
3 , 456 . 78
Figure C-9. Delinquency notice sample
10 inches
1
1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888888899999999 990
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 890
DATE
XXXXXXXX
CURRENT
CO
XX
CUSTOMER
CURRENCY
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PAST 30
PAST 60
XXXXXXXXXXXXX . XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX . XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX . XX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PAST 90
PAST 120
TOTAL DUE
XXXXXXXXXXXXX . XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX . XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX . XX

Figure C-10. Delinquency notice layout
DELINQUENT AMOUNT
EURO TOTAL
XXXXXXXXXXX XX . XX
XXXXXXXXXXX XX . XX
X 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
3.5 inches
1X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Contents
Index
Page C-15
Special forms
Exit
9.5"
1.5"
0.825"
1.5"
4.5"
0.5"
Figure C-11. Standard number 10 window envelope
Contents
Index
Page C-16
Special forms
Exit

Form
Type
Description
Acknowledgment
ACKNOWLEDG
Preprinted
Invoice
INVOICE
Preprinted
Quote
QUOTE
Preprinted
Acknowledgment, Invoice, and Quote

Form width:
8-1/2 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch)
Form length:
11 (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)
First body line:
2
Last body line:
65
Fits standard #10 window envelope
Contents
Index
Page C-17
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
DATE
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
S
H
I
P
T
O
S
O
L
D
XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX X XXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
X XXXX XX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX X XXXXX XX
X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX XX
XXXXXXX X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX XX
99
SLS.REP.
ORDER
99999999
XX XXXXXXX
99999
9999
CURRENCY
EXPORT
XXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
X XXXXX X XXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXXX XX XX XXX X XXXXX XX
XXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX X XXXXX XX
T
O
CUSTOMER
PAGE
99 / 99 / 99
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X
XXX
XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX
TERMS
P. O. NUMBER
P. O. REV.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS
XX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
LINE NO.
ITEM NUMBER/DESCRIPTION
U/M
QUANTITY/PRICE
NET SALES AMOUNT
11 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
NET SALES
MISC CHARGES
FREIGHT
TAXES
9
9
9
9
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
.
.
.
.
99
99
99
99
TRADE DISCOUNT 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 TERMS DISCOUNT 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 XXX
TO T A L :
9 , 999 , 999 , 999 , 999 . 99 ORDER 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -
TOTAL
Figure C-12. Customer Order Management Acknowledgment preprinted form
Contents
Index
Page C-18
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
INVOICE
X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
999999999
S
H
I
P
T
O
S
O
L
D
T
O
99
ORDER
SHIP NO.
99 99999
LINE NO.
XXXXXXXXX
SLS.REP.
99999
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS
X X XX XX XXXX XX XXXX XX X XXX X XXX X XXX
LINE NUMBER/DESCRIPTION
9999
U/M
DATE
99 / 99 / 99
DUE ON
99 / 99 / 99
EXPORT
CURRENCY
XXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX XX XXX X XX
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X XX X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX XX X X X XX XX X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X XX X X X X X XX X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X XX X XX XX XX X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXX X X XX XX XX X XX X XX
99999999
99 999999
XXXX
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X
CUSTOMER
INVOICE PAGE
TERMS
SELLER TAX I.D.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SHIP DATE
P.O. REV.
XXXXXXX
SHIP WEIGHT
99 , 999 , 999 . 999 -
99 / 99 / 99
QUANTITY/PRICE
NET SALES AMOUNT
11 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
* - Q T Y . D I SC .
M U L T I - O RD E R I N VO I C E
NET SALES
9 , 999 , 999 , 999 ,
MISC CHARGES
99, 999, 999,
FREIGHT
99, 999, 999,
TAXES
99, 999, 999,
I NC L UDED
O R D E R A MO UN T D U E = 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 TRADE DISCOUNT 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 .
999. 99TERMS DISCOUNT 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 .
999. 99999. 99X X X TO T A L : 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 .
AMOUNT 9 9
999. 99-
Figure C-13. Customer Order Management Invoice preprinted form
DUE
99 99 99 , 999, 999, 999. 99-
Contents
Index
Page C-19
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
DATE
QUOTE
X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X XX X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
99 / 99 / 99
PAGE
9999
EXPIRATION DATE
99 / 99 / 99
S
H
I
P
T
O
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X XXX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XX XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXX X XX XXXX X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X XXX X XXXX X XX
EXPORT
CURRENCY
XXX
X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X
S XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
O XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXXX
L X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X XX X X X X
D X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX XXX X X X XXX XX
TERMS
T XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX X XXX XX XXX X X XX XXX XX

O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XXXXX X XXXX XX X
CUSTOMER
99
QUOTE
99999999
SLS.REP.
XXXXXXXXX
LINE NO.
ITEM NUMBER/DESCRIPTION
NET SALES
MISC. CHARGES
9
9
9
9
CONTACT
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX
XXXXX
U/M
QUANTITY/PRICE
NET SALES AMOUNT
11 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
FREIGHT
TAXES
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
,
,
,
,
999
999
999
999
.
.
.
.
99
99
99
99
TRADE DISCOUNT 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 TERMS DISCOUNT 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 XXX
TO T A L :
9 , 999 , 999 , 999 , 999 . 99 QUOTE 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 , 9 9 9 . 9 9 -
Figure C-14. Customer Order Management Quote prepinted form
TOTAL
Contents
Index
Page C-20
Special forms
Exit

Form
Type
Description
Inventory tags
TAGS
Blank
Inventory tags
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
Last body line:
Note:
5 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch)

3 (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)
2
17
The 1/2 tear-offs are not included in these form dimensions.
BATCH 074
WAREHOUSE 111 CONTROL GROUP
GENERAL POPULATION
ITEM NUMBER LOCATION BATCH/LOT FIFO DATE

2508
AAAA
BATCH1
01/01/**
STEEL BOLT
QTY COUNTED
DATE COUNTED
COUNTED BY
Figure C-15. Manufacturing Performance Analysis Inventory Tag sample
Contents
Index
Page C-21
Special forms
Exit
Payroll
Form
Type
Description
Employee checks type 1 or 2
PCxx, where xx is the company

number for which checks are
being written. If you have only
one company, xx is always 01.
Preprinted
W-2
(form not shown in this
appendix)
W-2
Government
Employee checks
Two Payroll check forms are availableType 1 and Type 2. If you have more than
one company, each company may choose a different type of form.
The word MAIL appears on the first line of the stub if you indicate this check is to be
mailed.
Employee check type 1

Form width:
Form length:
Alignment blocks:
line 1 horizontal positions 1 and 85
First body line:
2
Last body line:
38
Contents
Index
CO.
Page C-22
Special forms
Exit
EMPLOYEE NAME
EMP. NO.
0 2
D E N N I S
K R U E G E R
EARNINGS/ADJUSTMENTS/ADVANCES
CODE
R G
R G
D T
R E G U L A R
P A Y
R E G U L A R
P A Y
D O U B L E
T I M E
3 0 . 0 0
1 0 . 0 0
4 . 0 0
SUMMARY
TAXABLE CURRENT
TAXABLE Y-T-D
WITHHELD CURRENT
WITHHELD Y-T-D
CURRENT GROSS PAY

1 , 0 0 0 . 0 0
YEAR-TO-DATE
2 0 , 0 3 3 . 0 0
1 0 2 0 0
RATE
HOURS
2 0 . 0 0 0
2 4 . 0 0 0
4 0 . 0 0 0
5
8
9
9
0
3
1
1
S D 0 2
AMOUNT
FICA
.
.
.
.
0
0
1
1
0
0
4
4
1 , 0 0 0
2 0 , 0 3 3
7 2
1 , 0 4 4
OCCUPATION
U
M
L
G
S
I
K
J
U
N
E
I
A
T
R
A
O
N
I
D
F
R
O
A
N
T
I
E
N
C
E D
C A L
I N
I S H
K
P
D E D
S A S
C O U N
I O N
D
F U
P
U
E
A
C
A
Y
E
N
L
R
N
N
T
X
0
0
0
3
9 5 0
1 9 , 9 8 3
1
3 0
S
M
L
U
T
T
U
STATE
.
.
.
.
0
0
5
9
PERIOD ENDING
M A I L
S A L E S
R E P
0 5 / 2 0 / * *
TAX/DEDUCTION/DEFERRAL/BENEFIT
CODE
6 0 0 . 0 0
2 4 0 . 0 0
1 6 0 . 0 0
FEDERAL
9
1 9 , 9
1
3 , 7
HOME DEPT DIST. CODE
0
0
0
3
9 5 0
1 9 , 9 8 3
1 5
3 0 0
D
A N
A N C E
T
I O N
T A X
0
0
0
0
0
4
S
K
E
2
3
5
8
9
3
T
T
1
0
0
5
6
0
0
3
0
COUNTY
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
9
CHECK NO.
2
3
5
8
9
1 0
1 5
1
3 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
0
6 5 0 . 6 6
YEAR-TO-DATE
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
3
0
1
1
1
2 , 0
3
LOCAL
.
.
.
.
NET PAY
2 0 4
AMOUNT
4
6
6
6
8
1
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
1
9
6
0
0
0
0
0
7
3
0
OTHER
P 0 0 0 1
CO.
0 2
DEPT.
S D 0 2
EMPLOYEE NO.
1 0 2 0 0
CHECK DATE
CHECK NO.
0 5 / 2 0 / * *
2 0 4
PAY THIS AMOUNT
T O
S I X
O R D E R
T H E
H U N D R E D
D
1
L
6
E
4
E
0
N
2
A
8
N
1
V
0
O F :
I F T Y
I S
K R
2
L O N
E N W O R
1 - 3 4 1
D E N N I S
A N D
$ * * * * 6 5 0 . 6 6
K R U E G E R
6 6 / 1 0 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
U E G E R
G
S T R E E T
T H
K A
6
Figure C-16. Payroll employee Check Type 1
A U T H O R I Z E D
S I G N A T U R E
A U T H O R I Z E D
S I G N A T U R E
Contents
Index
Page C-23
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
CO.
EMPLOYEE NAME
EMP. NO.
HOME DEPT
X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X
EARNINGS/ADJUSTMENTS/ADVANCES
CODE
HOURS
RATE
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
CURRENT GROSS PAY
X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
FEDERAL
X
X
X
X
FICA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
STATE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CHECK NO.
X X X X X X
AMOUNT
NET PAY
X X X X X X X X X X
YEAR-TO-DATE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
COUNTY
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CO.
DEPT.
X X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
EMPLOYEE NO.
X X X X X
LOCAL
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OTHER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CHECK DATE
CHECK NO.
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
PAY THIS AMOUNT

O R D E R
T H E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O F :
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X
X
Figure C-17. Payroll Check Employee type 1 form layout
A U T H O R I Z E D
S I G N A T U R E
A U T H O R I Z E D
S I G N A T U R E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
3.5 inches
T O
X
X
X
X
X
7 inches
SUMMARY
TAXABLE CURRENT
TAXABLE Y-T-D
WITHHELD CURRENT
WITHHELD Y-T-D
X X X X X X X X X
YEAR-TO-DATE
X X X X X X
OCCUPATION
PERIOD ENDING
X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
TAX/DEDUCTION/DEFERRAL/BENEFIT
CODE
DIST. CODE
X X X X
AMOUNT
3.5 inches
erf.
ne
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-24
Special forms
Employee check type 2

Form width:
Form length:
Alignment blocks:
line 1 horizontal positions 1 and 85
First body line:
2
Number of detail lines: 36 lines; only print on first 34.
Last body line:
62
Figure C-18. Payroll Employee Check type 2 sample
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-19. Payroll Employee Check type 2 form layout
Page C-25
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Form 941A
Form width:
8-1/2 (10 characters to the inch)
Form length:
11 (6 lines to the inch)
Alignment blocks:
None
First body line:
6
Number of detail lines: 42; first detail line=18; last detail line=60
Last body line:
62
Page C-26
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-27
Special forms
Contents
Index
Page C-28
Special forms
Exit
STATE RETURN
FOR STATE USE

Date Quarter Ended
Page Number
State
Employer's Identification number, name and address
EMPLOYEE'S
SOCIAL SECURITY
NUMBER
TOTALS FOR THIS PAGE

number of employees
and wage totals
EMPLOYEE'S
NAME
ENTER ON
PAGE 1
ONLY
TAXABLE WAGES
Name of State
Federal
GRAND TOTALS ALL WAGE REPORT SHEETS

TOTAL WAGES
EXCESS WAGES
TOTAL
WAGES
STATE
TAXABLE
WAGES
Paid This Quarter
Number of
employees
(State)
* EMPLOYER: Only use columns applicable to

state requirements.
EXCESS WAGES
OVER STATE LIMIT
OR
Separation
Date
Weeks
Worked
Contents
Index
Page C-29
Special forms
Exit

Form
Type
Description
Labor Ticket
LT01 or LABORTKT
Preprinted
Note:
If Production Monitoring and Control is installed, this form is called
LABORTKT.
Labor ticket
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
Last body line:
14-7/8 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch)

2-1/3 (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)
3
11
PC&C prints side-by-side labor tickets as shown below if you answered:

Y (Yes) to question C33 or C48 (DO YOU WANT PAPER LABOR TICKETS?)
N (No) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER
FORMAT FOR LABOR/MILESTONE TICKETS?)
N (No) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).
If you answer N (No) (the default) to question C51, indicating that you will not use a
preprinted form, PC&C prints the labor tickets shown in Figure C-21.
Figure C-21. Production Control and Costing Labor Ticket

Use the layout shown on Figure C-22 for your preprinted labor ticket forms if you
answered:
N (No) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER
Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).
If you answered Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51, your labor tickets should use a
preprinted form with the layout shown in Figure C-22.
Contents
Index
Page C-30
Special forms
Exit
Figure C-22. Production Control and Costing Labor Ticket form layout
Labor/milestone ticket
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
Last body line:
9-1/2 (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch)

3-2/3 (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)
1
18
Note: Printing the labor and milestone tickets (also called the over/under format)
requires more space than the side-by-side labor tickets. Before you order over/under
preprinted forms, make sure you have enough space to process that format.
PC&C prints over/under labor and milestone tickets shown in Figure C-23 if you
answered:
Y (Yes) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER
N (No) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-31
Special forms
Figure C-23. Production Control and Costing Labor/Milestone Ticket

Use the layout shown above for your preprinted labor ticket forms if you answered:
Y (Yes) to question C34 or C49 (DO YOU WANT TO USE THE OVER/UNDER
Y (Yes) to question C35 or C51 (DO YOU WANT PREPRINTED FORMS?).
Contents
Index
Page C-32
Special forms
Exit

Form
Type
Description
Employee badge
EMPBDG
Blank
Temporary employee badge
TMPEMPBDG
Blank
Labor ticket
LABORTKT
Preprinted or blank
Physical inventory tag
INVTAGS
Blank
Quality control ticket - manufactured,

purchased, or cyclic items
QCTKTMQ, QCTKTPQ,
or QCTKTCQ
Preprinted or blank
Manufacturing order receiving ticket
MFGTKT
Preprinted or blank
Purchase order receiving ticket
PURTKT
Preprinted or blank
Employee badges (permanent and temporary)

When PM&C prints permanent employee badges, the bar coded employee number
is printed on an adhesive label. This label is attached to a plastic badge backing
which you should then laminate. By printing the bar code on a small label rather than
on a form as large as the badge, the front and back of the laminated badge adhere
better, making the badge more durable.
Form width:
Form length:
15/16 (vertical spacing is 9 lines per inch)
First body line:
Last body line:
Bar code:
Prints in lines 4 through 9
Badge vendors provide two standard badge sizes:

Standard badge size: 2-5/16 x 3-1/4 inches
Standard credit card size: 2-1/8 x 3-1/8 inches
You can use one of these sizes, or any other size large enough to contain the labels.
If you are reading the badges with bar code wands, the labels can be positioned
anywhere on the badge. If you are using slot readers rather than wands, you need to
position the label so that the edge of the bar code is 1/4 inch from the edge of the
badge. Your badge vendor can advise you on designing your badges and on the
availability of photo IDs or special logos. See Figure C-24 for an example of a
permanent employee badge label.
KIM BOLDTHEN
0001404
Bar Code
Figure C-24. Production Monitoring and Control Permanent Employee Badge

Labels
Contents
Index
Page C-33
Special forms
Exit
Temporary badges, which are intended for use over a limited period of time, are
printed on card or paper stock and are not normally laminated. Because the form
length for format 2 is the same as labor and receiving tickets, you can use blank
ticket forms or container labels and trim them to the correct width. Figures C-25 and
C-26 show examples of both temporary badge formats.
Form width:
Form length:
2-1/3 (Format 1) or 5 1/2 (Format 2)

(vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)
First body line:
3 for format 1, 1 for format 2
Last body line:
7 for format 1, 15 for format 2except for bar code
Bar code:
Prints in lines 16 through 22
EMPLOYEE
10
KIM BOLDTHEN
10
TEMP BADGE
42
EXPIRES
12/12/**
Bar Code
Figure C-25. Production Monitoring and Control Temporary Employee Badge

Format 1
EMPLOYEE
10
KIM BOLDTHEN
42
TEMP BADGE
12/12/**
EXPIRES
Bar Code
Figure C-26. Production Monitoring and Control Temporary Employee Badge

(trimmed)Format 2
Contents
Index
Page C-34
Special forms
Exit
Labor tickets
You need to order labor ticket forms only if you are using labor tickets as the
turnaround documents for reporting shop activity.
Form width:
Form length:
5-1/2 (vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch)
First body line:
Last body line:
26except for bar code
Bar code:
Prints in lines 26 through 33, starting in column 52
The preprinted layout in Figure C-27 is a recommended layout, showing what type of
information is printed in the corresponding area next to the field heading. If another
heading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace these field headings
with yours.
8.5 inches
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5
ORD E R
XXXXXXX
I T EM N UMB E R
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
O PNO
XXXX
DE SCR I PT I ON
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
O PE R A T I ON DE SCR I P T I ON
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PRE V F A C
XXXXX
QU A N T I T Y
WH
XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
RE FERENCE
XXXXXXXXXX
OP QTY
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FAC I D
XXXXX
DE PT
XXXX
EM P / B A DGE
DUE DA TE
XXXXXXXX
OP START
XXXXXXXX
T OO L
XXXXXX
N AME
XX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
5.5 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Figure C-27. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Labor Ticketsrecommended layout
If you decide not to use preprinted forms, PM&C prints labor tickets as shown in
Figure C-28. Although PM&C prints all the headings, you still need to order special
blank forms, because the perforations in stock forms are not spaced correctly for the
labor tickets.
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-28. Production Monitoring and Control Labor Tickets
Page C-35
Special forms
Contents
Index
Page C-36
Special forms
Exit
Physical inventory tags

You need physical inventory tags only if you plan to use PM&C to facilitate your
physical inventory procedures. There are no preprinted forms for these tags; only a
standard continuous-feed, perforated form that is the size of an index card. See
Figures C-29 and C-30 for examples of physical inventory tags.
Form width:
5 (not including continuous-feed tracks)

Horizontal spacing is 10 characters per inch
Form length:
3
Vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch
First body line:
Last body line:
18
Bar codes:
Print in lines 13 through 17
ITEM NUMBER
WAREHOUSE
LOCATION
*******
BATCH/LOT
FIFO DATE
*********
EMP/BADGE
* */* */* *
ON-HAND
*,***,***,*** -
NAME
QUANTITY COUNTED
**** **** ****

Bar code
Figure C-29. Production Monitoring and Control Physical Inventory Tag for controlled
warehousing
Contents
Index
Page C-37
Special forms
Exit
ITEM NUMBER
WAREHOUSE
ON-HAND
*,***,***,*** EMP/BADGE
NAME
QUANTITY COUNTED
**** **** ****

Bar
code
Bar code
Figure C-30. Production Monitoring and Control Physical Inventory Tag for
uncontrolled warehousing
Contents
Index
Page C-38
Special forms
Exit
Quality control tickets

Quality control tickets are part of the documentation that you print for the items on an
order. One ticket is printed for every location that has a manufacturing or purchase
order waiting for inspection, or a cyclic item for which inspection is either due or
overdue. If more than one item is waiting at a location, then one ticket is printed for
each item at each location.
The forms for quality control tickets are the same size as those for receiving tickets.
Form width:
8-1/2 (including continuous feed tracks)

Form length:
5-1/2, between perforations

First body line:
Last body line:
32
Bar code:
Prints in lines 28 through 32, starting in column 46
You might want to print your quality control tickets (whether preprinted or otherwise)
on adhesive labels, and use them as confirmation of completed quality control
inspection. Your forms vendor can help you order appropriate adhesive labels using
these recommendations:
Label width:
7-1/2
Label depth:
5-1/2, perforated at the top and bottom
Label carrier width:
8-1/2 (includes 1/2 inch feed tracks)
Label carrier depth:
Continuous
The preprinted layouts in Figures C-31, C-32, and C-33 are recommended, and show
what type of information is printed in the corresponding area by the field heading. If
another heading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace our headings
with yours.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-39
Special forms
Figure C-31. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Manufactured Items
recommended layout
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-32. Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Purchased Itemsrecommended layout
Page C-40
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-41
Special forms
Figure C-33. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Quality Control Ticket for Cyclic Items
recommended layout
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-34. Production Monitoring and Control Quality Control TicketManufactured Items
Page C-42
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-35. Quality Control TicketPurchased Items
Page C-43
Special forms
Contents
Index
Page C-44
Special forms
Exit
Figure C-36. Quality Control TicketCyclic Items
Receiving tickets for manufacturing and purchase orders

You need to order receiving ticket forms only if you want to use them as the
turnaround documents for inventory receipt reporting.
Form width:
8-1/2 (total width)

Form length:
5-1/2
First body line:
Last body line:
20 for M.O. ticket, 19 for P.O. ticketexcept for bar code
Bar code:
Prints in lines 26 through 33 starting in column 51
Large item number:
Enlarged component item numbers print in lines 21 through

25 starting in column 1, depending on your tailoring options
You might want to print your receiving tickets (whether preprinted or otherwise) on
adhesive labels, and use them to identify the containers of goods received. Your
forms vendor can help you order appropriate adhesive labels using these
recommendations:
Label width:
7-1/2
Label depth:
5-1/2, perforated at the top and bottom
Contents
Index
Page C-45
Special forms
Exit
Label carrier width:
8-1/2 (includes 1/2 inch feed tracks)
Label carrier depth:
Continuous
The preprinted layouts in Figures C-37 and C-38 are recommended, and show what
type of information prints in the corresponding area by the field heading. If another
heading is more appropriate to your business, you can replace our headings with
yours.
Figure C-37. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Manufacturing Order receiving tickets
recommended layout
Contents
Index
Exit
Page C-46
Special forms
Figure C-38. Production Monitoring and Control Preprinted Purchase Order receiving tickets
recommended layout
If you decide not to use preprinted forms, PM&C prints receiving tickets as shown in
Figures C-39 and C-40. Although PM&C prints all the headings, you still need to
order special blank forms, since the perforations in stock forms are not spaced
correctly for the receiving tickets.
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-39. Production Monitoring and Control Manufacturing Order Receiving Tickets
Page C-47
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-40. Production Monitoring and Control Purchase Order Receiving Tickets
Page C-48
Special forms
Contents
Index
Page C-49
Special forms
Exit
Purchasing
Form
Type
Description
Purchase Order formats - vendor

acknowledgment
POFM
Preprinted
Debit memo
DBFM
Preprinted
Quotation request
QUOTEFORM
Preprinted
Purchase order formats - vendor acknowledgment or debit memo

Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
Last body line:
8 -1/2" (horizontal spacing is 12 characters/inch for formats

2 and 3)
9" (horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch for formats
1 and 0)
11 (vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch)
2 (formats 0 and 2); 3 (formats 1 and 3)
61
Notes:
1. This form is actually 66 lines long. The application does not print anything
beyond line 61. The Authorized by signature block may be placed on line 65.
2. Formats 2 and 3 use compressed print (12 characters per inch (CPI). Formats 0
and 1 use 10 CPI. Otherwise, formats 0 and 2 are the same, and formats 1 and 3
are the same.
3. Formats 2 and 3 have a form width of 8.5 inches to allow them to fit a standard
window envelope and to allow easy copying and faxing. Because they are
designed for 12 characters per inch, you must use a printer that supports
compressed print.
4. Formats 0 and 2 have the purchase order number in the upper left corner.
Formats 1 and 3 have the purchase order number in the upper right corner with
space for your company logo on the left. Other fields in the heading area of
formats 1 and 3 are positioned differently from formats 0 and 2.
5. All formats support a maximum of 6 lines of name and address information.
6. You can use any of the formats with Debit Memos and Vendor Closeout
Acknowledgements. When printing forms, the application indicates the different
uses in a box in the upper left or upper right corner. When ordering forms from a
vendor, allow for the multiple uses by setting up a large stock. You might want to
order different forms in different colors to indicate different functions.
Contents
Index
Page C-50
Special forms
Exit
* *
P U RC H A S E O R D E R
P.O. NUMBER
P0 01 7 0 4
* *
00
SH I P T O
A L T E R N A T E DO C K A T 3 5 A L P H A F O R T E S T
WA R E HO U S E R OW
S E C T I ON 4
1 4 1 5 H O L C O M B B R I DG E D R
RO SWE L L G A 3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4
USA
P A GE 1
B I L L TO
A L T E R N A T E B I L L T O N AM E A T 3 5 A L P H A *
A C C O U N T I NG
FAX
S E C T I ON 6 9
40 4 - 555 - 3 21 3
1 4 1 5 H O L C O MB B R I DG E D R
RO SWE L L
GA 3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4 US A
TERMS
DELIVERY DATE
SHIP VIA
FOB DESC
2% 1 0 N E T 3 0
O U R D OC K
A I R F R E I GH T
S E E B OD Y
BUYER: DR EW S I L L S
FREIGHT
23584
PHONE: ( 4 0 4 ) 5 5 5 - 3 1 3 4 x 2 0 5
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
B &M P L A S T I C S S U P P L Y , I N C .
P U RC H A S I NG
P . O . BOX 5 6 3 7
SU I T E 6 3
5 6 3 MA P L E DR
T I TUSV I L L E , F L
37280
OR D E R P L A C E D W I T H:
T I M SM I T H
P HO N E
404 - 55 5 - 3 133
I N E U RO D O L L A R S
VENDOR
P.O. DATE
01 / 16 / * *
12 345
SPECIAL CHARGES
1 I T EM - A U S T I N
E N G DWG - D R A W I NG V E N I T M
T E S T S H I P P I N G S H E D U L E D I T EM
T E S T I T E M W I T H A D D I T I ON A L D E S C R I P T I O N S
DE L I VE R ON 2 / 2 6 / * *
* * O R D E R C ON F I R M A T I ON R E QU I R E D B Y
TO T A L I N U . S . DO L L A R S
4000000 . 000
01 / 2 6/ * *
EA
* *
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-41. Purchasing purchase Order formats 1 and 3 sample
4 . 0000
TOTAL
16000000 . 00
1 600000 0 . 00
Contents
Index
Page C-51
Special forms
Exit
9 inches
111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
P.O. NUMBER
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FAX
PHONE
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
P.O. DATE
VENDOR
XX / XX / XX
XXXXXX
SPECIAL CHARGES
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
SHIP VIA
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
FREIGHT
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
XX
S XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
H XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
I
P XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
T XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
O
ORDER PLACED WITH:

B
I
L
L
T
O
PAGE X X X X
FOB DESC.
TERMS
DELIVERY DATE
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XX / XX / XX
XXXXX
BUYER: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
PHONE: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
XXXXXXX . XXX . XX
XXXXXXXXXXX . XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
TOTAL
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
11 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
XX XX XX XXX XX XX XX X XXX X X XX XXX X XX X X X XX X XX XX X XX X X XX X X XX X X X X X

X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-42. Purchasing purchase Order format 1 form layout
Contents
Index
Page C-52
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
111
1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 2 22 22 2 2 22 2 3 3 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 4 4 4 44 4 4 4 4 4 55 5 5 5 5 5 55 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0
1 2 34 5 67 89 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 12 34 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
P.O. NUMBER
XXXXXXX
XX
SHIP TO
BILL TO
ORDER PLACED WITH:

PAGE
XXXX
PHONE
FAX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
P.O. DATE VENDOR SHIP VIA

XX / XX / XX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SPECIAL CHARGES FREIGHT

XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
FOB DESC.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TERMS
DELIVERY DATE
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX / XX / XX
PHONE: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
XXXXX
AMOUNT
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX . XXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX . XXXX XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
11 inches
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XX XXXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
AUTHORIZED BY
TOTAL
XXXXXX XXXXX . XX
Contents
Index
Page C-53
Special forms
Exit
SHIP TO
A L T E R N A T E DO C K A T 3 5 A L P H A
WA R E HO U S E ROW
S E C T I ON 4
1 4 1 5 H O L C OM B B R I D G E D R
R O S WE L L G A 3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4
USA
* * PU RC H A S E ORD E R * *
P . O . N UMB E R
P0 0 1 7 0 4 - 0 0
P U RC H A S I NG
P . O . BOX 5 6 3 7
SU I T E 6 3
5 6 3 MA P L E D R
372 80
ORDER PLACED WITH:
T I M T UCK E R
PHONE
1 - 404 - 555 - 3328
IN
BILL TO
A L T E R N A T E B I L L T O N AM E A T
A C CO U N T I N G
S E C T I ON 6 9
R O SWE L L G A
3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4 USA
FAX
1 - 4 04 - 555 - 3328
SHIP VIA
A I R F R E I GH T
FREIGHT
F.O.B. DESC
TERMS
F OB T E S T
2 %1 0 N E T 3 0
BUYER: D R EW S I L L S
PHONE: ( 4 0 4 ) 5 5 5 - 3 1 3 4 x 2 0 5
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
1 I T EM - A U S T I N
E NG DWG - D R A W I NG V EN I T M
T E S T S H I P P I NG S C H E D U L E D I T EM
T E S T I T E M W I T H A D D I T I ON A L D E S C R I P T I ON S
D E L I V E R ON 2 / 2 6 / * *
* * O R D E R C O N F I RMA T I O N R E Q U I R E D
TO T A L I N U . S . DO L L A R S
BY
T EST
PAGE
0001
E U RO DO L L A R S
P.O. DATE
VENDOR
01 / 16 / * *
12 3456
SPECIAL CHARGES
F OR
4000000 . 000
4 . 0000
EA
1 / 26 / * *
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-44. Purchasing purchase order formats 0 and 2 sample
TOTAL
35
A L PH A *
DELIVERY DATE
S E E B OD Y
235
AMOUNT
16000000. 00
16000000. 00
Contents
Index
Page C-54
Special forms
Exit
SHIP TO
A L T E RN A T E DO C K A T 3 5 A L P H A
WA R E HO U S E ROW
S E C T I ON 4
RO SWE L L G A 3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4
U SA
* * V E N D O R S A C K N OWL E D GME N T * *
P . O . N UMB E R
P0 0 1 7 0 4 - 0 0
P U RC H A S I NG
P . O . BOX 5 6 3 7
SU I T E 6 3
5 6 3 MA P L E D R
372 80
ORDER PLACED WITH:
T I M T UCK E R
PHONE
1 - 4 04 - 555 - 332 8
BILL TO
A L T E RN A T E B I L L T O N A M E A T
A C CO U N T I N G
S E C T I ON 6 9
RO SWE L L G A
3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4 U SA
FAX
1 - 4 04 - 555 - 332 8
SHIP VIA
A I R F R E I GH T
FREIGHT
F.O.B. DESC
TERMS
F OB T E S T
2 %1 0 N E T 3 0
PHONE: ( 4 0 4 ) 5 5 5 - 3 1 3 4 x 2 0 5
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
2 . 000
1940
WA S H E R , F L A T , # 1 0 X 9 / 1 6 0 0 X 3 / 6 4 T H K
* T H I S N O T I C E C L O S E S A B O V E P U R C H A S E O RD E R *
* * * D O N O T S H I P A N Y T H I NG * * *
DA T E OF
L A S T RECE I P T
T EST
PAGE
0001
I N E U R O DO L L A R S
P.O. DATE
VENDOR
04 / 29 / * *
12 3456
SPECIAL CHARGES
1 - 1 0 NET 3 0
F OR
DZ
. 50000
35
A L PH A *
DELIVERY DATE
S E E B OD Y
235
AMOUNT
1 . 00
07 / 18 / * *
* * O RD E R C O N F I R MA T I O N R E Q U I R E D
T O T A L I N U . S . DO L L A R S
BY
1 / 26 / * *
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-45. Purchasing Vendor Acknowledgement sample
TOTAL
16000000 . 00
Contents
Index
Page C-55
Special forms
Exit
SHIP TO
A L T E RN A T E DO C K A T 3 5 A L P H A
WA R E HO U S E ROW
S E C T I ON 4
RO SWE L L G A 3 0 0 7 6 - 3 7 1 4
USA
* * D E B I T M E MO D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 9 * *
P . O . N UMB E R
10/ 23/ * *
P1 0 0 2 8 9 - 0 0
P U RC H A S I NG
P . O . BOX 5 6 3 7
SU I T E 6 3
5 6 3 MA P L E D R
372 80
ORDER PLACED WITH:
T I M T UCK E R
PHONE
1 - 4 04 - 555 - 332 8
VENDOR
12 3456
BILL TO
A L T E RN A T E B I L L T O N A M E A T
A C CO U N T I N G
S E C T I ON 6 9
RO SWE L L G A
3 0 0 7 6 3 7 1 4 USA
FAX
1 - 404 - 555 - 332 8
SPECIAL CHARGES
F.O.B. DESC
TERMS OU R D O C K
C. O. D.
PHONE: ( 4 0 4 ) 5 5 5 - 3 1 3 4 x 2 0 5
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
SHIP VIA
UPS
FREIGHT
* * * OR I G I N A L L I N E I T E M * * *
7 8235
000
4 X 8 X 3 / 4 SHEE T S PL AS T I C DA T E
11 / 20 / * *
BY
A L PH A *
DELIVERY DATE
S E E B OD Y
235
AMOUNT
EA
02
123 . 456 7
1234 . 5
2 . 000
EA
123 . 456 7
246 . 9
1 / 26 / * *
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-46. Purchasing debit memo sample
35
10 . 000
* B L ANK E T 0 0
* * * *
DO NO T RE S U P P L Y
Q U A N T I T Y R E T URN E D T O V E N D OR F OR C R E D I T
I T E M S W I L L B E R E T U RN E D T O V E N D OR F OR
CR E D I T
QTY:
2 . 000
EA
* * O R D E R C O N F I R MA T I O N R E Q U I R E D
T O TA L I N U . S . DO L L A R S
T EST
PAGE
0001
I N U S E U RO DO L L A R S
P.O. DATE
10 / 02 / * *
F OR
TOTAL
246 . 9
Contents
Index
Page C-56
Special forms
Exit
9 inches
111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
11 inches
SHIP TO
1
2 X
P. O. NUMBER
3
XXXXXXX - XX
4
5
6
7
8
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X
9
PAGE
10
XXXX
11
BILL TO
12
13
14 ORDER PLACED WITH: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
PHONE
FAX
15
16
17
18
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
19 P.O. DATE
VENDOR
SHIP VIA
F.O.B. DESC.
TERMS
DELIVERY DATE
XX/ XX/ XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX X
20
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XX / XX / XX
XXXXX
21 SPECIAL CHARGES
FREIGHT
PHONE: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
22 X X X X X X X X X X X . X X
XXXXXXXXXXX. XX
QUANTITY
AMOUNT
UNIT PRICE
23
24
25
26
27
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X . X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X XX X X XX X X
XXXXXXXXXXX. XX
TOTAL
62
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X X XX X X XX X X X X
63
64
65
AUTHORIZED BY
66
Contents
Index
Page C-57
Special forms
Exit
8.5 inches
11 inches
111
1 1 1 11 11 1 11 2 22 22 2 2 22 2 33 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 4 4 4 44 4 4 4 4 4 55 5 5 5 5 5 55 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0
1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 56 7 89 0 12 34 5 6 78 9 01 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 0 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 01 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
SHIP TO
1
2X
P. O. NUMBER
3
XXXXXXXX - XXX
4
5
6
7
8
PAGE
9
10
XXXX
11
BILL
TO
12
13
ORDER
PLACED
WITH:X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
14
FAX
PHONE
15
16
17
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
18
19 P.O. DATE
VENDOR
SHIP VIA
F.O.B. DESC
TERMS
DELIVERY DATE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
/
X
X
/
X
X
XXXXXX
X X / X X / XX
20
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
21 SPECIAL CHARGES
FREIGHT
XXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX . XX
PHONE: X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
22 X X X X X X X X X X X . X X
QUANTITY
UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
23
24 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
27 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . X X
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
XXXXXXXXXXX. XX
61 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
TOTAL
62 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
63
64
AUTHORIZED BY
65
66
Contents
Index
Page C-58
Special forms
Exit
Quotation request
The Purchasing application uses this form to send a request for quotation to a
vendor.
Form width:
Form length:
First body line:
Last body line:
9
Horizontal spacing is 10 characters/inch
11
Vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch
6
60
Note: This form is actually 66 lines long. The application does not print anything
beyond line 60. The Authorized by signature block may be placed on line 63. The
body of the quotation is all printed by the application, it should not be preprinted on
the form.
Contents
Index
Page C-59
Special forms
Exit
B A C K U P CO P Y O F D O C UME N T
F R OM :
Y OU R F I RM N A M E H E R E
1 2 3 MA I N S T R E E T
Y OU R T OWN , S T A T E A N D Z I P
SENT
BU Y ER:
P HON E :
VIA
ED I
T HOMA S SM I T H
404 - 956 - 0000
PAGE
1
TO :
QUOTE NO.
R&S P L A S T I CS , I NC .
P . O . BOX 6 7 7 5
A T L A N T A , GA . 3 0 0 1 1
000003
QUOTE DATE
09 / 07 / * *
REFERENCE NUMBER
V E N DO R N UMB E R
I T E M N UMB E R
91161
D E S C R I P T I ON :
93001
U / M:
N Y L ON ROD S
EA
N Y L ON ROD S T H A T C AN W I T H S T A N D
1 0 0 D E GR E E H E A T
F OB :
_______________
T E RM S :
SH I P
V I A:
_______________
UN I T
F R E I GH T :
_______________
_________________________
____________
B A SE
PR I CE :
Y OU R
I T E M N U MB E R :
QUA N T I T Y
S E T U P CO S T :
_______________
L EAD
NON E _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
E X P I RA T I ON DA T E :
_ _ _ PR I CE B RE A K S
___
QUA N T I T Y
PR I CE
T I ME
( DA Y S ) :
_______
_____________
QUA N T I T Y
PR I CE
. 0_ 0_ 0_ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /
__
1 _______1
2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5_ ._ 0_ 0_ 0_ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /
3 _ _ _ _ _ 1_ 0_ 0_ ._ 0_ 0_ 0_ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
4 _ _ _ _ _ 5_ 0_ 0_ ._ 0_ 0_ 0_ / _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ /
5____________ / ____________ /
6____________ / _________
7____________ / ____________ /
8____________ / ____________ /
9____________ / _________
10____________ / ____________ /
11____________ / ____________ /
12____________ / _________
13____________ / ____________ /
14____________ / ____________ /
15____________ / _________
16____________ / ____________ /
17____________ / ____________ /
18____________ / _________
19____________ / ____________ /
20____________ / ____________ /
PL EA SE
S H I P B E T WE E N
T H E H OU R S O F
9 : 00
AM A N D
5 : 00
PM ,
AUTHORIZED BY
Figure C-49. Purchasing quotation request sample
MON - F R I .
T H ANK
YOU
Contents
Index
Page C-60
Special forms
Exit
9 inches
111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Figure C-50. Purchasing quotation request form layout
11 inches
1 X
2
3
4
5
6
BU Y E R X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
F R OM : X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7
P HON E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8
PAGE
9
10
XXXX
11
QUOTE NO.
12
TO :
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
13
XXXXXX
14
QUOTE DATE
15
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
16
XXXXXXXX
17
REFERENCE NUMBER
18
19 V E N DO R N UMB E R X X X X X X
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
AUTHORIZED BY
64
65
66
Contents
Index
Page C-61
Special forms
Exit

Form
Type
Description
Container label - single or double

format
CLBLS-1UP or CLBLS2UP
Blank
Container labels can be printed on a label to be put in the container or a card to be

placed in the container. You can use a single or a double format.
Figure C-51. Repetitive Production Management single container label
Contents
Index
Exit
Figure C-52. Repetitive Production Management double container label
Page C-62
Special forms
Contents
Index
Exit
Page D-1
Sample charts of accounts
Appendix D. Sample charts of accounts

Because the financial applications can be installed in both distribution and
manufacturing industries, a sample chart of accounts is included here for each type
of industry.
Many account descriptions in these charts of account exceed the 25 character
space limit on the general ledger account description field (GLDES) on form GL-11.
This form is included in this chapter following the charts of accounts. You should use
abbreviations, where necessary, to hold the account descriptions within 25
characters.
The following examples use four-position account numbers for the sake of simplicity.
Keep in mind that the general ledger account number can be up to 15 positions to
accommodate more sophisticated numbering schemes.
Note: If IFM is installed, the chart of accounts has a different format. For more
information, see the IFM Users Guide.
Contents
Index
Exit
Chart of accountsmanufacturing
Income Taxes 9000-9999
9000
9020
9040
9050
9090
9200
State income tax

Federal income tax
Local income tax
Deferred tax expense
Other income tax
Provision for profit or loss
Current assets 10001499

1000
1050
1060
1070
1080
1100
1200
1220
1230
1240
1260
1280
1290
1300
1320
1340
1390
1400
1420
1440
1460
1480
1490
Petty cash
Cash in bankgeneral
Cash in bankpayroll
Cash in bankother
Credit union deposits
Short term investments
Accounts receivabletrade
Accounts receivableemployees
Intercompany payroll receivables
Accounts receivableother
Notes receivable
Interest receivable
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Raw material inventory
Work in process inventory
Finished goods inventory
Allowance for inventory decline
Prepaid insurance
Prepaid taxes and licenses
Prepaid rent
Prepaid supplies
Travel advances
Prepaid expensesother
Fixed assets 15001599

1500
1510
1515
1520
1525
1530
1535
1550
1555
1560
1565
1570
1575
Land
Land improvements
Buildings
Machinery and equipment
Office furniture and fixtures
Auto and trucks
Leasehold improvements
Allowance for depreciationland improvements
Allowance for depreciationbuildings
Allowance for depreciation machinery and equipment
Allowance for depreciationoffice furniture and fixtures
Allowance for depreciationauto and trucks
Allowance for amortization leasehold improvements
Investments 16001699
1600
1620
Investment in subsidiaries
Long-term investments
Page D-2
Contents
Index
1630
Exit
Cash surrender value of life insurance
Other assets 17001799

1700
1750
1790
Deposits
Suspense
Miscellaneous
Current liabilities 20002499

2000
2020
2030
2050
2080
2090
2100
2110
2120
2130
2140
2150
2190
2200
2203
2205
2210
2220
2225
2230
2240
2245
2250
2255
2260
2265
2270
2280
2290
2300
2320
Accounts payablevendors
Accounts payableother
Notes payableshort-term
Interest payable
Dividends payable
Intercompany payroll payables
Accrued salaries and wages
Accrued vacation pay
Accrued holiday pay
Accrued real estate taxes
Accrued sales taxes
Accrued pension cost
Accrued expenseother
State withholding taxes payable
County withholding taxes payable
Local withholding taxes payable
Federal withholding tax payable
State unemployment tax payable
State disability insurance payable
Federal unemployment taxes payable
FICA payable (employee)
FICA payable (employer)
Union dues payable
Insurance premium payable
United Fund payable
Retirement account payable
Savings bonds payable
Garnishment payable
Reserve for federal income taxes
Reserve for state income taxes
Long-term liabilities 25002999

2500
2510
2550
2600
2700
Notes payablebanks
Notes payableother
Bonds payable
Deferred tax payable
Other long-term liabilities
Stockholders equity 30003999

3000
3020
3040
3100
3200
Common stock
Preferred stock
Additional paid in capital
Treasury stock
Retained earnings
Page D-3
Contents
Index
Exit
Income (revenue) 40004099

4000
4050
4080
Sales
Sales returns and allowances
Sales scrap
Cost of salesmaterial 41004199

4100
4120
4130
4150
4180
4190
Purchases
Purchase discounts
Outside processing
Provision for inventory decline
Freight-in
Inventory change
Cost of salesdirect labor 42004299

4200
4210
4290
Set up
Production
Other direct labor
Cost of salesmanufacturing overhead 50006999

5010
5020
5030
5040
5050
5060
5080
5090
6010
6020
6030
6040
6050
6110
6120
6130
6140
6160
6170
6180
6190
6210
6230
6240
6260
6270
6300
6320
6350
6370
6390
6410
6480
6490
Indirect labor maintenance and repair

Indirect laborshipping/receiving
Indirect laborcleaning
Indirect laborsupervision
Indirect laborsamples
Indirect laborvacation
Indirect laborwarehouse
Indirect laborother
Amortization of land improvements
Depreciationbuilding
Depreciationmachinery and equipment
Depreciationautos and trucks
Amortization of leasehold improvements
Heat and light
Water
Insurance
Pension expense
Janitorial supplies
Packing supplies
Sundry supplies
Maintenance tools and supplies
Factory payroll taxes
Repairsequipment
Repairsbuilding
Rentequipment
Rentbuildings
Employment fees
Royalty expense
Samples and testing materials
Trash removal
Security expense
Warehouse expense
Taxes and licenses
Miscellaneous expense
Page D-4
Contents
Index
6600
Exit
Other employee benefits
Administrative expenses 70007999

7010
7020
7030
7040
7060
7110
7130
7150
7170
7180
7210
7230
7250
7270
7280
7310
7330
7410
7420
7450
7470
7490
7510
7520
7550
Salariesofficers
Salariesoffices
Salariessales
Commissions
Directors fees
Provision for doubtful accounts
Credit expense
Legal, audit, and professional fees
Insuranceofficers life
Insuranceother
Advertising expense
Travel and entertainment
Postage
Printing, stationery, and supplies
Telephone and telegraph
Payroll taxesadministrative
Taxesother
Dues and subscriptions
Charitable contributions
Repairsoffice equipment
Rentoffice equipment
Miscellaneous expenses
Depreciationoffice furniture and fixtures
Depreciationautos
FICA taxesemployer
Other income and expense 80008999

8010
8050
8080
8110
8150
8210
8300
8400
Interest expense
Interest income
Dividends earned
Royalty Income
Gain (Loss) on disposition of fixed assets
Recovery of bad debts
Discounts lost
Discounts earned
Income taxes 90009999

9000
9020
9040
9050
9090
9200
State income tax

Federal income tax
Local income tax
Other income tax
Page D-5
Contents
Index
Exit
Chart of accountsdistribution
Current assets 10001499
1000
1050
1060
1070
1080
1100
1200
1220
1230
1240
1260
1290
1300
1400
1420
1440
1460
1480
1490
Petty cash
Cash in bankgeneral
Cash in bankpayroll
Cash in bankother
Short term investments
Accounts receivabletrade
Accounts receivableemployees
Intercompany payroll receivables
Accounts receivableother
Notes receivable
Allowance for doubtful accounts
Inventory
Prepaid insurance
Prepaid taxes and licenses
Prepaid rent
Prepaid supplies
Travel advances
Prepaid expensesother
Fixed assets 15001599

1500
1510
1515
1525
1530
1535
1550
1555
1565
1570
1575
Land
Land improvements
Buildings
Office equipment
Autos and trucks
Leasehold improvements
Accumulated depreciation land improvements
Accumulated depreciationbuildings
Depreciationoffice equipment
Depreciationautos and trucks
Amortizationleasehold improvements
Investments 16001699
1600
1620
1630
Investments in subsidiaries
Long-term investments
Cash surrender value of life insurance
Other assets 17001799

1700
1790
Deposits
Miscellaneous
Current liabilities 20002499

2000
2020
2030
2050
2080
2090
Accounts payablevendors
Accounts payableother
Notes payableshort-term
Interest payable
Dividends payable
Intercompany payroll payables
Page D-6
Contents
Index
2100
2120
2130
2140
2150
2190
2200
2203
2205
2210
2220
2225
2230
2240
2245
2250
2255
2260
2265
2270
2280
2290
2300
2320
Exit
Accrued compensation
Accrued personal property tax
Accrued real estate taxes
Accrued sales taxes
Accrued retirement plans
Accrued expensesother
State withholding taxes
County withholding taxes payable
Local withholding taxes
Federal withholding taxes
State unemployment taxes payable
State disability insurance payable
Federal unemployment taxes payable
FICA withheld (employee)
FICA payable (employer)
Union dues withheld
Insurance premium withheld
United Fund withheld
Retirement account payable
Savings bonds withheld
Garnishment withheld
Credit union withheld
Accrued federal income taxes payable
Payable state income
Long-term liabilities 25002999

2500
2510
2550
2600
2700
Notes payablebanks
Notes payableother
Bonds payable
Deferred tax payable
Other long-term liabilities
Stockholders equity 30003999

3000
3020
3040
3100
3200
Common stock
Preferred stock
Additional paid in capital
Treasury stock
Retained earnings
Income (revenue) 40004099

4000
4050
Sales operations
Sales returns and allowances
Cost of goods sold 41004999

4100
4110
4120
4130
Purchases
Freight in
Inventory change
Accounts payable change
Selling expenses 50005999

5000
5010
5020
Salariessales
Commissions
Travel and entertainment
Page D-7
Contents
Index
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
Exit
Insurancehealth and welfare

Retirement costs
Vacation pay
Holiday pay
Advertising expense
General and administrative 6000-6999

6000
6010
6100
6110
6120
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
Salariesofficers
Salariesoffice
Laborshipping and receiving
Laborwarehouse
Laborsupervision
Insurancehealth and welfare
Retirement costs
Vacation pay
Holiday pay
Outside services 70007099

7000
7010
7020
7030
7040
Employment fees
Royalty expense
Trash removal
Security expense
Professional fees
Materials and supplies 71007199

7100
7110
7120
7130
7140
7150
Janitorial supplies
Packing supplies
Sundry supplies
Maintenance tools and supplies
Postage
Printing, stationery, and supplies
Depreciation and amortization 72007299

7250
7255
7265
7270
7275
Depreciation of land improvements

Depreciation of buildings
Depreciation of office
Depreciation of autos and trucks
Amortization of leasehold improvements
Rents 73007399
7300
7310
7320
Rentequipment
Rentbuildings
Rentautos and trucks
Utilities 74007499
7400
7410
7420
Heat and light

Water
Telephone and telegraph
Page D-8
Contents
Index
Exit
Interest and taxes 75007599

7500
7510
7520
7530
7540
7550
7560
Interest expense
Real estate taxes
Sales taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes
FICA taxesemployer
Taxes other
Other operating expenses 76007699

7600
7610
7620
7630
7640
7650
7660
7670
Bad debts expense

Dues and subscriptions
Charitable contributions
Repairsbuilding
Repairsoffice equipment
Repairsother
Directors fees
Insurancefire and theft
Non-operating income and expense 80008999

8010
8050
8080
8110
8150
8200
8300
8400
Interest income
Interest expense
Dividends earned
Royalty income
Gain (Loss) on disposition of fixed assets
Recovery of bad debts
Discounts lost
Discounts earned
Income taxes 90009999

9000
9020
9040
9050
9090
9200
State income tax

Federal income tax
Local income tax
Other income tax
Page D-9
Contents
Index
Exit
Page D-10
General Ledger Master Offline File LoadChart of Accounts
LA
Company number
General Ledger account number
General Ledger type
_ _
(COMNO) (N2)
(GLANO) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(GLTYP) (N1)
_
General Ledger description
Account type
_ _
(GLDES) (A25) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(ACTYP) (A2)
Currency ID
Consolidation account number
Consolidation company number
(CURID) (A3) _ _ _
(CONAC) (N15) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _
(CONCO) (N2)
LB
Company number
_ _
(COMNO) (N2)
General Ledger type _
(GLTYP) (N1)
Period 1 debit
(P01DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 3 debit
(P03DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 5 debit
(P05DR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(GLANO) (N15)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Balance forward
(BALFD) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 2 debit
(P02DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 4 debit
(P04DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 6 debit
(P06DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
LC
Company number
(COMNO) (N2)
General Ledger
(GLTYP) (N1)
Period 8 debit
(P08DR) (N13.2)
Period 10 debit
(P10DR) (N13.2)
Period 12 debit
(P12DR) (N13.2)

(GLANO) (N15)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 7 debit
(P07DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 9 debit
(P09DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 11 debit
(P11DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 13 debit
(P13DR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
LD
Company number
(COMNO) (N2)
_ _
type _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _

(GLTYP) (N1)
Period 1 credit
(P01CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 3 credit
(P03CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 5 credit
(P05CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
LE
Company number
_ _
(COMNO) (N2)
(GLTYP) (N1)
Period 8 credit
(P08CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 10 credit
(P10CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _
Period 12 credit
(P12CR) (N13.2) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _

(GLANO) (N15)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Balance forward
(BALFD) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 2 credit
(P02CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 4 credit
(P04CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 6 credit
(P06CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _

(GLANO) (N15)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 7 credit
(P07CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 9 credit
(P09CR) (13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 11 credit
(P11CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
Period 13 credit
(P13CR) (N13.2)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
_ _ _ _ . _ _
The General Ledger Offline File Load Master is used when you want to load your
Chart of Accounts using a diskette or disk file.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page D-11
Record Code. Enter one of the following codes to define the type of information you
want to enter for an account:
LA
LB
LC
LD
LE
Account definition (required); only one LA record per account is allowed.

Balance-forward debit and debit amounts for periods 1-6 (optional).
Debit amounts for periods 7-13 (optional).
Balance forward credit and credit amounts for periods 1-6 (optional).
Credit amounts for periods 7-13 (optional).
Company number (COMNO). Enter the number of the one company for which you
are loading the chart of accounts in this diskette batch.
General Ledger account number (GLANO). Enter the account number you are
defining.
General Ledger type (GLTYP). Enter one of the following valid codes to specify
which accounting year is being affected:
1
2
3
Current year
Budget year
Previous year
Note:
LA records must be coded with GLTYP=1.
General Ledger description (GLDES). Enter the account description that you want
to appear on General Ledger reports.
Account type (ACTYP). Enter the type of account to determine how the account
appears on financial statements:
AS
LI
IC
EX
Asset account
Liability account
Expense account
Currency ID (CURID). This is a required field. Enter the currency ID to determine the
set of exchange rates used to translate the balances for this account.
Consolidation company number (CONCO). Enter the company number used when
this account is summarized for consolidation purposes.
Consolidation account number (CONAC). Enter the account number used when
this account is summarized for consolidation purposes.
Balance forward and period amount fields (BALFD) (POxDR). These amounts
reflect the total debit activity and total credit activity recorded for the month, ignoring
any activity from previous months. As an option, you can enter opening balances
and period amounts for the current year up to the period in which you will first
process general journal transactions. You can enter previous-year amounts for all
accounting periods, but the calculated new balance forward must balance to the
current year opening balance. Enter budget records for income (revenue) and
expense accounts only.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page D-12
Contents
Index
Page E-1
Fax Interface overview
Exit
Appendix E. Fax Interface overview

The MAPICS Fax Interface lets you fax MAPICS documents to your customers and
vendors, directly from the MAPICS programs that print the document. You do not
have to print the document or handle pre-printed forms.
The MAPICS Fax Interface works with the Telex/Fax/400 products from American
Presence, Inc.1 These products provide:
forms overlays for pre-printed MAPICS forms, that can be customized as
required by the user, and are merged with the MAPICS printed documents for
faxing
the management of the actual faxing: automatic dialing, redialing, logging, pretimed deliveries, etc., and
other faxing capabilities, including security/authorization control, viewing on PCs
or printing of incoming faxes, cost analysis, etc.
supports faxing the following documents from the MAPICS applications shown.
Document
Applications
To Customers
Quote
COM/KBC
Order Acknowledgment
COM/KBC
Order Change Acknowledgment
COM/KBC
Packing List/Advance Ship Notice
COM/KBC
Invoice & Pro Forma
COM/KBC
Credit Memo
COM/KBC
To vendors
Quotation Request
PUR
Planning Schedule
MRP/PUR
Purchase Order
PUR/PM
Purchase Order Change
PUR/PM
Shipping Schedule
PUR
Remittance Advice
AM AP
American Presence, Inc.

1900 Harbor City Blvd. Suite 318
Melbourne, FL 32901
Phone: 321/726-9941 (Sales ext 318, Support ext 206)
Fax: 321/726-6210
email: sales@american-presence.com
website: www.american-presence.com
Contents
Index
Exit
Page E-2
supports the definition, by customer and vendor, in customer maintenance for

customers, and in vendor/entity maintenance for vendors of:
- what documents are to be faxed
- what documents are to be printed ( a document being faxed may optionally
be printed)
- optional override fax phone numbers by document type, where required,
instead of the (one current) fax phone number.
The Fax Interface can be ordered by contacing MAPICS Customer support or
downloading SH116040 for the order form. When your order is approved, you are
contacted with an entitlement procedure. The Fax Interface function is documented
and supported as part of each of the applications listed above.
Ordering and installing the Fax Interface

Install Telex/Fax/400. When you install the product, select the MAPICS XA link during
configuration; this installs a MAPICS interface in the product. If an earlier level of the
fax product is installed, upgrade it to the required level, and install the MAPICS
interface. Also install the required fax hardware, on the AS/400. You can contact
American Presence, Inc. at 321/726-9941.
The MAPICS interface in Telex/Fax/400 loads the MAPICS pre-printed forms
overlays, and sets up the interfaces in Telex/Fax/400 for MAPICS XA.
Customize, as required, the MAPICS forms overlays supplied with Telex/Fax/400, to
add your company name, logo, etc..
Next, order from MAPICS customer support and install the MAPICS Fax Interface.
Telex/Fax/400 and its MAPICS interface must be installed before you can install the
MAPICS Fax Interface as installing the Fax Interface adds logical files into the Telex/
Fax/400 file library. Installing the MAPICS Fax Interface allows you to define the
Telex/Fax/400 libraries to MAPICS and installs/activates the Fax Interface functions in
MAPICS.
Faxing documents to your customers

Using COM Customer file Maintenance (Menu AMBM60, option 1), define what
document(s) you want to fax to each customer, and the phone number to use for
each document. This information is defined on the Maintain Document/Media panel
(AMBMNDFR), which can be displayed from three panels in Customer File
Maintenance depending on whether IFM is installed. On the Maintain Customer
panel (AMVA0DVR, if IFM is not installed, or AMVCCDVR, if IFM is installed), select
option 25=Document/Media. Or on the Edit Customer Address panel (AMVACE1R),
type Y in the Telephone/Fax number...More? field.
Run the normal COM/KBC function to print the document to be faxed. If the fax
media flag is on for that document for that customer. The document is identified with
a short code ID for use by Telex/Fax/400, written to a separate fax spool file, and
directed by a printer override to a fax output queue which Telex/Fax/400 monitors.
Telex/Fax/400 reads the short code ID and gets the customer fax information from
the short code record then removes the short code ID from the document and
Contents
Index
Exit
Page E-3
merges the document with a forms overlay if required, and faxes the document as
directed.
The packing list is identified on the list of document codes as the Advanced
shipping Notice, the name of the EC transaction that contains that information.
Performing this maintenance sets flags in MAPICS to signal faxing of the documents,
and builds short code records in Telex/Fax/400 to store the customer name and the
fax phone number for each document to be faxed.
Faxing documents to your vendors

Using Purchasing Vendor Master File Maintenance (Menu AM6M60, option 2), define
what documents you want to fax to each vendor and the phone number to use for
each document. This information is defined on the Vendor Master - File Maintenance
(page 2 of 3) panel (AMV778).
On the panel enter the media flags to determine whether a document will be printed,
faxed, and/or EDId (via EC). Override fax numbers when required for documents that
must be faxed to a phone number other than the (one) default fax number defined for
each vendor.
Performing this maintenance sets flags in MAPICS to signal faxing of the documents,
and builds short code records in Telex/Fax/400, to store the vendor name, and the
fax phone number for each document to be faxed.
Run the normal Purchasing, MRP, or AP function to print the document to be faxed.
If the fax media flag is on for that document for that vendor, the document is
identified with a short code ID for use byTelex/Fax/400 written to a separate fax
spool file. It is then directed by a printer override to a fax output queue which Telex/
Fax/400 monitors. Telex/Fax/400 reads the short code ID and gets the vendor fax
information, then removes the short code ID from the document and merges the
document with a forms overlay if required, and faxes the document as directed.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page E-4
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-1
Glossary
Glossary
This glossary defines terms that are important for this book. It does not include all
MAPICS XA terms nor all terms established for your system. If you do not find the
term you are looking for, refer to the Index in this book or to glossaries in other
MAPICS XA publications.
This glossary includes definitions from:
The American National Dictionary for Information Processing Systems,
copyright 1982 by the Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CBEMA). Copies may be purchased from the American National
Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, New York 10018. Definitions are
identified by symbol (A) after definition.
The ISO Vocabulary Information Processing and the ISO Vocabulary Office
Machines, developed by the International Organization for Standardization,
Technical Committee 97, Subcommittee 1. Definitions of published sections of
the vocabulary are identified by symbol (I) after definition; definitions from draft
international standards draft proposals, and working papers in development by
the ISO/TC97/SC1 vocabulary subcommittee are identified by symbol (T) after
definition, indicating final agreement has not yet been reached among
participating members.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-2
Glossary
ACS. Application correction set.

AML tape. Application modification level tape.
application. The use to which a data processing system is put; for example,
keeping a record of a companys inventory.
application correction set (ACS). The program temporary fixes (PTFs) as well as
the programs necessary to apply the fixes that are contained on a maintenance
tape.
application modification level (AML) tape. One of two types of maintenance
tapes or CD.
application tailoring. The process of selecting application options to satisfy the
specific needs of a company.
AS/400 password. The unique string of characters known to the AS/400 system
and to a user, who must specify it to gain access to the AS/400 system.
Synonymous with AS/400 user password.
AS/400 user profile. A user description known to the AS/400 system. It contains a
user profile name and a user password.
AS/400 user profile name. A string of characters assigned to a user profile on the
AS/400 system. It is the name by which you want the system to know the user.
Synonymous with user name.
audit. To review and examine the activities of a data processing system mainly to
test the adequacy and effectiveness of procedures for data security and data
integrity. (T)
audit trail. Information that allows the history of an account, item record, order,
etc., to be traced. The more recent information may be stored online for retrieval.
back up. To transfer specific objects or libraries from internal storage to magnetic
media, such as tapes, or to fixed disk, by duplication.
backup copy A copy of a file or library member that is kept for reference in case
the original file or library member is destroyed. The backup copy can be stored on
disk, diskette, or tape.
batch. An accumulation of data to be processed, as in a batch of transactions.
batch/lot control code The code <Y/N> indicating if an item requires batch/lot
control.
batch/lot number The field allowing unique identification of a specific batch or lot
of an item. when an item is defined as having batch/lot control, all transactions
involving that item must carry the batch/lot number.
batch job. A job in which the processing functions are submitted as a predefined
series of actions to be performed without continuous operator attention. See batch
subsystem. Contrast with interactive job.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-3
Glossary
batch mode A method of running jobs that do not require continuous operation
attention; that is, processing that is not interactive.
batch number. A number printed on a document to delineate a group of
transactions.
batch/lot number The number used to identify a batch or lot of an item. each item
can have multiple batches or lots. When an item is defined as having batch/lot
control, all transactions involving that item must carry the batch/lot number.
batch subsystem (QBATCH). A subsystem in which batch jobs are to be
processed. IBM supplies one batch subsystem: QBATCH.
batch update. The process of updating master files using a group of transactions
that are being held in a transaction file. Contrast with immediate update.
character. A member of a set of elements that is used for the representation,
organization, or control of data. Characters may be letters, digits, punctuation
marks, or other symbols. (T)
CL. Control language.
command. A request for the performance of an operation or the execution of a
particular program. A command consists of the command name, which identifies
the requested function, and parameters.
configuration. The group of machines, devices, and programs that make up a
data processing system. See system configuration.
control language (CL). A programming language that identifies processing
requirements to OS/400.
controlling subsystem (QCTL). An interactive subsystem that is started
automatically when the system is started, and through which the system operator
controls the system. IBM supplies one controlling subsystem: QCTL.
cursor. A movable character (underscore) on a display that indicates where the
next character typed by the operator will appear.
data. A representation of facts, concepts, or instructions in a formalized manner
suitable for communication, interpretation, or processing by human or automatic
means. (I) (A)
data entry. The act of recording a transaction in the book of account or master file.
data area. An object that is used to communicate data, such as CL variable
values, between the programs within a job and between jobs. The systemrecognized identifier is *DTAARA.
database. A collection of stored data.
dedicated mode. A mode of operation that requires that no other batch or
interactive MAPICS XA jobs are running. Many of the Cross Application Support
functions must be done in dedicated mode.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-4
Glossary
default. An alternative attribute, option, or value that is assumed when none has
been specified.
disk. A round flat plate coated with a magnetic substance on which data for a
computer is stored.
disk file. An organized collection of related records on disk that are treated as a
unit.
disk storage. Direct access storage that uses one or more magnetic disks to store
data files and programs.
diskette. A small, flexible, magnetic disk permanently enclosed in a protective
jacket. Diskettes are a removable medium used to store information until it is
required for processing.
display. (1) A visual presentation of data. (I) (A) (2) The part of a workstation on
which data, messages, or other information is displayed.
edit. To verify the form or format of data; for example, to test a data field such as
customer number.
enter. To send coding, data, or a message to a computer from a keyboard.
field. In a form, display, or record, a specified area used for a particular category of
data. For example, the area on a display that is regularly used to show an item
number.
file. An organized collection of related records treated as a unit.
file maintenance. The online process of updating MAPICS XA application master
files.
function key. One of the keys of the workstation keyboard to request specific
functions from the system or application program.
ID. Identifier.
immediate update. The process of updating master files where individual
transactions are applied to the file as soon as they are entered. Contrast with batch
update.
initial program load (IPL). A sequence of events that loads the system programs
and prepares the system for execution of jobs.
inquiry. A request for information in storage.
interactive job. A job in which the processing actions are performed in response
to input provided by a work station or system operator. During the job, a dialog
exists between the operator and the system. Contrast with batch job.
interactive subsystem (QINTER). A subsystem in which interactive jobs are to be
processed. IBM supplies three interactive subsystems: QCTL, QINTER, and
QPGMP (programmer subsystem).
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-5
Glossary
interface. The facility to allow applications to pass or share information.

IPL. Initial program load.
job queue. A list of jobs waiting to be processed by the system.
library. An object that is a directory to other objects. A library is used to group
related objects and to find objects by name when they are used. Libraries can
contain data files, source files, and program objects; the files can also contain
members.
load. To enter data or programs into storage; for example, to load a master file.
main menu. The first menu in a series of menus.
main storage. Storage in the processing unit where all logical, arithmetic, and
control operations take place under program control.
maintenance tape. A tape containing application correction sets used for
updating MAPICS XA program. There are two kinds of maintenance tapes: a
program corrective maintenance tape (PCM) and an application modification level
tape (AML).
MAPICS XA. Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control
System Extended Advantage.
master file. A file that is used as an authority in a given job and that is relatively
permanent, even though its contents may change. (I) (A)
menu. A displayed list of items from which the operator makes a selection.
message. A series of words or symbols, appearing on the display screen or
printed output, that convey information.
multiprogramming. (1) A mode of operation that provides for the interleaved
execution of two or more computer programs by a single processor. (I) (A) (2)
Pertaining to current execution of two or more computer programs by a computer.
(A)
object. A named unit that consists of a set of descriptive characteristics (that
describe the object) and data. An object is anything that exists and occupies space
in storage, and on which operations can be performed. Some examples of objects
are programs, files, and libraries.
offline. Pertaining to equipment or devices not under control of the processing
unit. Contrast with online.
offline data entry. A form of data entry in which data is read into the computing
system from offline files.
online. Pertaining to equipment or devices under direct control of the processing
unit. Contrast with offline.
OS/400. The operating system for the IBM AS/400 system.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-6
Glossary
parameter. A value that is specified in a command.

password. An alphanumeric security code that allows access to a set of computer
operations or data. See user password.
PCM tape. Program corrective maintenance tape.
program-described file. A file in which record fields are described in the program
that processes the file.
procedure. One or more CL programs that cause a specific function or set of
functions to be performed.
processing unit. The part of a computer system that operates on data.
Product Support Center (PSC). Support personnel who you can contact to help
you with your MAPICS XA applications.
program. An object that contains a set of instructions that tells a computer where
to get input data, how to process it, and where to put the results.
program corrective maintenance. The process of updating MAPICS XA
programs by loading either a program corrective maintenance tape (PCM) or an
application modification level (AML) tape and applying the application correction
sets (ACSs) that are on the tape.
program corrective maintenance (PCM) tape or CD. One of two types of
maintenance tapes. The PCM tape or CDis sent to the customer upon request.
prompt. A symbol or message to an operator requesting information or describing
an action that is needed to continue processing.
PSC. Product Support Center.
QBATCH. See batch subsystem.
questionnaire. A unique set of questions for each MAPICS XA application first
answered when the application is installed and used to tailor the application to meet
your companys need.
record. (1) A collection of related data that is treated as a unit. For example, one
line of an invoice could constitute a record. (2) To store data on a reusable input/
output medium, such as a disk, diskette, or punched cards.
register. A record for the consecutive entry of a certain class of events,
documents, or transactions, with a proper notation of all the required particulars.
session. The period of time during which a user of a terminal can communicate
with an interactive system, usually, elapsed time between logon and logoff or signon and sign-off.
sign off. To end a session at a workstation.
sign-off. The procedure by which an operator ends a workstation session.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-7
Glossary
sign on. To begin a session at a workstation.

sign-on. The procedure by which an operator begins a workstation session.
source document. The original record of a transaction.
spooling (Simultaneous peripheral operation online). (1) Reading and writing
input and output streams on an intermediate device in a format convenient for later
processing or output. (2) Performing a peripheral operation such as printing while
the computer is busy with other work.
SYSCTL file. System control file.
system configuration. A process that specifies the devices and programs that
form a particular data processing system.
system control file. A program-described file containing the answers to the
install/tailor questionnaires for all MAPICS XA applications.
system date The date assigned by the system operator during initial program
load. Generally, the system date is the same as the actual date.
system operator. A person who uses a workstation to activate certain system
functions and to control and monitor system operation.
system printer. The printer, designated during system configuration, that is used
for system and workstation printed output, unless the output is specifically directed
to another printer.
transaction. An item of business, such as receipt of an order or paying a bill.
update. To modify a file with current information according to a specified
procedure.
user ID. A special value assigned to an operator and typed in when the operator
signs on. The system uses the value to determine whether the operator is
authorized to use the system or requested function.
user password. A string of characters known to a system and a user to allow
access to a system. See AS/400 password.
user profile. See AS/400 user profile.
user profile name. See AS/400 user profile name.
workstation. An input/output device that contains a display on which data is
shown and an attached keyboard through which data is entered.
Contents
Index
Exit
Page G-8
Glossary
Contents
Index
Exit
Index
A
Accounts Payable
questionnaire B-7
special forms C-4
Accounts Receivable
questionnaire B-17
special forms C-9
activating interfaces after installation 4-2
application tailoring 2-1
applications having no install/tailor questions B-1
AS/400 security levels 3-3
auditing and controlling data
backing up data 5-3
controlling access to data 5-3
correct sequence of operations 5-4
creating an audit trail 5-2
data accuracy 5-3
B
backing up data 5-3
batch job queues 5-5
C
questionnaire B-29
chart of accounts, sample
distribution D-6
manufacturing D-2
COM_Net
questionnaire B-39
conflicts, procedure or data 5-5
Contract Accounting (CA) B-1
questionnaire B-3
questionnaire B-31
special forms C-16
D
date format for MAPICS XA 3-3
dedicated mode 5-5
E
Electronic Commerce (EC), no questionnaire B-1
questionnaire B-41
environments (Extended Environment Support)
creating 4-3
for testing 4-2
Estimating and Quote Management (EQM), no questionnaire B-1
eWorkPlacegraphical user interface for MAPICS XA 1-13
Executive Information System (EIS), no questionnaire B-1
Page IN-1
Index
Contents
Index
Page IN-2
Index
Exit
F
files, master. See master files
Financial Analysis questionnaire B-49
Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS), no questionnaire B-1
Forecasting questionnaire B-53
forms, special
about C-2
Accounts Payable C-4
Accounts Receivable C-9
Customer Order Management C-16
Manufacturing Performance Analysis C-20
Payroll C-21
Production Control and Costing C-29
Production Monitoring and Control C-32
Purchasing C-49
Repetitive Production Management C-61
G
General Ledger
questionnaire B-63
General Ledger Master File LoadChart of Accounts formGL-11 D-10
graphical user interface for MAPICS XAeWorkPlace 1-13
group job support, setting up 4-4
I
initial application installation 3-4
install/tailor 3-4
installation
AS/400 hardware and operating system 3-2
AS/400 security (user profiles) 3-2
AS/400 security levels for MAPICS XA 3-3
AS/400 subsystem configuration for MAPICS XA
checklists, using 1-2, 1-3
initial application installation 3-4
install/tailor 3-4
MAPICS XA date format 3-3
interfaces
activating 4-2
summary table 2-4
questionnaire B-71
InterSite Logistics (ISL/MISL), no questionnaire B-1
questionnaire B-75
J
job queues, multiple batch
about 5-5
jobs, unattached 5-6
K
Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC)
B-1
3-3
Contents
Index
Page IN-3
Index
Exit
L
libraries
on install tapes 1-5
on PCM tapes 1-6
on source tapes 1-5
license key 1-2
license management 1-2
license, registered user 1-2
license, tier user 1-2
M
questionnaire B-95
special forms C-20
Market Monitoring and Analysis (MMA), no questionnaire B-1
master files
entering data into 3-5
gathering information for before installation 2-23
questionnaire B-101
questionnaire B-105
Materials Management (MM), no questionnaire B-1
N
note tasks
activating 4-6
deactivating 4-6
reorganizing 4-6
setting up 4-5
O
Order-Based Production Management (OBPM), no questionnaire B-1
P
Payroll
questionnaire B-107
special forms C-21
prerequisites, MAPICS XA application 2-2
print spooling 5-7
Procurement Management (PM), no questionnaire B-1
questionnaire B-123
questionnaire B-131
special forms C-29
questionnaire B-159
special forms C-32
Purchasing
questionnaire B-171
special forms C-49
Q
QSECURITY, security levels
3-3
Contents
Index
Page IN-4
Index
Exit
questionnaires
about 2-1
Accounts Payable B-7
Accounts Receivable B-17
activating interfaces summary table 2-4
Capacity Requirements Planning B-29
COM_Net B-39
Cross Application Support B-3
Customer Order Management B-31
Enterprise Product Data Management B-41
Financial Analysis B-49
Forecasting B-53
General Ledger B-63
International Financial Management B-71
Inventory Management B-75
Manufacturing Performance Analysis B-95
Master Production Schedule Planning B-101
Material Requirements Planning B-105
Payroll B-107
Product Data Management B-123
Production Control and Costing B-131
Production Monitoring and Control B-159
Purchasing B-171
Repetitive Production Management B-187
Sales Analysis B-193
R
registered user license 1-2
questionnaire B-187
special forms C-61
S
Sales Analysis questionnaire B-193
scheduling the work
daily 5-4
multiple batch job queues 5-5
print spooling 5-7
storage capacity 5-6
unattached jobs 5-6
security
AS/400 levels for MAPICS XA 3-3
AS/400 subsystem configuration for MAPICS XA
AS/400 user profiles 3-2
establishing for MAPICS XA 4-3
sign-ons, tailored 4-3
special forms
about C-2
Accounts Payable C-4
Accounts Receivable C-9
Customer Order Management C-16
Manufacturing Performance Analysis C-20
Payroll C-21
Production Control and Costing C-29
Production Monitoring and Control C-32
Purchasing C-49
Repetitive Production Management C-61
3-3
Contents
Index
Page IN-5
Index
Exit
storage capacity 5-6

subsystem configuration, MAPICS XA
supplies 1-4
3-3
T
tailored sign-ons 4-3
tailoring your applications 2-1
tapes, MAPICS XA
install 1-4, 1-5
source 1-5
testing your applications 4-2
tier user license 1-2
U
unattached jobs 5-6
user profiles, AS/400 3-2
Using eWorkPlace with MAPICS XA documentation
1-13
Contents
Index
Exit
Page IN-6
Index
Contents
Index
Exit
Readers comments
Planning and Installing MAPICS XA, SB35-4263-9,

Evaluation Form
How satisfied are you with the information in this documentation:
Very
satisfied
Satisfied
Neutral
Unsatisfied
Very
dissatisfied
Accurate
Complete
Easy to find
Easy to understand
Well organized
Task oriented
Overall rating
THANK YOU
Please tell us how we can improve this documentation:

What I like least: _________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
What I like most: _________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Other comments:_________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
May we contact you to discuss your responses? Yes No (______) _____________________

To return this form:
If you would like a reply:
Mail it to:
MAPICS, Inc.
1000 Windward Concourse Parkway
Suite 100
USA
Fax it to: (678) 319-8140
Name: ________________________________________
Title: _______________________________________
Company: _____________________________________
Address: _____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
Type of business: ____________________________
Fax: (_____) _________________________________
MAPICS, Inc. may use or distribute the responses
to this form without obligation to you.
Contents
Index
Exit
MAPICS, Inc.
1000 Windward Concourse
Parkway
Suite 100
USA
Readers comments
Printed in the U.S.A.

XAPI6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XAPI6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

Manufacturing Accounting and Production Information Control

Published by MAPICS, Inc. in Alpharetta, Georgia USA

Trademarks and service marks

Tenth Edition (June 2000)

Repetitive Production Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Capacity Requirements Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29

Financial Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49

International Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71

Manufacturing Performance Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95

Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Production Control and Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Production Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C. Special forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Current assets 10001499 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6

Chapter 1. Before you begin

This license allows unlimited users (processor based). Some

Overview of installation activities

Users Guides/Concept Guides

Users Guides/Concept Guides

Using the installation checklists

Training the personnel

Tapes or CDs you receive

nnnnn Last digit of the release level

Install tapes or CDs

Programs used to install applications

CAS data area

First part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)

Second part of the install/tailor library (AMXLIB)

Third part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

First part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

Second part of CAS files shipped for reload to AMFLIB

First part of the program library (AMALIB)

Second part of the program library (AMALIB)

Third part of the program library (AMALIB)

Fourth part of the program library (AMALIB)

Information about an application

Install/tailor programs and files for an application

AMALIB daily operational programs, display files, and help

AMFLIB data structures

Source tapes or CDs

Program Corrective Maintenance (PCM)

Programs used to apply application correction sets. If there are

Information about application correction sets for a specific

Object code for an application that is placed in your installed

Source code for fixes to an application

Contract Accounting (CA)

Enterprise Product Data Management

Estimating and Quote Management (EQM)

Finite Capacity Planning and Scheduling (FCPS)

InterSite Logistic (ISL)

Knowledge Based Configurator (KBC)

Manufacturing Performance Analysis (MPA)

Multi-Environment InterSite Logistics (MISL)

Procurement Management (PM)

Overview of euro currency support

Customer Order Management (COM)

Local currency conversion tool: For companies within euro-participating

MAPICS provides these functions in support of euro conversion:

Cross Application Support

Accounting Management Accounts Payable

Accounting Management Accounts Receivable

Accounting Management General Ledger

Capacity Requirements Planning